Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
Getting Help
To assist you in your work Edgecam features various prompts and help systems: Tooltips and Feedback Hover the cursor over a button to see descriptive text (usually enabled).
Also look at the Status Bar on the bottom left of the screen which gives a brief explanation of the command (as well as other useful information and prompts relevant to your current task). Customer Support Accessible to registered users via the Help menu. Online User Guide Help Complete reference information accessible via the Help menu. Help system includes indexing and a full text search facility. Online Dialog Help Help on the settings in a dialog, assessed through the dialog's Help button. Tutorials Step by step exercises using example parts, that quickly get you start with Edgecam.
About Edgecam
Edgecam offers you a complete CAM solution, enabling you to quickly produce CNC code for imported or internally-generated part designs, and giving you control over all the stages of the process. You can: Import part design geometry: Import designs from a wide variety of CAD packages including Autodesk Inventor, SolidWorks, CATIA V5, SolidEdge, UGS NX, Pro/Engineer. Import solid model designs in a wide variety of interface formats, including STEP, IGES, SAT, DWG, DXF, VDA. Or create your own geometry: Create surfaces and wireframe within Edgecam for part design and toolpath control. Create machining: Base your milling and turning on wireframe, surface or solid geometry. Quickly create toolpaths with many automated settings using operations. To fine tune the toolpaths, edit the cycles within the operations (or create cycles directly). Choose tools from a comprehensive tooling database: You use the 'ToolStore' supporting application. Input your own tooling data or import from 3rd party suppliers. Automate speed and feed selection using stored tooling and material data. Create milling machining: Create a wide variety of machining such as roughing, profiling and facing, using strategies such as lace, flowline and waterline (z-level). Create up to 5 axis machining - multi-index and simultaneous. Create turn machining: Create a wide variety of machining including rough and finish turning, rough and finish grooving. Create multi turret and multi-spindle machining. Program twin turrets independently, with manual synchronisation, or use the 'balanced' cycles with automatic synchronisation. Incorporate milling machining with a mill/turn machine. Create 2 to 4 Axis Wire EDM. Create configurations supporting your machine tools: Use the 'Code Wizard' supporting application to configure your machine tool capabilities into a single 'Code Generator' (post-processor) file, for quick selection. Configure multi-axis (linear and rotary) milling machines and turning machines. Use the 'get you
started' templates for many popular machines and controllers including Fanuc, Okuma, Daewoo. Include a graphical representation of your machine using the provided, or custom (solid model) graphics. Simulate your machining: Watch you part being machined in a graphical representation of your machine, checking for collisions and so on. Generate CNC code for your machining, tailored by your stored machine configuration. Quickly manipulate your machining: Automatically adapt your machining to external changes in the solid part file ('associativity'). Change the order of the machining. Mirror and copy toolpaths Edit parameters such as tool diameters, with instant toolpath regeneration. Create automated tasks Use Edgecam's 'PCI' macro language.
Additional Programs
Code Wizard Configure the requirements of a CNC machine into a new code generator, which is then used to prduce CNC code tailored for that machine. (Not available in Student Edition mode.) Set up communication links so that you can transmit and receive files between PCs and machine tools over your local area network. A dedicated CNC file editor with essential editing, comparison and formatting features. Manage 'jobs' (kits of tooling). Automatically calculate feeds and speeds for tools to be used within Edgecam.
Toolkit Assistant Manage your ToolStore database more effectively and streamline the process of preparing to write an NC file. ToolStore ToolStore Administrator Simulate Machining Rapid Result Strategy Manager Utilities Store, manage and retrieve details of your tools. Manage your tooling databases - switch active database, backup, restore, delete and so on. A 'real time' preview of your machining showing the material being cut, the cutting tool, and even graphics of the complete machine tool. A faster version of Simulator, moving directly to showing the final machined stock, so that you can compare this with the component design intent. Automatically machine a feature based on an analysis of the feature by pre-written logical routines. A range of utilities. There is a utility for setting up file sharing across networks, for example.
Remembering Settings
The 'modality' functionality speeds up your work by remembering settings. When you open a dialog, the 'Modal' options are initially as you last set them, while the 'Non-Modal' options are always at a default setting (such as blank for numbers). To change the modal settings for a command 1. Click Options menu Preferences Modality tab Customise Mode to check it.
2. Select a command to open its dialog. Use the menus rather than toolbar buttons, as buttons do not always open a dialog. 3. Click OK to open a second version of the dialog, with Modal/Non Modal options (some options may also include a PCI variable name). 4. Make the Modal or Non-Modal settings as required and click OK. 5. Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 for all commands that you want to alter. 6. Repeat step 1 to un-check Customise Mode. Note: If you change the value of a modal option when editing an instruction the value will only apply to that instruction. All other instructions that use the option will still use the original value. To reset the modal settings to the installed defaults Click Options menu Preferences Modality tab Reset Defaults.
Function
Action
Hot Key
Ctrl+ '='
Display sum of values in modifier Hold down Ctrl key and press '='key box (this only applies where you see [~Level] in pre-Version 9.0 style operations). Activate Free Digitize mode Activate Entity Digitize mode Activate Grid Digitize mode Select all valid, visible entities in current view Deselect entities and if in a command return to dialog Zoom In Zoom Out Toggle the display of the Simulation toolbar Toggle the display of the Layers window Toggle the display of the Features window Toggle the display of the Feedback window Toggle the display of the Layers window Toggle the display of the Properties window Toggle the display of the Sequence window Hold down Shift key while selecting the left hand mouse button Hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the left hand mouse button Hold down the Ctrl and Shift keys while selecting the left hand mouse button Hold down Ctrl key and press A key Select the Escape key Roll top of mouse wheel away from you. Roll top of mouse wheel towards you Hold down Ctrl and Shift keys and press S key. Hold down Ctrl and Shift keys and press L key. Hold down Ctrl and Shift keys and press A key. Hold down Ctrl and Shift keys and press K key. Hold down Ctrl and Shift keys and press L key. Hold down Ctrl and Shift keys and press P key. Hold down Ctrl and Shift keys and press B key.
Shift+ left mouse button Ctrl+ left mouse button Shift+Ctrl+ left mouse button Ctrl+A Escape
Shift + Ctrl + S Shift + Ctrl + L Shift + Ctrl + A Shift + Ctrl + K Shift + Ctrl + S Shift + Ctrl + P Shift + Ctrl + B Shift + Ctrl + I
Toggle the display of the Timeline Hold down Ctrl and Shift keys and press I window key.
Toggle the display of the Tracking window Toggle the display of the Simulation window Toggle the display of the Status window Rotate model up in active view
Hold down Ctrl and Shift keys and press C key. Hold down Ctrl and Shift keys and press S key. Hold down Ctrl and Shift keys and press T key.
Hold down Ctrl key and select Up arrow key. Ctrl+ Up arrow Or right-click and drag. Ctrl+ Down arrow
Rotate model down in active view Hold down Ctrl key and select Down arrow key. Or right-click and drag. Rotate model left in active view
Hold down Ctrl key and select Left arrow key Ctrl+ Left arrow Ctrl+ Right arrow
Rotate model right in active view Hold down Ctrl key and select Right arrow key Pan model in active view Click and drag using mouse wheel.
Pan model up in active view - XZ Hold down Shift key and select Up arrow key Shift+ Up arrow Clip Plane (Analysis model) Hold down Shift key and select Down arrow Pan model down in active view key XZ Clip Plane (Analysis model) Hold down Shift key and select Left arrow Pan model left in active view - XZ key Clip Plane (Analysis model) Pan model right in active view XZ Clip Plane (Analysis model) Hold down Shift key and select Right arrow key Shift+ Down arrow Shift+ Left arrow Shift+ Right arrow
Toggle between selected entities Toggle between entities in Intellisnap (Edgecam only, not available in selection area
ToolStore)
Tab key (forward) Shift+ Tab key (backward) X Y Z Ctrl+ hold down left mouse button
Rotate locking X axis Rotate locking Y axis Rotate locking Z axis To copy an instruction using the browser
Select the X key and rotate Select the Y key and rotate Select the Z key and rotate Select the instruction(s), hold down the Ctrl key and drag to a new location in the sequence.
10
Title Bar Menu Bar Mode Buttons A toolbar (Standard) A View (in the Graphics Area) Right-click for this menu A View (in the Graphics Area) A Window (docked) (the Features window) A Window (docked) A Window (undocked) CPL Marker View Caption Status Bar
11
Toolbars
Toolbars are arrays of buttons. There are standard toolbars, such as the Mill toolbar which you can use to start creating milling cycles. You can also create your own toolbars. You can show or hide a toolbar. You can 'dock' a toolbar at the edge of the Graphics Area, or you can 'undock' it, when it freely floats in the Graphics Area. (An exception to this is the Menu bar, which is displayed, and always docked at the top of the Edgecam window.) You can move a toolbar. You can add and remove buttons. You can ensure all the toolbar's buttons appear as text or text and image (disabling the 'Image only' setting for the buttons). You can reset toolbars to 'factory settings'.
12
Commands
A command performs a specific action in Edgecam. Commands appear on toolbars and in menus as buttons. You use a command by clicking on its button or by clicking it within a shortcut menu. You can also use the command's shortcut key (combination), if there is one. You can assign shortcut keys to commands. Re-set shortcut key assignments. You can create commands. Commands are in categories. When you are adding the button for a command to a toolbar, you select the category the command is in. In general, categories correspond to menus, so the Geometry category commands will appear in the Geometry menu. You can see a short summary of the purpose of a command, and the command's button icon: 1. Right-click on any toolbar. 2. In the subsequent shortcut menu click Customise to open the Customise dialog. 3. Click on the Commands tab title to switch to the tab. 4. In the Categories list click the command's category, or try All Commands if you are not sure what this is. 5. In the Commands list, scroll to the command. The All Categories listing is in list is in alpha-numeric order. 6. Note the icon next to the command in the list. Click on the command and note the summary in the Description box.
13
Status Bar
The Status bar of the Edgecam Window shows: The Description of a button, as you rest the cursor on it. Prompts for your next action. For example when creating a cycle you might see the prompt 'Digitise Level for this command'. At the right-hand end:
Shown Means mm in XY ZX DIA RAD GRID millimetre units are active (click on 'mm' for information on setting units) inch units are active (click on 'in' for information on setting units) XY is the current environment (click to replace with 'ZX') ZX is the current environment (click to replace with 'XY') Diametral input mode is currently active in the ZX environment (click to replace with 'RAD') Radial input mode is currently active in the ZX environment (click to replace with 'DIA') Click this when digitising to snap to grid points (only available when the grid is displayed (View menu Grid). Click this when digitising to make an ENTITY digitise. See General Principles of Digitising for more information. (Not always available.) Click this when digitising to make a FREE digitise. See General Principles of Digitising for more information. (Not always available.)
ENTITY
FREE
14
Buttons
There are command and menu buttons. You click on a command button to perform or activate the command. You click on a menu button to expand the menu, to show the items within it. Buttons can appear in toolbars. They can also appear in menus (so you can have a menu within another menu). Some buttons are combined command and menu buttons. Some buttons have a lasting effect. For example you start the Polyline command by clicking its button, and the command stays active until you de-activate it (by right-clicking for example). While the button is active, this is indicated by its appearance; by an orange background, for example. You can: create new buttons. Opt for tooltips to be displayed when you rest the cursor on a button, showing the button's name. Opt for the shortcut key of the button's command to be shown in the tooltip. Opt for larger versions of buttons' images. You can change the appearance of a button in these ways: Display the button as text (the name of the command or menu), or an image, or both. Customise the image. You can change to one of a pre-defined set of images, or create an image yourself. Reset to the default image.
15
Menus
A menu is a special type of button; it is an expandable lists of further buttons. As an example of using a menu, you could click on the File menu to expand it and show its buttons. You could then click on the Open button to open a new part. You can: Change the way menus expand when you click on them. Opt for drop shadows to appear around expanded menus.
Shortcut menu There is also a Shortcut menu that provides a quick alternative to some of the commonly used buttons and preference settings. The menu also features a list of recently used commands (at the bottom), that you can use to quickly repeat a command. To display the Shortcut menu: If you are not already using a command right-click in the Graphics area. If you are already using a command, such as drawing a line, hold down the right mouse key rather than clicking, until the menu appears (clicking will terminate the command). You can: Use Options menu Shortcut to set the delay before the menu opens, and also the number of recently used commands listed.
16
17
Menu Bar
The Menu bar is a special toolbar. As a toolbar, you can dock and undock it, and customise it (for example you could remove a menu or add a new menu). Unlike the other toolbars however: You cannot hide the Menu bar. For menu buttons within the Menu bar there is more limited customisation available than for other menu buttons; you can only change the button's text. It is re-set using a different method to other toolbars.
18
View Caption
In the View Caption there is an indication of the view orientation ('Top', 'Left' and so on), and of the zoom magnification factor. You can right-click on the View Caption to display shortcut menu options for working with the view; you can change its orientation and other properties for example.
19
Windows
Windows are sub-areas within the Edgecam window dedicated to a particular area of functionality. Examples are: The Features window which you use to work with found features. The Sequences window, in which you work with your machining instructions. You can: Show and hide windows. Auto-hide windows (this means the window collapses to a small marker at its docking point when you move the cursor out of the window; you expand the window back to full size by moving the cursor over the marker). Move, dock and undock windows. Multiple windows can be docked to the same edge of the Graphics window. In this case: The edge can be divided up into an area for each window. Alternatively multiple windows can grouped into the same area, with tabs for switching between them. You choose between these alternatives by how you dock the window. If tabbed windows are auto-hidden, there is a small marker for each of the tabs. Change the font. This is a Windows setting; refer to your Windows documentation for details.
20
Features Window
The Features Window of the overall Edgecam window is a central area for working with the loaded solids, and any features found in the solids. At the top of the window there is a row of buttons that you can use to:
Switch to Tree View See features' parent solid body and CPL.
Assign Strategies
As well as the options provided by the buttons above, you can: Rest the cursor over a solid or feature to highlight that solid or feature in the Graphics Area. Right-click on a solid or feature to display a shortcut menu of commands; there are commands for editing (including renaming), assigning strategies and deleting, for example. (Note that you cannot delete a feature if its layer (which is one of the feature's properties) is not displayed.) Click on a feature to select it and display its properties in the Properties Window. Please note: The labels for the solids are taken from their original file name (plus the number if the file contained multiple bodies). On a solid model reload, changes to the underlying geometry of a feature in the solid may be detected. These are indicated with an added status prefix to the feature name: New the last automatic feature find has been repeated, finding new features in the solid. Changed the feature properties have changed, perhaps the 'Depth' of a pocket. Orphaned the link to the underlying geometry in the feature cannot be maintained - the geometry may have been deleted, or it may have undergone too large a change. Note if a boolean union has been performed, the 'tool' part of the union is effectively deleted as the underlying geometry of features. Face features cannot be given the orphaned status. Orphaned Edge Loop features are also shown with dotted lines. Best Match a more tentative link between feature and solid geometry has been maintained. Some of the faces of a Face feature may have been deleted for example, while still leaving enough faces to make a 'guess' that the link still exists. To specify a further action, right-click on the feature and select from the shortcut menu that opens. The options available depend on the new status, and the type of the feature. For example: For 'Orphaned' features, select Delete, or select Edit and re-specify the underlying geometry. For 'Changed' features you can select Accept. (Note that clicking Accept simply acknowledges that
21
you have seen the indication. The machining based on the features may still need to be updated (this can happen automatically on a reload, according to your Regenerate Current Sequence preference setting).) You can use Accept on multiple selected features, or on solids or CPLs (accepts all their features). If any modified features have not been accepted when you enter manufacture mode, a warning message will be displayed, and you will be prompted to complete the review process. Features are listed by their entity number, which equates to their order of creation. A 'tapped hole' feature with a '?' against its name is not 'fully defined'; one or more or these parameters is not set: Thread Units, Tap Diameter, Drill Size, Pitch/TPI, and Depth.
22
In the List View option of the Features Window the features are presented in a table, with one row per feature, and columns for the some of the feature properties (such as Type and Name). To change the column widths, click on a column heading then drag the divider left or right with the new cursor style.
Strategies One of the columns lists the 'Assigned Strategies' - see Machining with Strategies for details. These strategies are shown with a left to right order corresponding to the listed order of the strategies in the Assign Strategies to a Feature dialog. Machining Instructions Click the button next to a feature to see the machining instructions applicable to the feature (Toolchange and Cycle only). Hover over a cycle instruction to see its toolpath highlighted. Click on an instruction to select it, and also select the instruction in the Sequence Window. Note that one toolchange may appear under more than one feature. Click the Sorting You can drag the feature rows up and down in the list, until it is in the order you want. Or you can have the rows ordered automatically, according to their column entries. For most of the columns this is an alpha-numeric sort, note however that for the Feature Type column, the sort is based on a suggested order of machining, as calculated by Edgecam - see more details. The current sorting scheme is indicated in the column headings, as shown in the following table. You control these settings using the Sort Order Dialog, described below. To re-sort after dragging to a different order, click OK in the Sort Order dialog without changing any settings. button to hide the machining instructions.
23
If the (1) sort does not discriminate between several features (all the features in the same CPL for example), then these features are sorted according to their (2) column entries. If the (1) and (2) sorts do discriminate between several features, then these features are sorted according to their (3) column entries. . and so on Note that a column might not have a Priority number - it may have been left blank in the Sort Order dialog (see below).
Indicates an ascending sort for the column ('a' above 'b', '1' above '2'). Click on the column heading to switch to ' '. (Note how this does not necessarily invert the whole list - only the ordering of those features which need this column to determine their order.)
Indicates a descending sort for the column ('b' above 'a', '2' above '1'). Click on the column heading to switch to ' '.
Sort Order dialog To fully control the columns' Priority and Direction (Ascending/Descending) settings: 1. Click the button at the top of the Feature Window.
2. In the Feature Browser - Sort Order dialog that opens: Click on the Priority or Direction column for a property to select it. Click again and select from the list that appears. Not all the columns need have a Priority number - columns left blank rank lower than any number. If you assign the same Priority number to more than one column, the column furthest to the Left in the table has the highest ranking. 3. Click OK to close the dialog. (Click OK without making any changes to re-sort the table to the current scheme, after dragging the rows to a different order.)
24
A solid A CPL in which features have been found. A feature found in the CPL ....any other features.... ...any other CPLs.... ....any other solids..... Click to close a branch; click to open a branch.
The features are only identified by a type description, such as '2D Boss'. For a more detailed listing, including the features' names, and sorting options, use the List View .
25
Sequence Window
The Sequence Window shows sequences of machining instructions. It uses a 'tree' style similar to Windows Explorer. The instruction labels feature a sequence number and the type of the instruction (for example 'Pocket Operation'). Toolchange instructions may also feature a Sort Priority number. You can: Right-click on an instruction to open a shortcut menu of commands to operate on that instruction, such as the Edit command. Right-click on the window background to open a shortcut menu of commands relating to the instructions as a whole, such as Search, which searches all the instructions for text. Re-arrange, edit and delete instructions. Arrange instructions into various groupings. Show or hide the layer showing a tool's toolpaths. Opt for an instruction's toolpath to be highlighted when you rest the cursor on the instruction; use the Options menu > Preferences > Toolpaths tab > Highlight Instructions option. Side-by-Side mode In Side-by-Side mode there is a separate tab for each sequence. You can right-click on the tab title to display a shortcut list of menu options; for example you can choose New to create a new sequence. Click on a tab title to bring it to the front. Double-click on a tab title to select it as the active sequence (becomes marked with a '*'. To switch to Side-by-Side mode right-click in the window and click to check Side by Side. Check the Single Scroll Bar option to scroll both window panes at the same time. Twin Turrets In the turning environment you can use the 'Side by Side' option for viewing instructions for twin turrets. Each turret appears as a separately titled sequence in one tab. Click on a title to select it. Double-click to select the turret as the active turret (becomes marked with a '*'). The synchronisation commands are displayed in the window in both turrets. On each turret, the Spindle column shows the currently active spindle (main or sub), with the green background indicating spindle priority. A driven tool icon is displayed in the instruction list next to the tool change icon. This helps you to differentiate between driven and fixed tool mode.
26
Grouping Instructions
Folders can appear in the Sequence Window that contain instructions; these are 'instruction groups':
Group Closed
Group Open
You work with groups in the same way as you work with individual instructions; for example you can delete a group, which deletes all the instructions within it. In this respect groups are similar to Windows Explorer folders and their files. They are similar in many other respects; for example you can rename groups, open and close them, and move and copy them. The sequence and the instructions within a folder are not affected by being in the folder. For example you can insert into the folder's sequence in the normal way. You can work with a group by right-clicking on it and selecting a command from the shortcut menu. To group instructions, right-click in the Sequence Window and in the shortcut menu click the appropriate Group command. For example Group Group by Tool. You can also 'Group by Index' and 'Group by Synchronisation'. Only one grouping can apply at any one time, so for example using Group by Tool will undo the Group by Index. Note: Do not confuse this way of grouping with the groupings you create with the Instructions command. Operation
The groupings group together instructions between events in the sequence, so 'Group by Tool' is more accurately described as 'Group by Toolchange' (the toolchange instruction is always the first in the group). Grouped instructions are displayed in the Time Line in the same way as Operations.
27
28
The checks are automatically triggered by various events. For example on entering Manufacture Mode, or if a change to the loaded solid is detected (the change being made in an external CAD package). Note that if the automatic checks cause too much of a delay, you can suppress them by unchecking the preference Options menu Preferences Toolpaths tab Check for Deleted Geometry. You would then only be warned of any problems when you generate CNC code. Note that you can also perform checks manually, on a feature-by-feature basis.
29
30
Feedback Window
The Feedback Window is a general messaging area. It displays information on, for example: Various Verify commands (it opens automatically when a Verify command is used). The Strategy Manager log file. Solid model tolerance. The results of a feature find or solid file reload. Can be disabled by unchecking Options menu Preferences Solids tab Feature Find Summary. Right click in the Feedback window to display the Shortcut menu commands: Copy - Highlight the required text to copy. Clear - Clears all text from the window. Allow Docking - When checked the widow can be docked. Hide - Closes the window (same as clicking on the close button when undocked). You can opt for feedback to be displayed in a dialog (as in pre-version 7.50 releases), rather than the Feedback Window (the text from this cannot be copied):
31
Properties Window
The Properties Windows shows the properties of an item. The item can be, for example, the selected feature, the selected machine tool graphic, an instruction, or the Edgecam part (file). Some properties can be edited in the window, such as the colour of a feature. Other properties cannot be edited such as the properties of an instruction. Click to confirm edit, once made (see '*') Click to cancel edit
Property category
Note that: There may be other ways to edit properties that are not editable in the this window. To edit the Depth of a feature for example, right-click on the feature in the Features window and from the shortcut menu select Edit. Double-click on the Coord Input entry to highlight the selected cycle's geometry (rather than the selected cycle's toolpath). This only applies until the cycle becomes de-selected.
32
There are more details on features' Level, Depth, Bottom and Top properties. You can use the left and right arrow keys to step through the properties. Where a property has drop-down setting options, you can use the space bar to step through them. You can make multiple edits then confirm or cancel them all with a single click of the confirm or cancel button.
33
Please note: You can see the screenTip for an instruction by resting the cursor over it (see 'Rough Turning' above). The screenTip includes the total toolpath length. You can choose an option for an instruction, such as 'Edit' or 'Simulate', by right-clicking on the instruction. You can control spindle docking ( ) and un-docking ( ) icons by right-clicking on the white background and clicking Show Status Icons Off, Show Status Icons Full Size or Show Status Icons Compact. You can opt to show or hide the time scale by right-clicking on the white background and clicking Show Ruler. You can change the time scale using the mouse wheel. You can drag the window to you preferred position, or dock it in a number of positions. Colours differentiate between milling and turning instructions. You can fit the length of the line to the available window width by double-clicking on the white background. Spindle inactivity is displayed as grey space. The time line display is based on Edgecam cycle times and this limitation should be considered when viewing the time line window.
34
Tracking Window
Displays the current position of the cursor in the co-ordinates of the currently selected co-ordinate system. You can switch between CPL (Construction Plane), World and Machine co-ordinate systems using their buttons. You only see live CPL coordinates when you are digitising (specifying the start point of a line for example).
35
Status Bar The Status Bar at the bottom left shows the name of the view ('Top' in this case) and the zoom magnification factor ('1.20' in this case). CPL Markers Just above the Status Bar is a CPL marker showing the orientation of the current CPL, as seen from the current view. The marker shows the X axis, Y axis and Z axis of the CPL. In the centre of the illustration is the additional (CPL) Datum, which is at the origin of the current CPL (optionally display this using the View Configure dialog General tab). Turn CPL Marker In Turning mode the CPL marker has a ring which is divided top (Upper turret) and bottom (Lower turret) and left (Main spindle) and right (Sub-spindle). The yellow quadrant shows which spindle the selected turret is working on, whilst the grey quadrant shows which spindle the non-selected turret is working on. Here the Lower turret is selected and is working on the Main spindle, whilst the grey quadrant shows the Upper turret is also working on the Main spindle:
See Also Creating New Views by Splitting Tabbed Views Switching Views Configuring Views Relationship Between Views and the CPL
36
The following parameters on the General tab of the View Properties dialog control the alignment of the view port in relation to a CPL. Track CPL When checked the view port will automatically align itself with the current CPL. Align to CPL The view port is aligned to the selected CPL. The Rotate function is disabled until this option is turned off.
37
Switching Views
To change views right-click on the View Caption and select the new view from the shortcut menu.
For a quick method of changing between alternate view properties within a single view see Tabbed Views.
38
39
Tabbed Views
This functionality provides a quick method of changing between alternate view properties within a single view by creating a tabbed view, with each tab representing a user defined set of view properties.
See Also Creating a New Tab Editing and Deleting Tabs Layer Control and Tabbed Views
40
Select New View to call up the dialog. Type in a name for the new tab and modify the view properties according to your requirements.
41
As soon as the first user defined tab is created another tab labelled Default will be created. This stores the initial view configuration so you can easily switch from the user defined tab to the default tab. As new user defined tabs are created their names are added to the Name field on the dialog.
If you select a name from the list a duplicate tab will be created. If you then modify some of the properties the original tab remains unchanged. If a new view is created by splitting the current view it will inherit an identical set of tabs. Once split, the tabs of the two views can be changed independently.
42
Select these options to update the tabs properties from the current configuration or remove the tab respectively. The Properties option allows you to edit the view by making selections in the dialog.
43
You can use this to assign different layer options to each of the tabs. See Assigning Different Layer Options to Tabbed Views. The Select to hide option allows you to select an entity on the layer you wish to hide. Check the Select to hide box and press OK. You will then be prompted to digitize entities on the layer to exclude.
44
45
46
47
Standard Views
There are two sets of standard views in Edgecam; one for each environment. They are shown in the following table:
ZX Environment Turn Inverse Turn Radial Axial Isometric Turn Unwrap Wrap
48
Note the two options Horizontal Split and Vertical Split. Selecting either of these splits the original window into two new windows with the same properties. You can then set up each of the views as you wish. To move the split line, drag the line to its new position with the mouse. See Also Switching Views Configuring Views Tabbed Views
49
The rotation will occur about the centre of the model. To rotate the model about a point, position the cursor on the desired spot on the model and select this point as centre of rotation with a right-hand mouse click while holding down the Ctrl key. The selected point is moved to the screen centre. You can then use either method described above to rotate the model about the selected point. The Zoom Extents command will reset the centre back to the middle of the model.
50
Deleting Views
1. Right click in a view window to display the shortcut menu. 2. Select the Close Window option to delete the currently active view.
51
Panning Views
From the Display toolbar, this button lets you drag the view around:
Note that the cursor changes to the same shape to show that dynamic panning is active. If your mouse has a wheel you can also pan by holding down the wheel and moving the mouse.
52
Zooming Views
From the Display toolbar, the following buttons allow you to zoom in and out of the active view. Please note that the zoom factor on the views status bar changes as you click one of these buttons. Zoom in to the view. Zoom out from the view. If your mouse has a wheel it can be used for zooming in the active view . Move the wheel forward to zoom in and backward to zoom out, at the centre of the screen. To zoom relative to the current cursor position, pick a point on the model and move the wheel while holding down the Ctrl key. The cursor position will be moved to the centre of the screen and zooming will occur at that point.
Zoom to a window Select the Zoom Window icon and in the active view hold down the left-hand mouse button. Drag the cursor to cover the area that you want to zoom and release the left-hand mouse button. The part of the model covered by the window will fill the extents of the view. Zoom the model extents Select the Zoom extents icon and the complete model will be displayed within the active view.
Double-clicking the mouse wheel will display the complete model within the active view. To disable this functionality, create a new PCI Variable !checkMDoubleClick=0 and restart Edgecam in GLview. Also see Mouse Wheel Sensitivity.
53
Clipping Views
Clipping allows you to restrict the display of entities to a specified level. This is particularly useful when working with complex 3D wireframe models, in a multiplane milling environment and in solid turning. Clipping planes will be generated relative to the current CPL. When multiple views are displayed, it is possible to apply different clipping parameters to each view. To use clipping in GLview 1. A mouse click while the cursor is over the view caption at the bottom of the screen will activate a dropdown menu:
1. Select the Properties... option to open the Configure View dialog. 2. Go to the Clipping tab. 3. Specify the level at which the clipping is done. X/Y/Z Level - Specifies the plane(s) to cut through. Choose between the following options: None - No clipping. Digitise - You will be prompted to pick the level for the cut plane. Value - Type in an absolute value at which the cutting plane will be generated. 5. Specify which section of the display is clipped away by checking the appropriate button. Positive - Removes the display in the positive direction along the selected axis, from the cutting plane, relative to the current CPL. Negative - Removes the display in the negative direction along the selected axis, from the cutting plane, relative to the current CPL. Clipping and Track CPL It is possible to have the display configured to automatically track the current CPL by checking the Track CPL option on the General Tab of the View Properties dialog. This is generally used when working in a multiplane milling environment. If Track CPL is enabled, the clipping follows the CPL, so if you index to a new CPL, the current CPL changes, and so does the clipping.
54
55
Setting Preferences
Use Options menu tolerances. Preferences to set preferences such as the units for the part and the
Here are details on the preferences (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the Preferences dialog):
56
Defining Colours
You can define what you want to use as Edgecams highlight and background colours. These colours will be saved as part of your personal defaults and also with the current part. Select the Colours (Options menu) command to display the colour configuration dialog. The dialog offers the following parameters: Background, Highlight Select the colours for the Graphics Area background and highlighting colours. Graduation Check to activate graduation of background colour to colour specified here. To use a single colour uncheck the graduated option and only the background colour selected will be used.
Flyover As the cursor moves over the graphics area when the Intellisnap option is activated, entities will be highlighted in the flyover colour as they come into picking range and revert back to their original colour as the cursor leaves them. Port Border, Surface, Rapids & Normals, High Feed and Leads Select the appropriate colours for these parameters. Windows background Check to use the same colour scheme as your other Windows applications. Open with part colour configuration Check to ensure that all part files (.ppf) are to be loaded using the colour configuration saved with those parts. Clicking on either of the Define buttons displays the standard Windows colour definition dialog:
57
There are several sets of these configs, each set is contained in a 'Profile'.... Automatic configuration selection - Profiles Profiles are how the Edgecam configuration automatically changes to suit the environment (for example the Mill or Turn environment). There is a profile for each environment, and each profile contains a user.config and a default.config (in addition to any configurations you have saved yourself). When the environment changes, such as when you are in turning and you open a mill part, the profile for the new environment automatically becomes the 'active' profile, and its user.config is restored. Edgecam is now adapted to the new environment and the newly-restored user.config is where your configuration changes are saved (on closing Edgecam). Manual configuration selection If the automatically restored configuration is not suitable, you can restore another configuration. You can restore one of your saved configurations, or default.config to get back to a basic starting point. (You can also save configurations of individual toolbars and menus.) You will not need to repeat the restore the next time you use Edgecam, as the restored configuration will be updated into user.config on closing the session. You can also restore a user.config to get back to the configuration at the start of the Edgecam session; rightclick on any menu and select Profiles A profile User.Config. Note that your configuration changes since starting Edgecam will be lost on restoring a configuration (as user.config is only updated on closing), unless you first save or update. Restoring a configuration activates its profile, and this profile remains active until the environment changes (as described above), or you restore a configuration from another profile. Suppressing automatic selections - Generic profile If you don't want the configuration to change on switching environments, you can restore one of the configurations from the Generic profile. The Generic profile remains active until you restore a configuration from another profile; it doesn't de-activate on environment changes. You can save your own configurations into the Generic profile.
58
Design and Manufacture Mode configuration Each configuration is split into Design mode and Manufacture mode parts, so you see different toolbars in the two modes for example. This does mean however that you might need to repeat your configuration change in each mode. For example if you change a shortcut key assignment, you will need to make the assignment again on switching modes. Files of .dft type Note that you should not confuse '.config' files with '.dft' files, which store 'system' type settings such as tolerances and units.
59
Note that your restored configuration remains in place until there is an environment switch (such as when you are in milling and open a turn part) when the user.config is automatically restored from the new environment's profile. (That is unless your restored configuration is from the Generic profile; this remains in place until you manually restore a configuration from another profile.) The 'active profile' is the profile from which a configuration was last restored, this is indicated by a check mark in the Profiles list. Alternatively, you can work with configurations (including saving and restoring) in the Customise dialog: 1. Right-click on any toolbar. 2. In the subsequent shortcut menu click Customise. 3. In the Customise dialog that opens, click the Configurations tab title to switch to it. You can now work with the configurations in the tab. Here is the tab's help, for information:
60
61
62
63
3. In the subsequent list of windows click on an un-checked window to open and show it, click on a checked window to hide it. Note that in this list of windows there is a shortcut key combination displayed against each window. You can use the shortcut keys to quickly switch the window on or off, without needing the above procedure.
64
Auto-hiding Windows
When a window is auto-hidden it collapses to a small marker at its docking point when you move the cursor out of the window; to expand the window to full size you move the cursor back over the marker. To switch between auto-hide enabled and auto-hide disabled for a window: 1. Make sure the window is docked (you can only auto-hide docked windows). 2. Click the 'pin' symbol ( ) at the top-right of the window. See a demonstration video.
To switch between auto-hide enabled and auto-hide disabled for a window, along with all the other windows docked at the same edge of the Graphics Area: CTRL-click the 'pin' symbol ( ) at the top-right of the window.
65
66
Feedback in a Dialog
You can display information in a dialog, rather than the Feedback Window. This would be useful if, for example, you were verifying several entities in one operation. In a dialog you would see information on one entity, clicking the OK button moves on to the next entity. To display information in a dialog: 1. Click the Preferences (Options menu) command to display the Preferences dialog. 2. Switch to the General tab and click Feedback Dialog to check it.
67
68
69
70
71
Moving Buttons
You can move buttons from one toolbar or menu to another: 1. Right-click on any toolbar. 2. In the subsequent shortcut menu click Customise to open the Customise dialog. 3. Click on the menu containing the button to expand it. 4. From the menu drag the button; drag it over a toolbar or a menu and a bar indicates where the button will be moved to (menus expand automatically). 5. Drop the button when it is in the correct position.
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
3. In the subsequent list of toolbars click on an un-checked toolbar to show it, click on a checked toolbar to hide it. Alternatively: 1. Right-click on any toolbar. 2. In the subsequent shortcut menu click Customise to open the Customise dialog. 3. Click on the Toolbars tab title. You can now use the tab to show and hide toolbars. Here is the tab's help, for information:
80
Resetting Toolbars
(Note that resetting toolbars does not reset the menu bar; you need to follow the procedure in Resetting the Menu Bar.) To reset toolbars: 1. Right-click on any toolbar. 2. In the subsequent shortcut menu click Customise to open the Customise dialog. 3. Switch to the Toolbars tab. You can now use the tab to reset toolbars. Here is the tab's help, for information:
81
If the toolbar is undocked, drag it by its title area at the top. If the toolbar is docked, use its dotted bar at the left hand side or top - . 2. As you move through the various positions where you could drop the toolbar, an outline box shows you how the toolbar would appear in that position (docked or undocked). When you are happy with this position, drop the toolbar.
82
83
84
85
86
Creating Toolbars
You can create your own toolbars. As soon as you create the toolbar, it appears undocked within the Graphics Area. You can then work with the toolbar as normal; you can dock it and add buttons to it, for example. To create a toolbar: 1. Right-click on any toolbar. 2. In the subsequent shortcut menu click Customise to open the Customise dialog. 3. Click on the Toolbars tab title. You can now use the tab to create toolbars. Here is the tab's help, for information:
87
88
89
Creating Commands
To create a command: 1. Right-click on any toolbar. 2. In the subsequent shortcut menu click Customise to open the Customise dialog. 3. Switch to the Tools tab. Now use the tab to create a command. Here is the tab's help, for information:
90
91
92
Note that you cannot use Undo while in Instructions Insert mode in Manufacture.
93
Cursor shape The cursor shape shows you how your next digitise will be interpreted: Interpreted as a Free digitise. Interpreted as an entity digitise (there will be an 'entity not found' message if you don't digitise an entity). As an entity digitise. There may be a switch between these two. For example by Intellisnap as your cursor nears the mid point of a line. Or as you click to select or , in the ).
Only an entity digitise is valid - for example when selecting the line for a Profiling cycle.
Alternatives: - hold down the Ctrl key as you digitise. - hold down the Shift key as you digitise. Pre-selecting You can click to select geometry without a command active, and some commands can then operate on these selections. For example you could: 1. Select some geometry. 2. Click Edit menu Delete.
94
Intellisnap
When you are digitising, Intellisnap automatically offers you points on existing geometry - such as mid points for you to digitise. As your cursor nears these points they become highlighted, and your click selects these points exactly. The 'highlighting' includes: A colour change for the point to the Flyover colour (set using Options menu Colours .) A display of Verify type information (with Entity Tooltips checked in the Selection tab - see below). A change in cursor shape . Where more than one entity is selectable in a given position (where two lines meet for example) you see the symbol, and you can use the TAB key to step through the selections. To control the Intellisnap, use Options menu Preferences Selection tab. You can disable the snapping to mid-points for example, if you want to make a free digitise near a midpoint.
95
Clicks swap items between selected/de-selected Clicks can only select items Clicks can only deselect items
'Clicks' also includes the 'Window' selection method below. You can change the mode in the middle of making your selections. The selected button changes back to the default 'Toggle Selection' when you next use a command. Window Selection Select a number of items by using click and drag to enclose them in a window. Drag from: Left to right to select all entities that are wholly within the window. Right to left to select all entities that are wholly or partially within the window. De-selecting Free Digitises If you are making Free digitise point selections - for a spline curve for example - press the Delete key ( ) to undo selections. See also: Selecting Adjoining Entities by Chaining
96
Check Options menu Preferences Selection tab 3D chain by Default to enable '3D chaining' - so that the chain can include entities rotated out of the current CPL for example. The chaining buttons below are only made available as appropriate - when you are deleting entities for example. You click on a button to activate it, and so activate or modify the chaining mode. Chain - When active, you select the entities that you want to be at either end of a chain. Note the 'chain direction' above to make sure the directions are correct. Click on to expand and show the rest of the buttons below.
Chain All - When active, you select the entity at the beginning of the chain. As an alternative to this button you can double-click on the entity. Toggle Deselect - When active you can click on an entity to switch it between selected and deselected - mostly after using 'Chain All'. Toggle Branch - When active you can choose which arm of a branch the chaining is to follow (select with a click). When not active one of the branches is automatically chosen.
97
98
In the Status bar you can now choose whether to snap Free digitises to the grid or not: GRID Click GRID Free The grid intersection point nearest your click is selected. Click Free Where you click is selected.
Note that with Free selected you can snap individual digitises by holding down the Shift and Ctrl keys as you click. Use View menu Grid Configure to set the grid width, height, spacing and so on.
99
100
If the active part has not been saved since changes were made, then you are prompted to save or discard those changes.
101
Saving Parts
The commands in the File menu that save an Edgecam drawing are: Save Use this command when you are saving a drawing for the first time, or if you want to save modifications to a drawing under the same name. Save As Use this command only if you want to give the drawing a different name and keep the last saved version under the old name. Save Limited This works in the same way as Save As but you can specify what you want to save from the current part. You are prompted to digitise a new origin for the limited save and to digitise the entities that you want to save. Drawings are saved as .ppf (Pathtrace Part Files). See File Extensions Used in Edgecam for a list of other common file types. Both commands open the standard Windows dialog box for saving files. Saving a drawing also saves the dimensions, units and so on with the drawing. See Also Autosave Saving Notes for a Part
102
Autosave
Edgecam provides an automatic save capability. Use the Preferences (Options menu) command to enter the number of commands after which an automatic save will take place. The default is 5. To disable Autosave, set a value of zero. Only commands that affect the model are counted display commands are not taken into account. Each Autosave overwrites the previous save. Autosave is part of your defaults whether Autosave is on or off, and the number of commands between Autosaves is stored. To load the Autosaved part, select the Open Autosave (File menu) command.
103
Add, edit and delete text as necessary. You are limited to using 500 characters, however.
104
Exporting Data
Parts can be saved in a number of formats for use in other CAD systems. The following file types are supported: .ppf (Edgecam default file type) .dxf (AutoCAD) .igs (IGES format ASCII file)
Select the correct file extension when using the Save (File menu) or Save As (File menu) commands. For more information about importing and exporting data, see CAD Interface File Formats.
105
106
Opening Parts
To open a part: 1. In the File menu or Standard toolbar, click Open
2. Use the standard Open dialog to navigate to your part file and open it. For Edgecam part files (.ppf), and certain other file types, you see a thumbnail preview of the selected part in the list. For large numbers of files this can cause a delay, so you can click Show Preview do disable the preview. (These are the same thumbnails you see when viewing thumbnails in Windows Explorer). To limit the list to certain file types, click in the Files of type box and select the type from the list. Please Note: The .ppf file type thumbnail is generated from the Edgecam view active when you save the part. Any windows overlaying the part, such as the Simulator window, may cause the image to be captured from that window. Pre-version 7.50 Edgecam parts must be re-saved for the thumbnail image to be created. You can also insert a part into another drawing. You can also open Autosaved parts. More information is available on opening solid model files.
107
(If you want to insert a sequence from another part, as well as the geometry use File menu Component .)
108
Insert
You can use File menu Insert Part if you only want to insert the geometry from another part (this command has more scaling and rotation options). Also see Combining Components and Sequences.
109
Inserting a Symbol
The Insert, Symbol (File menu) command allows you to insert an Edgecam .ppf part as a symbol in the current part. The symbol can only be manipulated as a single entity and may not be machined. An active link is maintained between the current part and the part used as the symbol. If this symbol file is moved or deleted, the current part may be corrupted. You may use the Explode (Edit menu) command to break up the symbol into individual entities. This breaks the link with the symbol file and increases the size of the current part to accommodate the new entities. Typical uses include drawing frames and company logos for drawings. These are standard objects that do not change from part to part. The parameters for this command are very similar to those in the Insert, Part (File menu) command.
110
111
Name Specify the geometry filename to insert. Select the Browse... button to search from the appropriate file. The List file of type option is set to Geometry file (*.geo). Origin Check this box to specify the location at which the origin of the geometry file is to be inserted into the Edgecam part Continuous Check this box to replace line and arc entities in the inserted geometry with continuous entities. Points are inserted as group entities. Level Specify the level (relative to the active CPL level) at which you want to insert the geometry. For example, if the active CPL level is 10, and you set Level to -25 is specified for this modifier, the geometry would be inserted at a level of -15. Scale Specify the scale at which the geometry is to be inserted in to the Edgecam part. For example, a value of 2 results in the geometry being inserted at twice its original scale into the active part. The active Colour, Layer, and Style as displayed on the Standard toolbar are used for the inserted geometry.
112
113
Printing
Select the Print (File menu) command See Also Setting up the Printer Setup to display a standard Windows Print dialog box.
114
115
Plotting
Classic Edgecam View only Note that, for the drawing to be plotted in 1:1 scale on the paper, you must prepare the part by:
1. Using the Drawing, Configure (View menu) 2. Using the Port, Configure (View menu)
command to set the paper X Size and Y Size, and command to set the Scale of the appropriate port(s) to 1.
To plot a drawing 1. Select the Plot (File menu) command. The dialog box for the command is displayed. 2. Set the parameters for the command. 3. On the Options tab you can specify the following options. 4. Click OK to dismiss the dialog box. The plot frame appears, and you can now move the plot frame around the drawing using the mouse. 5. Digitise to select the plot frame position. The command now saves the contents of the plot frame to the named plot file.
116
117
XY Environment This provides view ports and construction planes for constructing a part with respect to the usual X, Y, Z Cartesian co-ordinate system. This is the default environment when entering Edgecam. Typically, the XY environment is used for generating Milling, Wire and CMM components.
ZX Environment This environment provides view ports and construction planes that simulate the orientation of a turned part in a machine tool during manufacture. In the case of a lathe for example, it is usual to work in the ZX plane where the Z axis is horizontal. If a turned component is drawn in the XY plane, you can flip the component into the ZX plane using the Transform, Transpose (Edit menu) command. You can switch between environments when designing a part by selecting one of the XY Environment or ZX Environment commands from the Options menu. These environments are mutually exclusive and the active command is shown with a tick againt it. You can also select an XY or ZX Environment from within the Preferences (Options menu) command.
118
Regenerating (toolpaths)
Toolpaths may need to be regenerated to bring them up to date with edits you make to instructions, such as a changed tool diameter. This should be done before generating CNC code. You can manually regenerate at any time, as detailed below. You can also enable Automatic Regeneration, so that regeneration is automatically triggered - on editing an instruction for example. This is also detailed below. Automatic Regeneration This is enabled by default and is recommended as it reduces the risk of producing incorrect CNC code. Only disable automatic regeneration if it produces too much of a delay. An Instruction is (nearly) always regenerated when you edit the instruction. With Auto-Regenerate enabled, all the subsequent instructions in the sequence are also updated. (This is because some instructions are dependant on others, a Rest-Rough cycle is dependent on a Roughing cycle, for example.) You can also opt for automatic regeneration on reloading the open solid model. You can edit an instruction without it being regenerated by using Instructions menu Edit. In the Editing Instructions dialog that opens you and check Disable Automatic Regeneration before moving on to edit the instruction). Manual Regeneration You can manually regenerate: Using the Regenerate options in the shortcut menu for the Sequence Window. Using the Regenerate command. This method gives you more control over the regeneration. See also Using Batch Mode for Operations
119
Co-ordinate Types
You can specify co-ordinates in a variety of types: Cartesian Polar Angular You can select the type of co-ordinates to be used in the Co-ordinate Input dialog box which is activated by the button (see Specifying Explicit Co-ordinates).
120
By convention, if the X, Y axes lie in the plane of the screen, the Z axis points up out of the screen.
121
122
The example below shows a point positioned by distance a along the A axis, distance b along the B axis and an angle q with respect to the A axis:
123
Entity Types
In Edgecam terms, a part is the sum of all the entities which produce that part. Edgecam provides several entity types that you can use when designing and manufacturing components: Point Entities Line Entities Circle and Arc Entities Curve Entities Surface Entities Continuous Entities Group Entities Detailing Entities Toolpath Entities
124
Point Entities
A point is the simplest geometric entity. A point is defined in 3D space. Whichever co-ordinate system is used to set up the point, it is always stored as three real numbers in Cartesian co-ordinates. Methods of point definition include: Absolute co-ordinate position Arc centre Screen position Existing point Middle point of an existing entity known as a mid-point End point of an existing entity Intersection of any two entities A distance modification from any of the above point definitions
125
Line Entities
A line has two end points and can be constructed by any of these methods: Between two point definitions Between a point and an arc tangency point Between two arc tangency points Through a point and parallel to another line Through a point and perpendicular to another line
126
127
Curve Entities
A curve is a non-linear entity, described by an exact mathematical definition. Curves include Splines, B-Splines, Bezier curves and Conic sections.
128
Surface Entities
A surface is defined in Edgecam using a two-axis parametric co-ordinate system, and can be created from control points, entities or other surfaces. Also see About Surfaces in Edgecam.
129
Continuous Entities
These are a set of colinear line or arc entities grouped together (for example, from a profile) for ease of manipulation. See Converting to a Continuous Entity for a full explanation.
130
Group Entities
These are a set of Edgecam entities (for example, lines and arcs) that have been collected into a group for ease of manipulation. See Creating Group Entities for a full explanation.
131
Detailing Entities
These are entities created using Edgecam Detailing commands. As they are purely for dimensioning and annotating purposes, they do not form part of the 3D part model and exist only on the 'Drawing Plane'.
132
Toolpath Entities
A toolpath is created from within one of the Edgecam machining modules, and represents the track of a nominated part of a machine tool. Each toolpath may be made up of many toolpath entities, which may be either line or arc segments.
133
Entity Dependency
It is important to understand that one entity can be dependent on another. Certain operations cause entities to be flagged as having dependants (other entities dependent on them for their existence). Entities with one or more dependants cannot be deleted or modified in a way that would invalidate the dependent entity. Entity dependency occurs with surfaces, continuous entities and groups. For example, a Coons Patch surface is created from four other boundary lines. These lines cannot be deleted or altered without first deleting the Coons patch. It is possible to alter their colour, layer, style or name, as this would not invalidate the dependent surface. Edgecam entities which are dependent on other entities are: Coons Patches Tabulated cylinders Flowed surfaces Ruled surfaces Fillet surfaces Surfaces of revolution Surface curves Offset surfaces Crosshatching Groups Continuous entities Trimmed surfaces.
To find out whether an entity has a dependant, use the Entity (Verify menu) command. Amongst other details, the system reports one of the following: Dependency SET or Dependency CLEAR. It is possible that the dependency flag for some entities is not cleared when the dependants are deleted. When you reload the part, these entities cannot therefore be altered or deleted. To overcome this situation, insert the part into Edgecam using the File menu command Insert Part. Only entities that still have dependants will have the dependency flag set.
134
Entity Attributes
Each entity can have a colour, style, name and layer attribute. These attributes are reported if you verify the entity using the Entity (Verify menu) command. See Also Colour Style Name Curve and Surface Attributes
135
Entity Colour
Use Colours in the Standard toolbar to set the colour for new entities (lines, arcs and so on). Colours can be used to highlight different entity types, parts of the drawing or functional differences. You can change the colour of existing entities; you can use for example: Edit menu > Entity Data another). Edit menu > Entity Data then select). Match (copies the colour, style and so on from one entity to Individual (opens the properties dialog for the entity you
136
Entity Style
Use Style in the Standard toolbar to set the style for new entities (lines, arcs and so on).
You can change the style of existing entities; you can use for example: Edit menu > Entity Data Edit menu > Entity Data Match (copies the colour, style and so on from one entity to another). Individual (opens the properties dialog for the entity you then select).
By opening the properties dialog directly from the entity. Note that if a very fine display tolerance is used, the font for entities such as arcs and curves may not appear to be correct. Use the Preferences (Options menu) command to increase the Display Tolerance.
137
Name
When you create an entity you can give it a name up to eight characters long. This name is saved for future reference (for example, when selecting entities for a machining cycle). However, if the entity is copied, only the original entity retains the name.
138
Entity Layers
Use the Layer control in the Standard toolbar to set the layer for new entities (lines, arcs and so on). Layers can be thought of as transparent films on which is drawn their geometry. What you see is the geometry of all the visible layers stacked one on top of another. Layers can be used for separating different types of entities from each other for display purposes. For example, toolpaths would normally be on different layers from the geometry of a part model. You may want to develop your own system of layers for different entity types. When you are working on a part, you can restrict the combination of displayed layers to prevent the screen from becoming cluttered with superfluous information. See Layer Control. You control layers using the Layers window; you can the display of layers on and off for example. As layers are selected, they are added to a historical list containing the last five layers used. To select from this drop-down historical list of layers, click on the down arrow beside the layer number. You can change the layer of existing entities; you can use for example: Edit menu > Entity Data Edit menu > Entity Data Match (copies the layer, colour and so on from one entity to another). Individual (opens the properties dialog for the entity you then select).
139
140
To delete entities
This functionality is only available in Design mode. Instead of using the Delete Entity command, you can delete all visible entities in the current view by simply preselecting them and then pressing the Delete key. If no entities have been selected when you press the Delete key, the Delete Entity command will be enabled and you will be prompted to Digitise entities to delete.
141
Verifying Entities
Use the Entity (Verify menu) command to report detailed information on the selected entity. You can also opt for Verify information to be automatically displayed as a tooltip as you move the cursor over the entity: Check Options menu Preferences Selection tab Entity Tooltips.
Check Intellisnap in the Shortcut menu. You can display more information in the tooltip by pressing the V key. Press the key again to return to the standard tooltip. The symbol means you can use the TAB key to step through the possible alternative selections (where two lines meet for example).
142
When Cartesian co-ordinates are selected and the XY environment is active, the Co-ordinate Input dialog box is displayed as shown below:
143
Use the Co-ordinate System option buttons to select one of the three co-ordinate systems: Cartesian co-ordinates Polar co-ordinates Angular co-ordinates Use the Axes options to select whether co-ordinates are specified with respect to CPL or World axes. The selection is registered in the Command box as a P for CPL axes or a W for World axes. If P is entered on its own then a default position of X0Y0Z0 will be used.
144
Specifying Cartesian Co-ordinates in Command Format Experienced users can enter co-ordinates directly though the Command box. You can also display this box by pressing one of the keys that corresponds to an axis or a command (for example, X, Y, Z, A, B, C, I, W, R, P). Absolute co-ordinates are specified in the form: XnnYnnZnn where nn is an ordinate value. Each ordinate is optional and its name and value can be omitted. If an ordinate value is not given, the previous value used in the current command is used. If no previous value has been given, then 0.0 is assumed. Incremental co-ordinates are specified in the form: IXnnIYnnIZnn where nn is an incremental ordinate value. Each incremental ordinate is optional and its name and value can be omitted. Incremental ordinates are given with respect to the previous co-ordinate position. If no previous position has been given, the increment is taken from the origin of the selected axis system.
145
Specify screen selections by giving only X, Y or Z as required. The methods used for specifying ordinate values can be mixed.
146
1. Type your required values into the Radius and Angle boxes. Radius values are taken incrementally from the last co-ordinate position. If no previous position has been given, the origin of the selected axis system is used. Angles are always absolute values (degrees). Values can be mathematical expressions using the + - * / operators. Brackets can be used to establish the order of evaluation. Radius and Angle values are shown in the Command box as they are entered. 2. Select the OK or Continue buttons when you have completed your co-ordinate specification.
Specifying Polar Co-ordinates in Command Format Experienced users can enter co-ordinates directly though the Command box. You can also display this box by pressing one of the keys that corresponds to an axis or a command (for example, X, Y, Z, A, B, C, I, W, R, P). Polar co-ordinates are specified in the form: RnnAmm where nn is a radius value and mm is an angle (degrees). Radius values are taken incrementally from the last co-ordinate position. If no previous position has been given, the origin of the selected axis system is used. Angles are always absolute values (degrees).
147
Enter co-ordinate data as follows: 1. Select the Rotary Axis. 2. Type your required distances along the A, B and C axes into the X, Y and Z boxes respectively. This is done in the way described for Cartesian co-ordinates. 3. Enter the absolute angle (degrees) into the Angle box. 4. Select the OK or Continue buttons when you have completed your co-ordinate specification.
Specifying Angular Co-ordinates in Command Format Experienced users can enter co-ordinates directly though the Command box. You can also display this box by pressing one of the keys that corresponds to an axis or a command (for example, X, Y, Z, A, B, C, I, W, R, P). Angular co-ordinates are specified by entering a distance along a rotational axis, a distance along one other axis and then an angle of rotation, for example X50Y50A90 should give a point at X50 Y0 Z50 because the point defined at X50Y50 is rotated by 90 degrees about the X (A) axis.
148
2D Snap
The 2D snap command determines how co-ordinate information is obtained for a command.
Activate the command to set all Z ordinates to the level of the current CPL, regardless of input method. De-activate the command for full 3D operation with: Entity digitises Co-ordinates obtained by reference or by construction Explicit co-ordinate input. With free digitises, Z ordinates are always taken to be at the level of the current CPL. Note: If either the CPL (Edit menu) or Create CPL (Geometry menu) command have been used to set the current CPL to 2D, this command is not available.
149
Holding down the Ctrl key while selecting the left hand mouse button (d1) selects the nearest two entities that are in range. The entity nearest to the digitised position is taken to be the first of the two entities selected. This is particularly useful with commands for: Entity trimming Filleting or chamfering Creating a continuous entity. Once this button has been selected it stays in effect until either it is deselected or the command is finished.
Example The example shows entities being selected for the construction of a blend radius. Note that the digitise has been placed nearer to the right hand line so that it is taken as the first entity: this presents the entities to the command in the correct order.
150
{y} On Entity
Intersection
151
152
To help you construct a model, the concept of the construction plane (or CPL) is used. A construction plane defines a local co-ordinate system at any orientation to the World axes. As each CPL has its own x, y, z axes, you only have to deal with local co-ordinates when creating entities. Edgecam translates CPL co-ordinates into World co-ordinates for you. See Also Predefined CPLs The Drawing CPL Displaying Axis Systems Creating New CPLs Selecting CPLs Editing CPLs Verifying CPLs Deleting CPLs
153
Predefined CPLs
A set of predefined CPLs are provided for the XY and ZX environments. This diagram shows the relationship between the CPL axes for the XY environment and the World axes. The name of each CPL is shown. The next diagram shows the relationship of the standard CPLs to each view of the part. Note that: The origin of each standard CPL coincides with the World origin The top CPL is the only one where the CPL axes coincide exactly with the World axes.
If you need to add a feature, such as a slot, into the bottom of the part you can select the bottom CPL and work in terms of the dimensions you have without worrying about how they map back to the World axes. Command modifier values for co-ordinates or angles of rotation are always given with respect to the current CPL. Explicit co-ordinate data can be given with respect to either the current CPL or the World co-ordinate system. See Specify explicit co-ordinates in the section Entering co-ordinate data and selecting entities. The following diagram shows the standard CPLs for the ZX environment using a swept profile.
154
155
156
It is obviously easier to make the modifications to the part while working in the new CPL rather than in one of the existing CPLs. An unlimited number of CPLs can be created. When a CPL is created it becomes the current CPL and remains active until another CPL is selected or created. To create a new CPL
157
Selecting CPLs
To select a CPL (Construction Plane) 1. Select the Select CPL (Geometry menu) command. By default, the Name box contains the name of the current CPL. The list of Names contains the standard CPLs. As user defined CPLs are added to the part, the list is updated. 2. When changing from one CPL to another, the active Level is reset to zero. Enter a new level for the CPL, if required, by entering a value or digitising an entity from which to take the level information. This is the new distance from the CPLs original plane of definition at which entities are created. This can be used to change the level of the current CPL if nothing is selected from the Name list box. (The current level can also be changed from the Toolbar or only the display of levels.) 2. If the ZX environment is current, set the Input Mode. The input mode determines whether X axis dimensions refer to Radial or Diametral values. If the mode is set to Diametral and the explicit coordinates X20Z20 are given, Edgecam takes the X value to be a diameter. 3. Select the name of the CPL to be made current from the Name list box. 4. Click on OK.
158
Editing CPLs
For standard CPLs (Top, Front and so on) only the Work Plane parameter of a standard CPL can be edited. You see a warning if you edit a CPL that is the 'Initial CPL' of a machining sequence, as there are potential dangers. For example: Rapids will move along with the CPL, as they are based on coordinate input or free digitises. Toolpath moves associative to geometry will not move with the CPL. This means that the CPL edit may move a rapid so that it collides with part geometry. If you rotate a CPL of a milling sequence so the geometry no longer lies in the plane of the CPL, the cycles would fail to regenerate. To edit a CPL 1. Select the CPL (Edit menu) command. The dialog box for the command is displayed. 2. Select the name of the CPL to be edited from the CPL list box. If a name is not selected, make an entity digitise on the required CPL marker in response to the Digitise the required CPL marker prompt. 3. Specify values for the parameters to be changed. All parameters are described under the section Creating a CPL.
159
Verifying CPLs
Verifying a CPL produces a report on CPL parameters. To verify a CPL 1. Select the CPL (Verify menu) command. The dialog box for the command is displayed. 2. Select the name of the CPL to be verified from the Name list box. If a name is not selected make an entity digitise on the marker of the CPL to be deleted in response to the Digitise the required CPL marker prompt. The example below shows a typical CPL report obtained in the Design mode.
The offsets are measured in terms of the current CPLs co-ordinates. When a CPL is verified within the Manufacturing module and a machining sequence is active, additional information is provided in the report. The diagram below gives a typical example:
The Primary and Secondary values are the rotations made from the primary and secondary axes of the initial CPL specified. The last line of the report specifies whether the CPL is valid for the selected Code Generator.
160
Deleting CPLs
Only user-defined CPLs can be deleted. If the currently active CPL is deleted, CPL TOP will become current. A CPL with an associated machining sequence cannot be deleted.
To delete a CPL 1. Select the Delete CPL (Edit menu) command. The dialog box for the command is displayed. 2. Select the name of the CPL to be deleted from the Name list box. 3. Click on OK to continue.
161
Layer Control
Layers can be used for separating different types of entities from each other for display purposes. For example, toolpaths would normally be on different layers from the geometry of a part model. All layer control is via the Layers Window and the Layer drop down list in the Standard toolbar.
The Layers Window displays the current set of available layers, listing their names and visibility status. Please note that only layers that are visible can be drawn on.
To sort the layers in alphabetical order double click the Name label at the top of the list. Double-clicking the Show label will sort the entries by visibility. Please note that a further double click will not reverse the order, simply double click the other label again. Double clicking the visibility column toggles the Yes/No status. See Also Activating a Layer Creating a New Layer The Shortcut Menu in the Layers Window Notes on Using Layers Layer Control and Tabbed Views
162
Activating a Layer
There are different ways of activating a layer. You can select the layer in the drop down list in the Standard toolbar.
In the Layers Window, you can either activate the layer by double clicking it or by opening the shortcut menu with a right-hand mouse click and selecting the option Make Active. The active layer is marked in red in the Layers Window.
163
164
Make Active Activates the selected layer. New Creates a new layer. Layers can be assigned names of up to 63 characters in length. Delete Deletes the selected layer(s). Please note that layers containing entities and the active layer cannot be deleted. Hide Makes the selected layer(s) invisible. Show Makes the selected layer(s) visible. Show Only Only the selected layer(s) will be shown. Show All Makes all layers visible. Properties Displays the Layer Properties dialog which allows you to change the name and visibility status of the selected layer. Select All Entities Selects all entities on the selected layer(s). (This option is only available in GLview) Select to Hide Select an entity on the layer you wish to hide. After selecting the option from the context menu you will be prompted to digitize entities on the layer to exclude. Refresh Refreshes the display in the Layers Window. Please note that you can use standard Windows controls when working with layers in the window, ie. you can use the Ctrl or Shift key to pick several layers before selecting the appropriate option from the shortcut menu.
Layer commands initiated while another layer command is being processed will be ignored.
165
166
167
Please note that the Co-ordinate Tracking status bar is docked by default. You can change its position on screen by dragging it to another location:
The co-ordinates displayed in the window are those of the current cursor position in a view while entering coordinates for a command with a digitise. You can switch between CPL (Construction Plane), World and Machine co-ordinate systems using the buttons provided. Normally, the co-ordinates are updated at the end of each digitise/command. Alternatively, select the Track Cursor option in the Preferences (Options menu) command to display the co-ordinates dynamically as the cursor is moved during a command.
168
Finishing a Command
The help refers to the action Perform a Finish when describing how to use certain commands. You can: Right-click. Press the Enter/Return key. Use the Finish command.
169
170
Note that you can also use the Esc key to escape back.
171
172
Creating Lines
Here are the commands for creating lines in the Design toolbar: Single Line - use to create a line with two digitises Horizontal Line - use to create a horizontal line with digitises Vertical Line - use to create a vertical line with digitises Polyline - use to create a polyline with digitises Line - use to create a line using parameters in a dialog (this also appears in the Geometry menu).
Note that these commands appear in a combined commands and menu button. See Also Inserting Line Data Selecting Geometry Creation Commands
173
1. Select Single Line command from the Design toolbar. Note that this command appears in a combined commands and menu button. 2. Give position d1 in response to the Start point of line prompt. 3. Give position d2 in response to the End point of line prompt.
174
1. Select the Horizontal Line command from the Design toolbar (note that this command appears in a combined commands and menu button). 2. Digitise position d1 in response to the Point through which line will pass prompt. 3. Digitise position d2 in response to the End point of line prompt. The horizontal line ends where it is intersected by a vertical line which passes through d2.
175
1. Click the Vertical Line command in the Design toolbar. Note that the command appears in a combined commands and menu button. 2. Digitise position d1 in response to the Point through which line will pass prompt. 3. Digitise position d2 in response to the End point of line prompt. The vertical line ends where it is intersected by a horizontal line which passes through d2.
176
Creating a Polyline
Using Polyline is similar to using Single Line. The difference is that your digitised end point automatically becomes the start point for a new line, with the End point of line prompt being repeated until you finish the command. To finish click Escape in the Input toolbar. Or as a quicker alternative, simply right-click.
177
2. Complete the subsequent Line dialog. See the further information below, and/or click the dialog's Help button for more information. Note that you for some line type options in the dialog (for example 'Vertical'), you can just check the option and leave the rest of the settings in their default condition. However this would be the equivalent of using the Vertical Line command (for example), which it would be quicker to use directly from the Design toolbar. 3. Follow the Status Bar prompts for completing the command. You might have to digitise the 'Point through which line will pass' for example. More information on the dialog settings: Polyline Horizontal Vertical Orthogonal Tangent to Point Tangent to Tangent Angle Relative Angle Parallel and Parallel 2 Tangent and Angle To X/Y Co-ordinate Length Name See also Creating Lines
178
179
Creating Arcs
Here are the commands in the Design toolbar for creating arcs: Arc - use to create an arc through three points Radius Arc - use to create an arc by centre point and radius Arc - use to create an arc using parameters (this command also appears in the Geometry menu).
Note that these commands appear in a combined commands and menu button. See also Selecting Geometry Creation Commands
180
1. Click the Arc command in the Design toolbar. Note that this command appears in a combined commands and menu button. 2. Give position d1 in response to the Start point of arc prompt. 3. Give position d2 in response to the Mid point of arc prompt. 4. Give position d3 in response to the End point of arc prompt. The arc is created in an anticlockwise direction from d1 to d3. The diagram below shows the effect of swapping the order of d1 and d3.
181
1. Click the Radius Arc command in the Design toolbar (note that this appears in a combined commands and menu button) . The Arc parameters are displayed. 2. Enter values as required: Start Angle/End Angle Specify the angle from the centre of the arc in degrees for the beginning and end points of the arc. If start and end angles are set to <None>, a circle is created. Radius Specify the radius of the arc. 3. Give a location for the centre point in response to the Centre point for arc prompt. If any of the arc values were set to <Digitise>, you are asked to make digitises to provide this information. See also Creating Arcs
182
1. Click the Arc Dialog command in the Design toolbar or the Geometry menu. The parameters for the Arc command are displayed. 2. Set up your required command parameters by selecting check boxes and/or typing data into the entry boxes. Note that more than one check box can be selected at any one time and more than one entry box can have data typed into it. 3. Select the OK button to continue with the command. If none of the parameters in the dialog box are changed from their default settings, the command will have the same function as the Arc button. 4. Provide the data requested by the prompts in the Status bar. The Arc parameters are: Blend and Centreline Blend Through a Point Blend 3 Entities Centre Point Start Angle/End Angle Radius Diameter Tangent to Point Radius and 2 Points Blend Radius Tangent and Centreline Name See also Creating Arcs
183
In its behaviour and appearance, using Profile Tool is similar to creating a line using the Polyline parameter, except that each profile segment is drawn dynamically. A series of snap lines can optionally be displayed to show relationships with other selected entities.
Although the Profile Tool is simple to use, it can be used in many different ways. Because of this, the command has a Basic and an Advanced dialog box. The Basic dialog is presented by default but you can switch between the two using the Advanced >> and << Basic buttons. See Also Basic Profile Tool Parameters
184
Chamfer Defines a chamfer between the two segments. The value entered in this box is actually the lead, or distance from the corner between the old and new entities and where the chamfer touches each entity:
185
Advanced >> Click on this button to display the full range of Profile Tool Options. On the new Profile Tool dialog box, this button is replaced by << Basic to return to the Basic Profile Tool dialog box. See Also Setting the Snap Parameters Advanced Profile Tool Parameters
186
Mark one or more of the check boxes in the Snap dialog box to select a particular type of snap. Click on the All button to mark all the boxes, or on the None button to clear all the boxes. Vertical A snap is made to any position sharing the same X co-ordinate as a selected entity. Horizontal A snap is made to any position sharing the same Y co-ordinate as a selected entity. Blend Arcs A snap is made to any position where an arc intersects another entity. You can then choose which parts of the entities you want to keep. Perpendicular to Line A snap is made to any position perpendicular to a selected line entity. Tangential to Arc A snap is made to any position tangential to a selected arc entity. Radially from Arc A snap is made to any position radial to a selected arc entity. See Also Basic Profile Example
187
To create a basic profile 1. Select the Profile Tool (Geometry menu) command. The dialog box is now displayed. If it is not the Basic dialog, click on the Basic button. 2. Set Line Length to 50 and specify a Corner Chamfer value of 10. 3. Click on Snap. 4. Click on the All button. 5. Click on the Snap tabs OK button. 6. Click on the Profile Tool dialogs OK button. 7. Make a digitise to draw the first line segment:
8.
188
10. Use the right hand mouse button to select the bottom line entity:
10.
189
You can now snap to the end of this line. 11. Use the left hand mouse button to snap the new line to the end of the first line, completing the profile:
190
If the link cannot occur or not enough information has been input to define the link, an error message will be displayed. Link Start These options control how the new entity leaves the last entity. Select these options and use View Picture to confirm the setting you want.
Link End These options control how the new entity joins a selected entity. Select these options and use View Picture to confirm the setting you want.
<< Basic Replaces the current Advanced profile tool dialog with the Basic version. See Also Advanced Profile Example
191
To create an advanced profile 1. Select the Profile Tool (Geometry menu) command. The dialog box is now displayed. If it is not the Advanced dialog, click on the Advanced >> button. 2. Set these parameters:
3.
192
You must now select which parts of these entities to keep for the blending process. 4. Select the portion of the line to keep:
The screen is now updated and you are returned to the dialog box. 6.
193
7. Click on OK. You are now prompted to digitise the end point of the line. 8. Select which of the two possible positions you want to use to place the line:
194
10. Enter a Blend Radius of 5. 11. Click on OK. 12. Use the right hand mouse button to select the bottom line entity:
You should now be able to snap to the end of this line. 13. Use the left hand mouse button to snap the new line to the end of the first line, completing the profile:
195
196
Converting to a Continuous
Use Geometry menu Continuous to create a continuous entity using the dialog below.
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
197
198
199
File Name Type in or Browse for the location and name of the ASCII file. Divisor The co-ordinate data in the specified ASCII file is divided by this factor. The default is 1.0. Style The format of the data in the ASCII file. Select between the following options: Create Select between Points and Lines. For Lines, consecutive points are joined by line entities.
200
201
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
202
Creating Shapes
Edgecam provides several methods for creating shapes. All shapes are created from a number of individual entities. Please note that these commands are PDI add-in options and do not support Intellisnap picking. To select entities you can use either of the following methods: Select the Entity icon from the Input toolbar Hold down the right-hand mouse button and select the Entity command from the Shortcut menu Hold down the Ctrl key
See Also Creating Rectangles and Cuboids Creating Polygons Creating Slots
203
204
Creating Polygons
To create a polygon with equal length sides 1. Select the Polygon (Geometry menu) command. The Polygon parameters are displayed. 2. Complete the parameters, updating default values as required. Note that it is possible to enter contradictory parameters; for example, a side length incompatible with the radius: Number of sides Specify the number of sides of equal length in the polygon. Initial Angle Specify the absolute angle of the first line of the polygon. Corner Radius Enter a radius to produce a polygon with rounded corners. Depth Enter a value in this field to project the polygon in the {Z} of the current CPL. Verticals are created at each corner, forming a wire frame volume. Type Select one of the following to define the Dimension parameter: Side Length Enter the length of each side in the Dimension parameter. Inscribed circle Specify the diameter of the inner construction circle of the polygon in the Dimension parameter. Circumscribed Specify the diameter of the outer construction circle of the polygon in the Dimension parameter. Dimension Enter the size of the dimension specified in the Type field. 3. Digitise a point in response to the Select start of polygon prompt. Depending on the parameters you selected, the polygon is either drawn instantly or you can dynamically position it using the mouse. A digitise then fixes the polygons position.
205
Creating Slots
To create a slot 1. Select the Slot (Geometry menu) command. The Slot parameters are displayed. 2. Complete the parameters, updating default values as required:
Length Enter a value for the length of the slot or select <Digitise>. Width Enter a value for the width of the slot. Depth Enter a value in this field to project the slot in the {Z} of the current CPL. Angle Enter a value for the angle of the slot or select <Digitise>. 3. Digitise the start point of the slot. 4. Digitise the end point of the slot (if necessary). If you entered a value in the Angle parameter, the direction of the slot will be constrained. If you entered a value for the Length parameter, the length of the slot will be constrained.
206
About Curves
Curves used in design, often referred to as free form curves, are modelled in Edgecam as splines. The set of splines includes the Spline, the Bezier Spline and the B Spline. Given the same source data, each type of spline gives a curve of a different shape, based on the mathematical equation it is derived from. The (Geometry menu) commands available to create curves are: Curves, Spline Curves, B Spline and Fitted B Spline Curves, Bezier Curves, Smooth Curves, Conic Curves, Control Points Curves, Intersection
This example shows the three spline types, using the same set of control points to control each curve's behaviour:
207
About Splines
Here is an example of a spline curve, as defined by (and passing through) six fit points:
Use the Curves, Spline (Geometry menu) command to create spline curves. Also see To create a spline curve. A Spline is a smooth curve which passes through each point in a set of data points or fit points. Spline curves are typically used where accuracy must be maintained at the fit points, but is unnecessary between the fit points. The Spline is made up of a chain of smaller sub-curves. These sub-curves straddle the gaps between consecutive fit points. All but the first and the last fit points form the junction between one sub-curve and another. At these junctions, the sub-curves are constrained to join together smoothly. The route that a subcurve takes between one fit point and the next is governed by the Break Points option that you select when creating the Spline curve. The Break Points parameter has two options: Uniform Uniform break points should only be chosen when the fit points are spaced evenly. An uneven spacing between the fit points results in unwanted loops and wiggles in the path. Chord Length This creates a Spline that takes into account the actual distance between the fit points. Once you have created a Spline, you do not need to retain the construction points as their co-ordinates are retained in the Edgecam definition of the Spline. You can control the tangent angles at the start and end of the Spline. The curve segment between each pair of points is defined by three mathematical equations (one for each of the x, y and z axes). For example: x = f(u) = a + bu + cu2 + du3. Edgecam only creates cubic Splines (of degree 3 the degree of the equation is the highest value of n in u n, so the previous example would be of degree 3). However, Edgecam does support Splines of any order, so you can import Splines of a higher order from other CAD systems.
208
Creating Splines
To create a spline curve
2. Enter a Tolerance value if required. The smaller the tolerance value, the smoother the curve appears on the screen. As the curve is mathematically defined, changing this modifier does not alter the actual shape of the curve. 3. If required, enter the slope (in degrees) at the start of the curve into the Start Angle. To take the angle of the slope from an existing entity, set Start Angle to <Digitise>. 4. If required, type the slope (degrees) at the end of the curve into the End Angle box. To take the angle of the slope from an existing entity, set Start Angle to <Digitise>. 5. Choose a Break Points option. This can be either Uniform or Chord Length (see About Splines for details). 6. Type a Name for the curve, if required. 7. Digitise the fit points for the curve. The fit points can be full 3D points. The slope angles are measured in an anticlockwise direction from the X axis of the current CPL. The curve can be altered by using the Entity Data (Edit menu) command. See Also About Splines
209
About B Splines
Here is an example of a B Spline as defined by six control points (note that the first and last points lie on the curve):
Use the Curves, B Spline (Geometry menu) command. Also see To create a B spline. A B Spline curve needs a set of control points, but does not necessarily pass through the points. However, it always passes through the first and last points. (Note that you can use the Curves, Fitted B Spline (Geometry menu) command to create a B Spline using fit points rather than control points. In this case the curve passes through each fit point. See also Editing Curves Created With Fit Points.) B Splines are used for general curves where any abrupt changes of the control points will be smoothed. At the start, the curve is tangential to a line between the first two control points and at its end is tangential to a line between the last two control points. If a single control point is moved, it only changes the curve in that locality other regions of the curve are unaffected. A feature of the B Spline is the degree of the curve. The degree is specified as an integer between 1 and 10. Generally, the lower the degree, the closer the curve will follow the track lines (straight lines between the control points). A degree of 1 produces the track lines themselves. The higher the degree, the flatter the curve. A degree of between 2 and 5 is the most useful in practice, and the default value is 3. Repeating a control point influences the curve by pulling it sharply towards that point while not reducing its (mathematical) smoothness. The shape of a curve may also be influenced by introducing a different weighting factor for each control point. Such a curve is called a rational B Spline. A curve created with Edgecam has a weighting of 1.0 assigned to each point and is therefore non-rational.
210
Creating B Splines
To create a B Spline
B Spline Curve
2. Type a Tolerance value into the box, if required. The smaller the tolerance value, the smoother the curve appears on the screen. As the curve is mathematically defined, changing this modifier does not alter the actual shape of the curve. 3. Type the required Degree value into the box. This can be a value between 1 and 10 but it must be less than the number of control points. The higher the value, the flatter the curve but it takes longer to create. A value of 3 is adequate for general applications. 4. Type a Name for the curve, if required. 5. Digitise the control points for the curve. The control points can be full 3D points. The curve can be altered by using the Entity Data (Edit menu) command. See Also About B Splines
211
212
Use the Curves, Bezier (Geometry menu) command. Also see To create a Bezier curve. Bezier curves are a subset of the more general B Spline curves. Mathematically, a Bezier curve is the same as a B Spline with a degree equal to the number of control points minus 1. Possible uses for a Bezier curve might be as a simple way of creating a smooth fillet in a profile, or as a best fit approximation amongst control points which you not interested in following too closely, except at the ends of the curve. The useful features of the Bezier curve are: The start and end positions of the curve are the start and end control points The start and end curve tangents correspond to the start and end tracks. A start track is the line between the first two control points and the end track is a line between the last two control points. Internal points influence the curve in the region of the control point.
213
2. Type a Tolerance value into the box, if required. The smaller the tolerance value, the smoother the curve appears on the screen. As the curve is mathematically defined, changing this modifier does not alter the actual shape of the curve. 3. Type a Name for the curve, if required. 4. Digitise up to 20 control points for the curve. The control points can be full 3D points. The curve can be altered by using the Entity Data (Edit menu) command. See Also About Bezier Curves
214
Edgecam has two methods for creating a conic section: Specify positional and tangential information for the ends of the curve, plus a shoulder point to define the form of the curve. The position of this point determines whether the curve is an ellipse, parabola or hyperbola segment. Specify the centre, the end of the major axis, the height of the ellipse and optional start and end angles if the full ellipse is not required.
215
Conic command
2. Type a Tolerance value into the box, if required. The smaller the tolerance value, the smoother the curve appears on the screen. As the curve is mathematically defined, changing this modifier does not alter the actual shape of the curve. 3. Type a Name for the curve, if required. 4. Click on OK to accept the parameters and dismiss the dialog box. 5. Digitise in response to the Digitise first tangent prompt. Either, make an entity digitise on a line entity (d1) or digitise two positions that define a tangent line. 6. Digitise in response to the Digitise second tangent prompt. Either, make an entity digitise on a line entity (d2) or digitise two positions that define a tangent line. 7. Digitise a position in response to the Digitise shoulder point prompt (d3). The control points can be full 3D points. The curve can be altered by using the Entity Data (Edit menu) command. The diagram gives a typical example of conic creation:
To create a full ellipse or an elliptical segment See Also About Conic Sections
216
217
The Curves, Smooth (Geometry menu) command can create a Continuous entity which passes through a set of points and is built up of lines and arcs. Also see To Create a Smooth Curve and Converting to a Continuous Entity. Smoothing can produce curves that are visually pleasing rather than mathematically correct.
218
Select the Continuous check box if a Continuous entity consisting of lines and arcs is to be created. If this check box is not selected, lines and arcs will be created as discrete entities. For a description of the Continuous entity, see Converting to a Continuous Entity. Type a Tolerance value into the box, if required. The smaller the tolerance value the more lines and arcs are created and the smoother the curve will be. Type a limiting Corner Angle (degrees). As the smoothing process occurs the system will measure the angle of any bend in the curve. If the angle of the bend is less than or equal to the value specified, it is assumed that the bend is actually a deliberate corner. If the angle is greater than the specified value the bend will be smoothed. In response to the First point/curve (or return) prompt: Either make an entity digitise on a spline to be converted or digitise a start position and continue to provide digitises in response to the Next point/curve (or return) prompt until the curve is complete. If the smooth curve is created from data which is not in the current CPL, the lines and arcs forming the smooth curve will be projected down onto the CPL. When digitising co-ordinates it is advisable to enter as many positions as possible in areas where there is an abrupt change of direction in the required curve.
219
220
221
Creating Text
Use Geometry menu Text to open the dialog below.
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
222
223
See Also Deleting Entities Trimming Entities Editing Curves Created With Fit Points
224
Deleting Entities
Use the Delete button to digitise any entities that you want to delete.
If you use the Delete (Edit menu) button, you can use one parameter: Match Colour Check this box if you want to delete entities of a colour matching that shown on the Standard toolbar.
225
Trimming Entities
The Trim (Edit menu) command allows you to trim or break lines, arcs, continui and curves. Note that "trim" will extend an entity to the intersection point or truncate it back to that point as appropriate. The command offers the following options:
Trimming one entity against another Trimming two intersecting entities Breaking an entity Trimming many entities against one entity
When trimming entities that lie in different CPLs the trimming will be in respect to the current CPL. Entities other than lines and arcs are converted to B-splines when trimmed, e.g. trimming a continuous consisting of lines and arcs will convert the continuous into a b-spline (entity number will not change). Curves can only be trimmed, not extended. When breaking a curve it will be split into two separate curves. The curves will maintain their curvature compared to the original curve. When only one entity is selected to break a curve the curve is split into two and they will meet at the intersection point.
226
2. Enter the radius into the Radius box. If the entities intersect, you can cut them back to the intersection point or the radius by marking the Trim box. 3. Click OK to proceed. 4. Give an entity digitise (d1) in response to the First line/arc entity to blend prompt. Select the part of the entity that you want to keep. 5. Give an entity digitise (d2) in response to the Second line/arc entity to blend prompt.
Note that the entity digitises must be given such that in moving onto the corner radius from the first entity, motion around the arc is in an anticlockwise direction. Example To create a radiused corner using the Dynamic parameter
3. Mark the Trim box to cut intersecting entities back to the intersection point. 4. Enter the radius into the Radius box. 5. Click on OK to proceed to co-ordinate input for the command. Notice that as you move the cursor around, each possible arc solution for the current cursor position is displayed. 6. Make a free digitise to accept one of these blending arc solutions. You may continue to place blending arcs in by digitising. If you make a mistake you can press the ESC key to move back to the previously defined blend radius. 7. Perform a finish.
227
Creating a Chamfer
Use the Chamfer (Edit menu) chamfer. The parameters are: To create a chamfer 1. Select the Chamfer command. The Chamfer parameters are displayed. 2. Enter the chamfer sizes into the entry boxes. This diagram shows the parameters used in the command: command to digitise two lines and (by default) trim them back to create a
3. Click on OK once you have set all the parameters. The parameter entry dialog for the command is dismissed. 4. Give entity digitise d1 in response to the First line to chamfer prompt. 5. Give entity digitise d2 in response to the Second line to chamfer prompt.
228
229
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
230
Projecting Entities
Use Edit menu Transform Project to open the dialog below.
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
231
Rotating Entities
Use Edit menu Transform Rotate to open the dialog below.
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
232
Scaling Entities
Use Edit menu Transform Scale to open the dialog below.
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
233
Stretching Entities
Classic Edgecam View only
Transform
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
234
Translating Entities
Use Edit menu Transform Translate to open the dialog below.
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
235
To transpose entities from one plane to another 1. Select the Transform, Transpose (Edit menu) command. 2. In the dialog that appears select the type of transposition and click OK. 3. Now digitise an entity that you want to transpose. The entity is transposed immediately on selection. 4. Carry on selecting entities to transpose. 5. Perform a finish to complete the command.
236
As well as selecting stock and fixtures by digitising, you can also select them in the Features Window.
237
238
To create geometry on different planes, use these commands: Select CPL (Geometry menu) - Allows you to select a construction plane on which you can create geometry. Insert Component (File menu) - Allows you to insert a previously saved part into the current part, at a specific orientation. For example, this could allow you to insert the same component part on different faces of a cube.
239
About Surfaces
Edgecam supports many different surface definitions. Surfaces are complex, but the tools within Edgecam simplify their creation and use. You can work with surfaces using the Surfaces category commands, in the Surfaces toolbar. You can also input surface data (from which the surfaces are calculated): Through specialist application programs such as PDI macros which input data directly from co-ordinate measuring systems. See PDI - Customising with PCIs and PDIs. From third party programs, typically using IGES or VDA-FS interface formats. Surface models can be represented by several different surface types; for example, a half cylinder could be constructed from a revolution, tabulated cylinder, ruled surface, coons patch or flowed surface. When considering which surface type to use, bear in mind: What sort of data you are starting with. The accuracy of this data. How you want to machine the surface. You should read about each surface type Edgecam supports to establish which is the best surface type to use for your application. In some situations there may only be one valid choice, however. In the case of the half cylinder, a surface of revolution usually works better than a coons patch, since it is a simpler mathematical representation and so Edgecam can generate the toolpath faster. See Also Typical Uses for Surfaces Creating Functional Surface Types Creating Aesthetic Surface Types Creating More Surface Types Working with Surface Curves Altering Existing Surfaces
240
241
242
243
Viewing Surfaces
A surface is always displayed using lines of equal parametric size, that is, of constant U and V values. The display parameters controlling these lines are set using the Display button within each surface command. The Display dialog box lets you set these parameters: U Patch, V Patch The numbers define how many equally spaced patches (boxes drawn on to help visualise the surface) are displayed along the appropriate axis. This example has U Patch=3 and V Patch=2. U Display, V Display To show the surface graphically in world space, a number of points must be generated and connected by display vectors. The number of points for each axis must be at least equal to the number of patches for that axis. However, the greater the number of points used, the more accurate the display of the surface will be. If the number of points set is less than the number of patches, Edgecam increases the number of points to equal the number of patches. Note: It is important to understand that the accuracy of the display does not affect the inherent accuracy of the surface (which is defined by the three parametric equations). This diagram shows a surface as it would appear with U Display set to 2 (producing two display points between U=0 and U=1) and with U Display set to 50:
The rendering facility in Edgecam displays images of models as machined parts. This highlights the aesthetic quality of the design as well as bringing surface imperfections such as ripples, holes and gaps to the users attention before machining starts. For more information see Rendering the Part.
244
Using UV Markers
In order to be able to tell the U and V axes apart, and to locate the origin point, a control marker can be displayed on the surface. This is a right angled triangle within parametric space, with the length of the sides forming the right angle in the ratio 2:1. The longer of these sides runs along the U axis compare the lengths of the sides of the surface triangle marker with the patch lines to see which axis is which. The right angled corner of the triangle marks the origin.
To change the UV marker 1. Select the Preferences (Options menu) command. The parameters for the command are shown. 2. Click on the Surfaces tab. The parameters are displayed. 3. Set these parameters: Display UV Marker Check this box to show the UV Marker on each surface. UV Marker Length Sets the parametric length (from 0 to 1) of the longer U axis side of the marker. The default is 0.1 or 10% of the U axis length. 4. Click OK to set the UV Marker parameters. The UV Markers on each surface should now have changed to reflect your new settings. Note that to change the colour of the UV Marker, use the Surface Marker parameter in the Colours (Options menu) command.
245
246
247
Unlike surfaces, surface curves do not have precise mathematical definitions, but are defined by the number of pairs of points. A surface curve can be produced in two ways: The intersection of two surfaces can be used to generate a surface curve. The number of points on the curve is determined by the tolerance set. A surface curve is generated when an entity is projected onto a surface. In Design mode, lines, arcs, curves and text can be projected to produce surface curves. (In Manufacturing mode, only toolpaths can be projected, producing a toolpath entity.) Although a surface curve may exist only on a surface, it can be converted into an entity in its own right, by exploding it into a 3D Spline curve. Each point on the surface curve becomes a control point for the Spline.
248
Revolution
Ruled
Tabulated Cylinder
Spline
Coons Patch
Flowed
Fillet
Offset
249
1. Select the button from the Surface toolbar or the Revolution (Surface menu) command. The dialog box for the command is displayed. 2. Enter the Start and End Angles. These are the angles of the start and end points on the arc of revolution. 3. Enter a name for the surface, if required. 4. Select Display to set the surface display parameters. The Display parameters now appear. 5. Enter the required number of patches in the U and V directions into the U Patch and V Patch boxes respectively. 6. Enter the required number of display points in the U and V directions into the U Display and V Display boxes respectively. 7. Click OK to accept the parameters for the command. 8. Enter a digitise in response to the Digitise entity to be swept to form surface prompt. 9. Enter a digitise in response to the Digitise entity to form axis or rotation prompt. 10. Continue from step 8 again or perform a finish. Click here to view an example surface of revolution.
250
1. Select the button from the Surface toolbar or the Ruled (Surface menu) command. The dialog box for the command is displayed. 2. Type a name for the surface, if required. 3. Select Display to set the surface display parameters. The Display parameters now appear. 4. Enter the required number of patches in the U and V directions into the U Patch and V Patch boxes respectively. 5. Enter the required number of display points in the U direction into the U Display box. 6. Click on OK to accept the parameters for the command. 7. Select the first entity by making an entity digitise in response to the Digitise first entity prompt. The first entity establishes the direction of the U axis. The UV Marker appears at the end nearest to the entity digitise. 8. Select the second entity by making an entity digitise in response to the Digitise second entity prompt. 9. Go back to step 7 or perform a finish. The entities can be any combination of arcs, curves, lines, continuous entities or points. Entity digitises must be made at corresponding ends of the two entities or a twisted surface will be created.
251
1. Select the button from the Surface toolbar or the Tabulated Cylinder (Surface menu) command. The dialog box for the command is displayed. 2. Enter a name for the surface, if required. 3. Select Display to set the surface display parameters. The Display parameters now appear. 4. Enter the required number of patches in the U and V directions into the U Patch and V Patch boxes respectively. Enter the required number of display points in the U direction into the U Display box (the surface is a straight line in the V direction). 5. Click OK to accept the parameters for the command. 6. Enter a digitise in response to the Digitise entity to move along (flow line) prompt. 7. Enter a digitise in response to the Digitise entity to transform prompt. 8. Go back to step 6 or perform a finish. This diagram shows a tabulated cylinder:
252
1. Select the button from the Surface toolbar or the Spline (Surface menu) command. The dialog box for the command is displayed. 2. Mark the Laced check box if you want to digitise points in a laced pattern, as shown in this example:
3. Clear the Points check box if you want to define the surface by using entities rather than points. Entities can be curves, lines, arcs or continuous entities. 4. Type the U and V point data. If the Points check box is marked, type the number of fit points you will digitise in the U and V directions into the U Points and V Points boxes, respectively. If the Points check box is empty, enter the number of fit points to be created automatically into the U Points box. Enter the number of entities to be used into the V Points box. 5. Type a name for the surface, if required. 6. Select Display to set the surface display parameters. The Display parameters now appear. 7. Enter the required number of patches in the U and V directions into the U Patch and V Patch boxes respectively. 8. Enter the required number of display points in the U and V directions into the U Display and V Display boxes respectively. 9. Select Slopes to enter edge slope values. Enter the slope data, type the start and end slope conditions in the U direction into the U Start Angle and U End Angle boxes, respectively. Type the start and end slope conditions in the V direction into the V Start Angle and V End Angle boxes, respectively. 10. Click OK to accept the parameters for the command. 11. Make digitises as directed by the prompts. If the Points check box is marked, digitise fit points in response to the Digitise fit points for grid (or return) prompt. The first row of points defines the U axis direction. If the Points check box is empty, make entity digitises in response to the Digitise entities defining spline surface prompt. The first entity establishes the direction of the U axis. The UV Marker appears at the end nearest to the entity digitise. 13.
253
13. Perform a finish. A Spline passes through all fit points. Compare this example with those given for the B-Spline and Bezier surfaces: all these examples were created using the same set of fit points.
254
The bounding entities can be lines, arcs, curves or continuous entities, and one of them can be a point. Bounding entities can be at any orientation and need not have coincident end points. Note that machining a Coons patch containing tangential bounding entities can produce unpredictable results. This is an example of a Coons patch with two tangential bounding entities:
Bounding entities can be selected in any order. The first entity to be selected establishes the U axis. You can select either bi-cubic or linear interpolation to determine the shape of the surface between opposing boundaries.
255
Coons patches can also be used for aesthetic surfaces. You can create Coons patch surfaces using the Coons Patch (Surface menu) command. The properties of a Coons Patch can be altered using the Entity Data (Edit menu) command. To create a Coons Patch
256
1. Select the button from the Surface toolbar or the Coons Patch (Surface menu) command. The dialog box for the command is displayed. 2. Select the Linear or Bi-cubic Blend Type, as required. If Linear is selected, the display lines joining two curves are straight. If Bi-cubic is selected the display lines are bi-cubic curves. The bi-cubic blend curves are normal to the bounding entities. This example shows the two blend types; the Bi-cubic is on the right in all views. 3. Type a name for the surface if necessary. 4. Select Display to set the surface display parameters. The Display parameters now appear. 5. Enter the required number of patches in the U and V directions into the U Patch and V Patch boxes respectively. 6. Enter the required number of display points in the U and V directions into the U Display and V Display boxes respectively. 7. Click OK to accept the parameters for the command. 8. Make entity digitises to select the four bounding elements in response to the prompts. 9. Perform a finish. Click here to view a typical example. Also see About Coons Patches
257
258
1. Select the button from the Surface toolbar or the Flowed (Surface menu) command. The dialog box for the command is displayed: 2. Select the Blend Ends check button if you want to blend the initial cross-section into another cross section at the other end of the flow line. The flow surface is a linear blend between the two crosssections. 3. Select the required Flow Type: 4. Type a name for the surface, if required. 5. Select Display to set the surface display parameters. The Display parameters now appear. 6. Enter the required number of patches in the U and V directions into the U Patch and V Patch boxes respectively. 7. Enter the required number of display points in the U and V directions into the U Display and V Display boxes respectively. 8. Click OK to accept the parameters for the command. 9. Make an entity digitise on the flow line in response to the Select an entity for drive line prompt. 10. Make an entity digitise on the cross-section in response to the Select cross section profile prompt. The cross-section can be an arc, curve or continuous entity. When a continuous entity is used, all constituent entities must exist on the same plane. When a curve is used, all control points must exist on the same plane. The cross-section need not be normal to the end of the flow line. 11. If the Blend Ends check box has been selected, make an entity digitise on the cross-section at the second end of the flow line in response to the Select final section profile prompt. This cross-section is also subject to the conditions described for the initial cross-section. When two cross-sections are used, the entity digitises which select them must both be on the same side of the flow line or a twisted surface is created. 12. Perform a finish. This example shows a single cross-section, in the form of a continuous entity, flowed along a curve.
259
260
1. Select the
button from the Surface toolbar or the Fillet (Surface menu) command.
2. Check the End Points box if you want to digitise the start and end points of the fillet. An end may be free digitised or it may be trimmed to a specific plane. 3. Check the Trim Surfaces box if you want to trim the selected surfaces back to the fillet edge. 4. Enter the start and end radii of the surface fillet in the Start Radius and End Radius boxes respectively. Variable radius fillets can be produced by entering different values in these fields. Edgecam interpolates between the two end radii. 5. Alter the default interpolation Tolerance for the calculation of the fillet, if required. The higher the tolerance the more accurate, but also more lengthy, the calculations. 6. Amend the default Search Grid Density, if required. This is the density of the search grid used when searching for the intersection. In most cases a density of 2 x 2 will suffice (Search Grid Density = 2). However, for surfaces which overlap in a number of places, or only overlap by a small amount, a higher search density may be required to find all possible solutions. The higher the density, the longer the command's calculations will take. 7. Enter a name for the fillet, if required. 8. Select Display to set the surface display parameters. 9. Enter the required number of patches in the U and V directions into the U Patch and V Patch boxes respectively. 10. Enter the required number of display points in the U and V directions into the U Display and V Display boxes respectively. 11. Click OK to accept the parameters for the command. 12. Enter a digitise in response to the 'Digitise primary surface' prompt. An arrow shows the side of the surface which will be used to generate the fillet. If there is more than one possible side, you will be prompted to select it (see example). 13. Enter a digitise in response to the Digitise secondary surface(s) prompt. 14. If you selected the End Points check box, enter a digitise in response to the Digitise entity/position to define start of fillet prompt. Enter a digitise in response to the Digitise entity/position to define end of fillet prompt. 15. Perform a finish. This example shows two fillets produced on a part:
261
262
1. Select the button from the Surface toolbar or the Offset (Surface menu) command. The Offset dialog box is displayed. 2. Complete the parameters as required. 3. Select Tool to set the Tool parameters. The Tool parameters are displayed. 4. Complete the parameters. (These depend on the selected tool type.) 5. Select Display to set the surface display parameters. The Display parameters now appear. 6. Enter the required number of patches in the U and V directions into the U Patch and V Patch boxes respectively. 7. Enter the required number of display points in the U and V directions into the U Display and V Display boxes respectively. 8. Click OK to accept the command parameters. 9. Enter a digitise in reply to the Select surface to offset prompt. If you selected the Select Side check box, Edgecam displays an arrow indicating the side on which the offset will be applied. 10. If required, make a digitise on the other side of the entity to move the arrow. 11. Perform a finish. The offset surface is produced.
263
264
B-Spline surfaces are produced with the B-Spline (Surface menu) command. The properties of a B Spline surface can be altered using the Entity Data (Edit menu) command. To create a B-Spline surface
265
1. Select the button from the Surface toolbar or the B Spline (Surface menu) command. The dialog box for the command is displayed. 2. Select the Laced check box if you want to digitise points in a laced pattern. See Creating Spline Surfaces for a diagram. 3. Type the degree of curvature in the U and V directions into the U Degree and V Degree boxes, respectively. 4. Type the number of digitised control points in the U and V directions into the U Points and V Points boxes, respectively. 5. Type a Name for the surface, if required. 6. Select Display to set the surface display parameters. The Display parameters now appear. 7. Enter the required number of patches in the U and V directions into the U Patch and V Patch boxes respectively. 8. Enter the required number of display points in the U and V directions into the U Display and V Display boxes respectively. 9. Click OK to accept the command parameters. 10. Digitise control points in response to the Digitise control grid points (or return) prompt. The first row of points defines the U axis direction. 11. Perform a finish. Compare this example of a B Spline surface with those given for the Bezier and Spline surfaces: all these examples were created using the same set of points.
266
267
1. Select the button from the Surface toolbar or the Bezier (Surface menu) command. The dialog box for the command is displayed. 2. Select the Laced check box if you want to digitise points in a laced pattern, as described under Creating Spline Surfaces. 3. Type the number of control points you will digitise in the U and V directions into the U Points and V Points boxes, respectively. 4. Type a name for the surface, if required. 5. Select Display to set the surface display parameters. The Display parameters now appear. 6. Enter the required number of patches in the U and V directions into the U Patch and V Patch boxes respectively. 7. Enter the required number of display points in the U and V directions into the U Display and V Display boxes respectively. 8. Click OK to accept the parameters for the command. 9. Digitise control points in response to the Digitise control grid points (or return) prompt. The first row of points defines the U axis direction. 10. Perform a finish. Compare this example of a Bezier surface with those given for the B Spline and Spline surfaces: all these examples were created using the same set of points.
268
Grid of Points
Lofted Curves
Primitives
Slab
Primitives
Sphere
Primitives
Cylinder
Primitives
Cone
Please note that these commands are PDI add-in options and do not support Intellisnap picking. To select entities you can use either of the following methods: Select the Entity icon from the Input toolbar Hold down the right-hand mouse button and select the Entity command from the Shortcut menu Hold down the Ctrl key
269
You must specify the number of points in U and V, and digitise them all in exactly the right order (determined by the 'Laced' parameter). The surfaces you can create from the points are: Spline (produces same results as Spline command) Bezier (produces same results as Bezier command) B Spline (with Control Points as the Point Type, same as B Spline command) Fitted B Spline (Point Type = Fitted) Smoothed B Spline (Point Type = Smoothed) This diagram shows the different methods of using points to define curves on the surface, as seen from one side. The parameters for the Grid of Points command are: Laced Check this box to specify that you want to digitise the points in an order following a laced pattern. This diagram shows the sequence of digitising a 3x3 grid of points (U Points=3, V Points=3):
U Points/V Points Specify the number of points in the U and V directions of the grid. U Degree/V Degree Specify the degree of the surface in the U and V directions (the number must be less than the corresponding number of points). The section Creating B Spline Surfaces discusses the effect of the Degree parameter. Surface Type Specify the type of surface to be created. Point Type Defines how the digitised points are to be treated when creating a B Spline surface. If you selected the Surface Type to be Bezier or Spline, Point Type is set to Control Points. Smooth Tolerance The tolerance to which the surface is fitted through the points. This is only used when the Point Type = Smoothed Fit Points. The Display parameters, and Layer, Colour, Style and Name are the same as for all surface commands. See Viewing Surfaces for details.
270
Degree (Only valid when Guide Rail = None). This is the degree of surface in the 'loft' direction (this is the direction determined by the guide curve). The Degree value must be less than the number of cross section curves. The degree in the cross-section direction is taken from the cross section curves. The section Creating B Spline Surfaces discusses the effect of the Degree parameter. Tolerance This controls to within what limits the command generates the intersections required by the various surface types. For instance, in the cases where a guide rail is required, Tolerance specifies the accuracy with which the cross-sections must meet the guide curves. Guide Rail Specify the type of guide rails, if any. Flow Type Valid only for the Guide Rail parameter's Central Spine and One Side options.Select from: Normal Maintains the cross-section normal to the flow line Vertical Sections Maintains the cross-section in a vertical orientation irrespective of whether the flow line is parallel to the current CPL Parallel Sections Maintains all cross-sections parallel to the initial cross-section None This maintains the cross-sections in the orientation in which they were created. The Display parameters, and Layer, Colour, Style and Name are the same as for all surface commands.
271
Central Spine Digitise one guide rail, then multiple cross sections.
The command flows these cross sections automatically from their centres along the guide rail. This means that the original cross sections do not need to intersect with the guide rail, and that the surface does not have to pass through the cross section curves. However, the surface will pass through the central spine. Profile Chain the 2D profile (this must be a closed, single-entity profile, for example a continuous or an arc) and then as many cross sections as desired. The cross sections must intersect the profile at their endpoints.
Network Digitise the curves in any order, or simply use the Window input option to select all of them. The curves must form a regular grid and must all intersect at their endpoints and cross points.
272
If all curves do not intersect within Tolerance, the command will ask you to digitise curves in order (do not use the Window input option). Once the surface has been created, the command displays a list of curves that were above Tolerance. The command creates the surface through the average of the curves. One Side Digitise a single guide rail. The guide rail must intersect with every cross section curve. The command will not automatically hang cross sections from the middle, but from wherever they intersect. All intersections are calculated to Tolerance.
Both Sides Digitise a guide rail on either side of the cross section curves. The two guide rails must intersect with the endpoints of the cross section curves, to within the specified Tolerance.
273
Primitives, Slab
Primitives, Sphere
Primitives, Cylinder
Primitives, Cone
These surfaces can be created dynamically by setting one or more of the parameters controlling the shape's dimensions to <Digitise>. However, to be able to digitise the third dimension of the shape you will need to have at least one extra view port active.
Please note that these commands are PDI add-in options and do not support Intellisnap picking. To select entities you can use either of the following methods: Select the Entity icon from the Input toolbar Hold down the right-hand mouse button and select the Entity command from the Shortcut menu Hold down the Ctrl key
274
275
To generate a surface boundary 1. Select the Generate, Boundaries (Surface menu) command. 2. Select the required options on the dialog. 3. Digitise one or more surfaces. 4. Perform a finish. Separate surface curves are created for each edge of the selected surface.
The dialog box for the command offers the following parameters: Generate Specify the type of boundary that will be created for the selected surface(s). Choose between: Generate Surface Curves Checking this option allows you to select surfaces only to generate surface curves around the boundaries of the selected surface(s). Note that the surface cannot be deleted because the surface curves are dependent on it. Generate Base Entities Checking this option allows you to select surfaces or surface curves to be converted to lines, arcs, Splines or B-Splines. Generate 2D entities Checking this option allows you to select surfaces, surface curves, Splines or BSplines to be converted to 2D curves at the current CPL level. Tidy Base Entities Check this box to replace a set of co-linear lines with a single line, and replace sequential arcs of the same radius that also lie in the same plane with a single arc. Outer Edges (2D entities only) Check this box to join outer edges of the selected surfaces to form a union. The resulting geometry will be created as lines at the current Z level and can be used as containment boundaries for subsequent machining cycles. Note that surfaces without fully enclosing boundary curves such as spheres or cylinders may not be taken into account. Also note that a surface that doubles back will not return a boundary that represents the furthest extent of the surface. 3D Curves Curves The boundary curves can be generated as either Splines or B-Splines. Control Points Specify the number of control points for the curves (default 40).
276
Note that cross sections can only be generated in the current CPL and for surfaces that are displayed. 1. Select the Generate, Cross Sections (Surface menu) command. The Cross Sections dialog box is displayed. 2. Enter the Initial Level (the height of the first cross section). 3. Set the Increment; that is the distance between subsequent cross sections. 4. Enter the number of cross sections you require (Number of Cuts). 5. If necessary, update the Tolerance; that is, the maximum distance allowable between the midpoint of any surface curve segment and the exact cross sectional curve. 6. If necessary, update the Search Grid Density. The Search Grid Density controls the density of the search for the intersection. In most cases a density of 2 x 2 will work (Search Grid Density = 2). However, for surfaces which overlap in a number of places, or only overlap by a small amount, a higher search density may be required to find all possible solutions. The higher the Search Grid Density, the longer Edgecam takes to find the solutions. 7. Click OK to accept the parameters for the command. 8. Digitise a point on each surface to be cross sectioned. 9. Perform a finish. The cross sections are now displayed.
277
1. Select the button from the Surface toolbar or the Generate, Intersection (Surface menu) command. The dialog box for the command is displayed: 2. Enter the Tolerance for the calculations. 3. Enter a new Search Grid Density, if required. The Search Grid Density controls the density of the search for the intersection. In most cases a density of 2 x 2 will work (Search Grid Density = 2). However, for surfaces which overlap in a number of places, or only overlap by a small amount, a higher search density may be required to find all possible solutions. The higher the Search Grid Density, the longer Edgecam takes to find the solutions. 4. Click OK to accept the parameters for the command. 5. Enter a digitise in response to the Digitise primary surface prompt. 6. Enter one or more digitises in response to the Digitise secondary surface(s) prompt.
Note that if the order of the surface selection is changed, the curves may be slightly different. However, they will be within the selected tolerance of the true solution. Example
278
279
Generate Curves Check this box to create surface curves on the selected surfaces. If you leave this box empty, the command will prompt you to define the bridge surface by digitising two surface curves. 1st/2nd Magnitude These parameters define the magnitude of curvature related to the first and second selected surfaces. Select a percentage curvature in steps of 10%, with 20% being the default. The higher the percentage entered, the greater the curvature. This diagram shows a cross section through two bridge surfaces created using different magnitude values:
Name Enter an identifier for the bridge surface that can be used later when referring to the surface.
280
The Display tab contains the standard UV patch and point modifiers used by all surfaces, which define how the bridge surface is to be shown on the screen.
281
1. Select the button from the Surface toolbar or the Project (Surface menu) command. The dialog box for the command is displayed. 2. Enter the tolerance; that is, the maximum distance that the midpoint of a segment of the surface curve may be from the true curve of projection. The default is 0.01. 3. Click OK to accept the parameters and dismiss the dialog box. 4. Digitise the surface(s) to project onto. 5. Perform a finish. 6. Digitise one or more entities to be projected. 7. Perform a finish.
Note that unpredictable results will occur if this command is used with a surface which, for some XY coordinates, has two or more Z values; for example, a folded surface with an overhang.
For trimmed surfaces, unpredictable results will also occur if the underlying (untrimmed) surface folds over even if the trimmed one does not. This example shows an arc entity projected onto a surface with two Z values at the same XY co-ordinate.
282
283
284
285
286
Extending Surfaces
You may want to extend a surface along one or more of its edges, for example if you do not have enough data to specify a complete surface. Note that extending is not permitted on a surface group, since the relevant boundary of each surface must be specified. Each extended portion is extended at a tangent to the original surface. When a surface has been extended, its U and V parameters are adjusted so that U and V co-ordinates on the new surface still range from 0 to 1. If you use the Entity (Verify menu) command to show the parameters for the surface, the U and V parameters are given in terms of the original surface. In this example an extension factor of 1 has been used (giving 100% extension): The U parameter range reported by Entity (Verify menu) command would be 0 to 2, rather than 0 to 1 as it is based on the original dimensions of the surface. To extend a non-offset surface
287
288
Trimming Surfaces
A trimmed surface is a surface with a piece removed along a surface curve. You can use the Trim Surface (Edit menu) command to do this. Note that trimming is not permitted on a surface group, since it would be necessary to specify which part of each surface member would be retained and which would be removed. Trimming is a convenient way of constraining a toolpath in order to prevent the gouging of adjacent surfaces. A trimmed surface can be exploded as any other surface. Sometimes a sequence of intersection operations produces a set of surface curves which intersect or have gaps between their ends. In order to produce a boundary which the Trim Surface command will understand, the curves must be trimmed against each other. The portion of the curve retained during a trim operation is the one closest to the digitised point. When the intersection point is beyond the end of a curve, the last vector on the curve is extended to that point. To trim a surface
289
Joining Surfaces
Edgecam allows adjacent surfaces to be joined into a single machineable surface entity, using the Joined (Surface menu) command. Note that you cannot use this command on surface groups, as a general surface group might not have all surfaces joining at common boundaries, or have all surface members untrimmed. The Joined command is mainly intended for part created in other CAD systems and imported via IGES. Some CAD systems divide a single logical entity into a patchwork of smaller surfaces, usually B-spline surfaces. Combining them into a single entity simplifies subsequent surface manipulation. To be able to join surfaces, these conditions must apply: The surfaces must be untrimmed Adjacent surfaces must match parametrically along a common boundary Surfaces must join to form a rectangle in parametric space. These conditions are shown below:
290
Note that you cannot join or extend surface groups, but you can add or remove surfaces from existing surface groups using the Surface Group (Edit menu) command. A surface group can be exploded into its constituent surfaces. When creating or editing a surface group the surface sides are selectable. Choose between the following Side Selection methods: Prompt You will be prompted to select each surface. Up You are only prompted for the side of vertical or wrap-over surfaces. In almost all other cases, up is correctly determined automatically. Forward The default forward side is chosen for all surfaces without prompting. This method is useful if the surface sides are known to be correct. Swap Selects the opposite of the current setting. This is useful if most surface groups are correct as you are only required to select those surfaces that are incorrect and swap them to the correct side.
291
The parameters for the command are: Trim Surfaces Check this box if you want to trim the selected surfaces back to the fillet edge. Tolerance The maximum allowable distance between the corners of adjacent surfaces. Search Grid Density This is the density of the search grid used when searching for the fillet surfaces. In most cases a density of 2 x 2 will suffice (Search Grid Density = 2). However, for some fillets, a higher search density may be required to find all possible solutions. The higher the density, the longer the command's calculations will take. Name Enter a name for the corner blend, if required. Display Sets these surface display parameters: U/V Patch Enter the required number of patches in the U and V directions. U/V Display Enter the required number of display points in the U and V directions.
292
293
Problem Areas
Degenerate surfaces (surfaces that cross over themselves) Degenerate surface curves on trimmed surfaces (surface curve intersects with itself) Tangent continuous corners on Coons Patches
294
You can then create simple 2D geometry on the unwrapped envelope. This geometry can be displayed in true 3D space by "wrapping" the envelope back around the original cylinder.
295
Unwrap Justify Left/Centre/Right Ruler Wrap Rotary Points A variety of other commands can be used to control other aspects of rotary design, and these commands are also covered within this section.
296
You can only unwrap single lines to form the rectangular unwrapped envelope. These lines must not be tapered. The diagrams below show the relationship of the line that represents the circumferential edge of the cylinder and the unwrapped view obtained once it has been unwrapped.
297
Once you have unwrapped about a given axis, any angular co-ordinate input must use the associated rotary axis. For example, if you unwrap around the X axis, you would now use X co-ordinates to position geometry along the cylinder and A co-ordinates (in degrees) to position geometry around the cylinder. You can use Y instead of A when you need to enter a distance around the circumference rather than an angle. Use the Unwrap (Rotary menu) command to create a rectangular envelope representing a developed cylinder. Here are two examples of creating an unwrapped cylinder envelope: Before you start, you should have already created a line that is parallel to the axis you wish to unwrap about, and is at a height from the axis that corresponds to the radius of the cylinder. These parameters help you to define the unwrapped envelope: Unwrap Views Select the views in which the unwrapped envelope is to be displayed. We recommend that you do not display the unwrapped envelope in any of the standard views, as you will later wish to display the wrapped geometry in those ports. You may find it convenient to set up some additional views for displaying unwrapped geometry, before using this command. See Viewing the Part and related topics for details. View on Unwrap (Milling Environment only) Select the name of the view that looks directly down onto the unwrapped envelope. The Turning environment does not use this parameter as it already has a defined view called Unwrap. The default view name is Unwrap but can be changed or set to <None>. Axis Specify which axis the unwrapping will be performed around (with respect to the current CPL). This can be the X , Y or Z axis, or an Entity. Lines and Points are the only entity types that can be unwrapped: When you want to select a line, you can set the axis to X, Y, Z (as long as the line is parallel to the axis) or Entity, in which case the line position determines the axis of unwrap and the radius. See Unwrapping Lines. When you want to select a point(s), you must select either X, Y or Z from the list, as a single point does not provide enough information to specify an axis. See Unwrapping Points. Colour Select the colour for the unwrapped envelope. The default is the parent entity's colour.
298
Style Select the style or line font for the unwrapped envelope. The default is the parent entity's style. Ensure that your Drawing is configured to have a port showing the Unwrap view, as you need to use this port to create the geometry. The envelope is now created in the selected views and the CPL/Level indicator is updated. The default CPL name is Axis Wrap. The level is the same value as the height of the line above the CPL (radius). If you digitised more than one line, the level will be the same as the last line you selected. See Also Unwrapping Lines Unwrapping Points Justifying the Unwrapped Envelope Showing the Unwrapped Envelope Ruler
299
Unwrapping Lines
This section describes how you would use the Unwrap (Rotary menu) command to unwrap lines.
The line that you select to define the unwrapped envelope must conform to set rules. There are three valid cases:
If a line does not conform to one of these types, or you select any other entity type, the command ignores the entity.
300
Unwrapping Points
This section describes how you would use the Unwrap (Rotary menu) to unwrap points. command
A point can be in any position around the axis of unwrap. The distance from the axis determines the radius, and the position relative to the CPL determines its angular value. An envelope cannot be created for a series of points. To view an unwrapped envelope, you must unwrap a line that lies on the same radius as the selected points.
As the original points are defined in 3D space, a new point is created (unwrapped) and an associated wrapped point is displayed for each point. The system deletes the original point because both the 3D point and the wrapped point are coincident (this would make selecting the correct entity difficult in Manufacture).
301
Justify Centre
Justify Left
Justify Right
For example, you may want to create a point at an angle of 270 degrees around the diameter, in which case the obvious choice to view the unwrapped envelope would be the Justify Left command.
302
303
Of course, the co-ordinate input dialog can be used to input any 2D geometry, not just points. If you were to enter, for example, a Y co-ordinate, this would be translated as an angular co-ordinate when the geometry is wrapped or machined. Therefore you can enter angular and linear distances onto the unwrapped envelope, and they will be correctly displayed once wrapped. By first using Co-ordinate Input to create the points, you can place subsequent geometry such as lines and arcs using normal 2D construction methods:
304
The General tab offers the following parameters: Equal Spacing Check this box to space all the points out equally around the cylinder. If this is checked, the Angle parameter is greyed out. Number of Points Specifies the number of radial points required. Angle Specifies the radial angle between each point. This cannot be used with the Equal Spacing parameter. Initial Angle Specifies the angle at which to place the first point in the set. The default is 0 degrees. Radius Specifies the radius of the wrap. Axis Used with the Radius parameter to specify the axis the points are to be wrapped around. If a line or unwrapped envelope has been digitised, the Axis will be ignored. In addition, the Unwrap and Wrap tabs allow you to select the views in which the planar and radial points will be displayed. Unwrap Views Select the views in which the planar points will be displayed. Wrap Views Select the views in which the radial points will be displayed. Colour Specifies the colour for the radial points Style Specifies the style or font for the radial points. Once you click on the OK button, you are prompted to Digitise the centre position of the Radial Points. You can do this by selecting an entity that lies along the selected wrap axis or through co-ordinate input.
305
306
It is not possible to change or re-select which views will show the wrapped geometry later. You would have to delete the wrapped geometry and re-use the Wrap command to select a new set of views. Note that only one envelope and its associated geometry may be wrapped at a time with this command. This is because the rectangular boundaries of unwrapped envelopes can overlap, and geometry may exist in this overlapped area. It is highly recommended that the wrapped geometry is not displayed in your unwrapped view. This avoids any confusion by having both the wrapped and unwrapped geometry in one view. Example
307
By drawing planar geometry at the desired level (radius) above the CPL, you can wrap those entities by selecting an axis from the Axis parameter. The command takes the level of each entity as its radius.
308
309
10. Enter the following co-ordinates: X=0 (Absolute), Y=0 (Absolute), Z (Screen Select) 11. Click on OK. 12. Digitise the end of the envelope to set the Z position of the origin of the new CPL. You are now ready to create geometry on the end of the envelope.
310
311
312
313
Displaying the stock and fixtures As for any other entity, the display of stock and fixtures is controlled by layers. When using the dialog to create stock or fixtures, you can opt for stock and fixtures to be created in their own Stock or Fixture layer (which is created if necessary), or in any layer of your choice. Use Toggle Stock in the Display toolbar to switch between: Solid fixtures, translucent stock. Wireframe fixtures, wireframe stock. Alternatively click on the View caption (bottom left of Graphics Area) and in the subsequent View Properties dialog click Translucent Stock. Creating a library of fixture parts When creating stock and fixture entities an attribute is set and saved with the part. Therefore it is possible to save drawings of clamps, vices, rotary tables, tombstones, chucks etc with their fixture attribute set. When these parts are inserted they will have their fixture attribute set and will be displayed as fixtures in the Features Window. This means that fixtures can be inserted into a range of parts without further user intervention.
See Also Creating a Box Stock or Fixture Creating a Cylindrical Stock or Fixture Creating a Profile Stock or Fixture Stock and Fixtures from Solid Models
314
315
8.
Once you have made the two digitises, the box is created.
If you have accidentally created a box in 2D then the warning message Invalid Box definition is displayed.
316
Note that cylinders can be created at any orientation. 1. Select the Stock/Fixture (Geometry menu) command. The dialog for the command now appears. 2. Select the Type of object that you want to define (Stock or Fixture). 3. Select the Shape of the object to be a Cylinder. 4. Enter the Radius of the cylinder. If no radius value is specified you will be prompted to digitise a point for the radius after you have defined the axis of the cylinder. 5. Click OK. 6. You must now digitise two points to define the axis of the cylinder. Once you have made the two digitises, the cylinder is created.
317
Please note that edges and faces should not cross over or exactly meet as the Simulator converts the profile into a solid and this will cause an illegal operation.
Please note that profile stock can only be created in CPL Top otherwise it is displayed incorrectly in Edgecam Verify.
318
319
To produce turn billets: 1. Create a suitable profile to represent your stock around your turn profile geometry, using lines and/or arcs. Make sure this is an open profile. The profile need not start and/or end on the centreline; this will be enforced automatically. 2. Click Geometry menu Stock/Fixture.
3. In the dialog that opens set Type to Stock/Fixture, set Shape to Turn Billet and click OK to close the dialog. 4. Digitise your stock profile.
320
Updating Fixtures
Fixtures will not appear in the Simulator until after an 'Update Fixtures' instruction. To create this instruction in the sequence, use the Update Stock/Fixtures command in the MFunctions menu. You use Update Stock/Fixtures to create the initial fixture setup, and if necessary to subsequently modify it during the sequence (as clamps need to be moved for example). Note that this command does not result in a pause being placed into the CNC code. To allow the operator to move the fixtures you will need to use M-Functions Menu > Stop Type (and perhaps MFunctions Menu > Comment. The command prompts you to select fixtures to be added to the setup. Pick these as required and confirm the selection with a right-hand mouse click. The command then prompts you to select fixtures to be removed from the setup. Pick these as required and confirm the selection with a right-hand mouse click or press the return key for none. Notes From the Sequence Window you can edit the digitised input for the command if required. Rapid Result does not support fixtures and nominated fixtures will be ignored. We do not recommend rationalising a machining sequence that contains multiple Update Fixture commands. Please note that self-intersecting triangles and open solids are not suitable for simulation as Boolean operations are impossible on 'corrupt solids'. A warning message will be issued when the part is loaded into Edgecam Simulator. Edgecam Simulator will carry on simulating the part when the warning is accepted, but will fail when it reaches the problem area.
321
322
Notes You might want to first set defaults for dimensioning. After selecting the command you generally: Follow the prompts to digitise the geometry - you digitise the two points that you want to create a linear dimension between for example. Then digitise a point at which to create the dimension text. For further details see the topics on the individual commands (on 'Linear' for example). You might want to first set defaults for dimensioning. Dimensions for solid models are not associative to the model. As with other types of geometry, dimensions are created on the current Layer and CPL, and can be edited (double-click on the dimension, for example). (Chained dimensions are treated as individual entities when editing.) Size and other parameters are all specified in part units. If a grid is active and grid snap selected, the dimension can be positioned to a grid point. The CPL origin can be selected as input to a dimension. This is particularly useful when dimensioning setup sheets to position the component from the datum (CPL origin).
323
Text in dimensioning refers to the font and style of the text and numbers of the dimension. To set defaults for all dimension commands
1. Select the Dimension Style (Dimension menu) 2. On the General tab you can set the following defaults:
Text Specifies up to 30 characters to replace the dimensions and any symbol. Symbol Specifies the symbol to be used in front of the dimension text: (the Default, or Diameter setting), R (Radius) or None (no symbol). This does not affect the type of dimension. For example, setting Radius does not display the radius instead of the diameter; it simply puts a different symbol in front of the dimension. Prefix A a string of up to 30 characters which will appear before the dimension. Suffix A string of up to 30 characters which will appear after the dimension. Height The default height for the dimension text. Width The default width for the dimension text. Font The default font for the dimension text can be selected from the drop-down list. The following fonts are available. Slant The default slant for the dimension text. This is angle of the characters from the horizontal. Therefore, normal text would have a slant of 90. For an italic effect, enter 60. Angle Style The units for angles can be selected from the drop-down list. Possibilities are: Decimal (94.56), Degrees (94), Minutes (9433) and Seconds (943336). Fraction Dimensions can be given in fractions rather than decimals. For example, enter 12 to create dimensions to the nearest 1/12th of a unit. Entering a negative number (for example -12) will display
the fraction as
rather than 5/12. Fractions will be simplified where possible; for example,
would be shown as
Text Location Check to specify the position of the text dimension with a digitise. Otherwise, the text is centred just above the arrow line. Inline Check this box to break the dimension arrows broken and put the text in this gap.
324
If you want the text of the dimensions to always be horizontal, select the Horizontal Text check box. If the check box is not selected, the text is drawn parallel to the dimension line. 3. Select the Arrow tab to display the Arrow parameters. You can set the following defaults: 4. Select Tolerance tab to display the Tolerance parameters. You can set the following defaults: 5. Click OK to accept the parameter settings for the command.
325
Chain Dimensions
Tick the Chain option to create a series of dimensions from one common datum point, so that the first point only needs to be specified once. Only the end point and arrow line locations are needed for each subsequent dimension; for example:
Notes It is not be possible to mix dimension types in a chain. Linear dimensions to be chained must be at a constant angle and arc dimensions must be for concentric arcs.
326
1. Select
2. Digitise one point on each entity. 3. Digitise a point for the arrow line. 4. If you selected the Text Location check box, digitise a point for the text location. 5. Perform a finish.
327
1. Select
2. Digitise one point on each entity. 3. Digitise a point for the arrow line. 4. If you selected the Text Location check box, digitise a point for the text location. 5. Perform a finish.
328
1. Select
2. Digitise one point on each entity. 3. Digitise a point for the arrow line. 4. If you selected the Text Location check box, digitise a point for the text location. 5. Perform a finish.
329
1. Select
2. Digitise one point on each line. The location of the digitises determines which angle is dimensioned (see examples). 3. Digitise a point to position the arrows (see example) . The position of this digitise determines if the inside or outside angle is dimensioned. 4. If you selected the Text Location check box, digitise a point for the text location. If you chose to display witness lines, witness lines may be added to extend the lines out to the location of the text (depending on where you digitise) (see example). 5. Perform a finish.
330
1. Select
2. Digitise one point on the arc in response to the prompt Digitise arc/circle for arrow line direction prompt. One arrow head will be positioned here. 3. Digitise a point for the arrows in response to the Digitise arrow tail (distance from arc/circle centre) prompt. This will determine if the arrow is inside or outside the arc (see examples). 4. If you selected the Text Location check box, digitise a point for the text location. 5. Perform a finish.
331
Two digitises are required. The first, an entity digitise on the arc, determines the position of the arrow head on the arc. The second, a free digitise, determines whether the dimension text and arrow are inside the arc, or across the arc and extending beyond it to the text outside. To create a radial dimension
1. Select
2. Digitise one point on the arc in response to the prompt Digitise arc/circle for arrow line direction prompt. The arrow head will be positioned here. 3. Digitise a point for the arrow in response to the Digitise arrow tail (distance from arc/circle centre) prompt. This will determine if the arrow is inside or outside the arc (see examples). 4. If you checked the Text Location box, digitise a point for the text location 5. Perform a finish.
332
Drawing Arrows
You can create an arrow line on your drawing using the Arrow (Dimension menu) command. The arrow can be constructed from one or more straight line segments. To create an arrow line
1. Select
2. Digitise a point for the arrow head. 3. Digitise one or more points for the arrow line. These do not have to be linear. 4. Perform a finish.
333
Hatching an Area
You can cross hatch (shade in) an area for clarity. This area can contain islands; that is, areas that will not be cross hatched. The area can be bounded by any combination of lines arcs, curves, construction entities, continuous or group entities. You can alter the angle and line spacing defaults, if required. To hatch an area
1. Select the button from the Dimension toolbar or the Hatch Area (Dimension menu) command. The Hatch dialog box is displayed. 2. If required, update the default Angle of the hatch lines and Line Spacing. 3. Click OK to accept the parameters for the command. 4. Digitise a point on each boundary of the area. If islands are to be left, digitise them well before finishing the command. Adjacent entities must have coincident endpoints.
Please note that boundaries can be windowed and chained but you should be careful to avoid ambiguous constructions as these may be misinterpreted. 5. Perform a finish.
334
335
336
STL
337
338
339
340
341
Entity Type IGES level Curves and Surfaces Conics Canonical Surfaces
342
Entity-Related Problems
Different CAD/CAM systems may create entities that exist successfully in the Edgecam 3D part model, but problems can still occur. Some common problems include: Repeated entities and/or entities with the same end points The major problem is that these entities may stop a Chain. Copy one of these double entities to an hidden layer and redraw the part using one of the toolbar icons or the Redraw (View menu) command to reveal the underlying entities. Consecutive entities with inaccurate end points A minor problem to resolve; use the Trim (Edit menu) command to trim the end points together. Continuous entities in IGES To allow access to the underlying entities use the Explode (Edit menu) command. All the entities will then be selectable as single entities. Surfaces from other CAD/CAM systems Always verify a surface type using the Entity (Verify menu) command to ensure that the IGES transfer has maintained the surface type. Problems can occur when the surface was defined in the sender's CAD/CAM system as a ruled surface but may be transferred in the IGES file as a different type. You need to identify the surface in Edgecam so that you can apply entity masking or selection. Transformed entities Ensure that the transferred part is at an origin known to you. Many design engineers will set a local origin for their convenience. For example, a car may have the origin of all the major components relative to the front bumper, or an aircraft may have its major components relative to the centre of gravity. To resolve this problem, translate the part to the origin prior to any machining operations. Loading speed of IGES entities Problems with the loading speed of IGES can be caused by the relationship between the units of some IGES entities and the Edgecam system tolerance. In these cases the 'Conversion Tolerance' option on the Advanced tab of the IGES load dialog can be used to override the system tolerance to ensure that the file is loaded correctly. The default value for the conversion tolerance is the system tolerance value that is specified in the defaults file.
343
Command Word POINT PSET MDI CIRCLE CURVE SURF CONS FACE TOP
VDA Element Point Point sequence Point vector sequence Circle/circular arc Curve Surface Curve on surface Bounded surface Topology of surface
Edgecam Entity Point One or more lines not supported Arc Spline curve Spline surface Surface curve Trimmed surface not supported
344
345
When checked the file opens directly in Edgecam. This is using the Use 'New' importer required for 2004 and later format AutoCAD files. See below for more details. When unchecked the file opens via a dialog. This is using the 'Standard' importer that can open AutoCAD files prior to the 2004 format. This is the default. New loader notes See this list of supported entity types... ACIS entities are not imported.
346
Edgecam Entity
Line Arc Arc Point Text Group Multiple boundary lines Continuous Multiple lines and arcs Line Multiple lines Group
Line Styles:
Edgecam Style
Continuous Dot Dashed Hidden Dashdot Centre
347
348
STL entities can be rotated, translated, mirrored and scaled using the appropriate Edit, Transform commands. For large STL models, any transformation may take some time. Please note that scaling a part will scale the tolerance to which the triangles represent the original model. Please note that STL files can only be machined using surface cycles (except Surface Areaclear and Surface Lace).
349
CATIA V4 Loader
Requires the CATIA Loader licence (EN000-T) The CATIA V4 loader provides the ability to load CATIA model (*.model) and export (*.exp) files from CATIA V4 into Edgecam. (You can open CATIA V5 files directly using Edgecam Solid Machinist.) To import CATIA model or export files into Edgecam, use the Open (File menu) command and set the Files of Type parameter to CATIA Model Files (*.model) or CATIA Export Files (*.exp). Entities supported in the CATIA V4 Loader When opening a CATIA V4 file you can specify the entity types that you want to load (by default all types are selected):
CATIA Entity
Point Line Circle Ellipse Parabola/Hyperbola Curve Composite Curve Surface Face Volume/Skin/Exact Solids/Skd Mockup Solids/Polyhedral Surface
Edgecam Entity
Point Line Arc Ellipse Nurbs Curve Nurbs Curve Nurbs Curve Nurbs Surface Trimmed Surface Trimmed Surfaces Wire Frame/Trimmed Surfaces
Layers from CATIA V4 Edgecam entities will be created on the same layer as the original CATIA entities. Whilst CATIA has numbered layers, Edgecam supports named layers. Thus, equivalent layers will be created in Edgecam for those used in the CATIA file, for example CATIA Layer 5 123 Edgecam layer layer 5 layer123
350
351
Here are details on the command and its dialog settings (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
352
To apply a strategy to all the features in the part, or to features selected by geometry: 1. Make sure you are in Manufacture mode. 2. Click Solids menu Apply Strategy.
3. Complete the Apply Strategy dialog that opens. You browse for a strategy to open, and apply the strategy to 'All Features' (a box that you can check) or to individual features (uncheck the box). You select these individual features by clicking their geometry in the part. The instructions for machining the features are now generated by the strategy. Note that you may see different results when applying the same strategy to multiple features, as opposed to applying the strategy to one feature. The strategy may have been written so that features interact with each other to produce the final machining.
1.
353
To apply strategies to selected features: 1. Make sure you are in Manufacture mode. 2. In the Features Window, click the required features to select them. You can use multiple-selection techniques - Ctrl-Click on a series of features for example. 3. Right-click on any selected feature and from the shortcut menu select Apply Strategy. 4. In the Open dialog that starts, navigate to your saved strategy (.rbm file) and open this. The instructions for machining the features are now generated by the strategies. Note that you may see different results when applying the same strategy to multiple features, as opposed to applying the strategy to one feature. The strategy may have been written so that features interact with each other to produce the final machining.
To apply assigned strategies: Once you have assigned strategies to features (see below), you can apply these strategies, for multiple features, in one action: 1. Make sure you are in Manufacture mode. Start working in the Features Window. 2. To apply all the feature's strategies, select none of them. To apply only some of the features' strategies, click on these features to select them. You can use multiple selection techniques, for example Ctrl-Click on a number of features. 3. Click the Apply All Strategies button .
The instructions for machining the features are now generated by the strategies. The order in which the strategies are applied to the features (and hence the ordering of the generated instructions in the sequence) is determined by the '#' Column in the Features Window - see the section 'To change the machining order of the features' below. Note that you may see different results when applying the same strategy to multiple features, as opposed to applying the strategy to one feature. The strategy may have been written so that features interact with each other to produce the final machining. The order in which the multiple strategies assigned to one feature are applied is in their listed order in the Assign Strategies to a Feature dialog (see below).
To assign strategies to features manually: 1. In the Features Window click the required features to select them. You can use multiple selection techniques - Ctrl-Click on a series of features for example. 2. Right-click on any selected strategy, and in the shortcut menu that opens click Assign Strategies. 3. In the Assign Strategies to a Feature dialog that opens: a. Click the New button. button.
a. b. c. Use the Open dialog to navigate to a strategy file and open it. d. Repeat a, b and c to add more strategies, as required. Note that you can re-open the dialog and use the other buttons to: Unassign a strategy Unassign all strategies , , or
354
Change the strategy ordering (determines the order in which the strategies are applied see the section 'To apply assigned strategies' above). 4. Click the OK button to confirm and close the dialog. 5. Use the Assigned Strategies column of the Features Window - List View to review the assigned strategies. Once you have assigned strategies to features, see 'To apply assigned strategies' above.
To assign strategies to features automatically: 1. Click Options menu Preferences General tab, and set Strategy Folder to the folder containing your candidate strategies for assignment. 2. At the top of the Features Window click the Assign Strategies button.
3. Switch to the List View and note the assigned strategies. As explained above, strategies are automatically assigned to the types of feature they are intended to machine, as coded into the strategies. Once you have assigned strategies to features, see 'To apply assigned strategies' above.
To change the machining order of the features: You can change the order in which the feature's assigned strategies will be applied (see 'To apply assigned strategies' above). You can do this before or after you assign strategies: 1. In the Features Window make sure you are using List View. 2. Set the 'Feature Type' column to be the 'Priority (1)' sort column - see details. The features types will now be in an appropriate machining order, as suggested by Edgecam. The order might be 'Front Face', 'Front Bore', 'Front Turn', 'Thread' , for example. The order runs from the top of the list downwards. 3. You might now need to 'fine tune' this suggested machining order. Do this by dragging individual features up and down in the list. 4. At the top of the Features Window, click the Manufacturing Order button.
The '#;' column numbers are now assigned so that they run in sequence down the list. You can now change the list to any convenient order you like, without changing the machining order. This is because the '#' column numbers define the machining order, and these numbers do not need to remain sequential down the list. 5.
355
5. If you do want to change the machining order, you can use the button again and re-assign the '#' column to the current list order. The '#' numbers will be re-set to the current list order, whether you have manually ordered this, or automatically sorted on any column.
356
*In Edgecam Part Modeler the option is standard; no installation is needed. For an up to date list of supported CAD system versions, see the What's New help. See also Transfer of CAD System Data to Edgecam Importing CAD Thread Data
357
358
SolidWorks assemblies can only be opened directly from SolidWorks. Before loading a SolidWorks file into Edgecam, if it contains configurations we recommend that you first rebuild all the configurations. To do this there is a script you can run in SolidWorks: Edgecam Installation Folder\Cam\Examples\solid machinist\solidworks\Scripts\ForceRebuild.swp The solid model will be loaded into Edgecam using the current layer, colour and font for the solid. When loading parasolid files (*.x_t, *.x_b) colour properties for hole features will also be passed to Edgecam. If preferred, these can be suppressed using the Face Colour - Ignore Model Values option on the Solids tab of the Preferences (Options menu) dialog. In addition, Edgecam allows you to colour the faces of a solid model by their geometry type. To enable this functionality, check the Face Colour - Render by Geometry Type option on the Solids tab of the Preferences (Options menu) dialog. See Specifying Colour Preferences for Solid Models. The load operation will automatically scale the solid to the current Edgecam units. See Also Solid Machinist Error Messages Colour Preferences for Solid Models Associative Reloading of Solid Models Inserting a Solid Model
359
SolidWorks
Solid Edge
*.par
*.prt
Solid Machinist for Parasolid or Solid CAD/CAM or Solid Machinist MAX Solid Machinist for Parasolid or Solid CAD/CAM or Solid Machinst MAX or Edgecam Part Modeler Solid Machinist for ACIS or Solid CAD/CAM Solid Machinist for Parasolid or Solid CAD/CAM or Solid Machinist Max Solid Machinist for Parasolid and Part Modeler or Solid CAD/CAM
STEP
*.stp
*.igs
360
361
You can: Use File Open to open a saved Inventor Assembly (*.iam) file into Edgecam.
Or use the 'launch Edgecam' option within Autodesk Inventor, with the assembly open. Using the 'launch Edgecam' option can transfer more information, such as threading data, work planes, sketch planes and co-ordinate system planes. Please note: This information on loading thread data. If the assembly is modified and saved, then Edgecam knows to reload the assembly. If a component part is reloaded into the assembly, then Edgecam knows to reload the new assembly once it has been saved. If a component part is modified,then Edgecam will NOT know to reload it until the assembly has been updated and saved. If parts are transformed in the (Inventor) assembly, Edgecam knows to reload the updated assembly itself. The assembly can be transformed in Edgecam. Separate parts cannot be moved individually in Edgecam. Associativity in Edgecam is OK if parts are transformed in the (Edgecam) assembly. Associativity in Edgecam is OK if an individual part is changed inside or outside of the assembly. Associativity in Edgecam is NOT OK if parts are removed or added to the assembly. See also: Notes on Loading Autodesk Inventor files.
362
363
Colour Support For SolidWorks 2006 SP1 and later, using the 'Launch Edgecam' loads colour data into Edgecam.
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
Saving Parts
If an Edgecam worksession contains a solid model, the Save command will write the model to the Edgecam part file (*.ppf). You can then reload this part file in a subsequent worksession. If a part file containing a solid model is loaded and the Solid Machinist licence is not available, the solid portion of the model will be ignored and will not be loaded or displayed.
371
Strategy Manager decisions can be based on the colour attribute of the feature(s). As the colour attributes for hole features will be passed from the CAD system to Edgecam, the colour of the solid cannot be modified in Edgecam, and stock/fixtures do not show the user defined colours when rendered. If preferred, the colour attributes can be suppressed using the Ignore Model Values option on the Solids tab of the Preferences (Options menu) dialog. Please note that Autodesk Inventor 4 and above and Pro/ENGINEER Wildfire pass the model colour (body colour of the entire solid, not just the hole feature) through to Edgecam. This can be suppressed by checking the Ignore Model Values option.
Colouring Solid Model Faces by Geometry Type The rendered view of a solid can be displayed with the faces coloured by geometry type as follows: Type Plane Cylinder Cone Sphere Torus Other* Colour white yellow aqua fuchsia lime red (white) (yellow) (green-blue) (purple) (green) (red)
*Includes NURBS, imported geometry, and any surface type not explicitly handled in a different way. This can be used as a diagnostic tool to obtain information about the different face types in a solid. Check the Render by Geometry Type option on the Solids tab of the Preferences (Options menu) dialog to enable this functionality.
372
Transforming Solids
You can use Edit menu Transform commands to transform (translate, rotate etc) solid geometry.
Note that many of these commands also appear in the Solids toolbar, as a combined menu and command button.
See Translating Entities (for example), for help on translating. Also see these notes on transforming solids with features.
373
Solids Preferences
Use Options menu Preferences Solids tab to make preferences settings relating to solids.
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
374
3. Pick the features you want to check by digitising them in the Graphics area, or clicking them in the Features window. Alternatively just finish the command to check all the features. You see feedback on the checking in the Feedback window, and any invalid sequences are marked in the Sequence window.
375
When filtering allows for an ambiguous selection (e.g. an edge and a line created from the edge) the cursor shape will change when the mouse is moved over the entities. In this case, you can use the tab key to determine which entity will be selected. The currently selectable entity type is indicated in the tooltip that is displayed beside the cursor. If the cursor is moved over an entity when Intellisnap is active, the selectable entity is also highlighted in the 'flyover' colour.
376
377
solid geometry. Setting comments for Strategy Manager When editing features you can type into the Comment box, then evaluate this comment in Strategy Manager to influence the machining. For example you could use the comment to specify that a hole feature needs to be finish reamed or bored. Feature Lists In the Properties Window: A Pocket feature can have a 'ToolList' entry, showing the tools assigned to the feature by Edgecam Tool Selector. A Hole feature can have a list of O-ring grooves under the 'ORingList' entry.
378
Here is the help on the Feature Finder dialog (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
379
Feature Types
This topic refers to features created in Edgecam Version 9 and later. Features created in earlier versions are 'superseded'. For notes on how these features differ, see About Superseded Features. A feature can be one of the several different types, as detailed below. Clicking the 'properties' links takes you to the help for the feature's editing dialog. As well as 'manually identifying' (see the links below), you can automatically find most types of feature using the Feature Finder. Feature Type Pocket Notes You can work on pockets using a number of cycles and operations. For example the Roughing and Profiling cycles. Can have lists of tools assigned by Edgecam Tool Selector. Manually identify using Mill Feature. Find automatically using Feature Finder. Open Pocket You can think of these as vertical wall type profiles (not closed), but with an added floor so that they define a volume. In some circumstances this gives an Open Pocket more flexibility over a (closed) Pocket, for example: The Roughing cycle can approach the pocket 'at depth', through the wall gap, rather than having to ramp down. The Open Pockets can be created from more areas in the solid (see the illustration below), so the need for using containment boundaries on a solid based toolpath (rather than feature based) is reduced. Note that (see these points illustrated...): The walls cannot have a draft angle, so there is no pocket at '2' in the illustration above. (You can however subsequently edit the feature's 'Draft Angle' property.) A floor can only be part of one open pocket, so '1' in the illustration above does not produce two separate pockets (there is no pocket). Open Pocket features can only be machined by the Profiling and Roughing cycles. Open Pockets cannot be nested. Find Open Pockets using Feature Finder, with the 'Open Pockets' option checked. Boss You can work on bosses using a number of cycles and Use Properties window Use Properties window and/or editing dialog Properties Use Properties window and/or editing dialog
380
operations. For example the Roughing and Profiling cycles. Manually identify using Mill Feature. Find automatically using Feature Finder. Profile A profile is typically a vertical sheet (has level and depth), that can be machined using the Profiling cycle. A profile has a 'material' side, and you can only machine along the opposite side to this (you can edit the Profile to reverse the material side). Manually identify using Mill Feature (only) Hole Can be machined by the Hole Cycle (not superseded version), Roughing and Profiling cycles. Can have complex wall shapes. Can be radial. Can be identified by the Type property of FT_HOLE2. Can have lists of O-ring grooves. Manually identify using Hole Feature. Use this method if you need more control over the feature creation. Can have 'custom properties' for use by strategies. Find automatically using Feature Finder. Face A face feature is a flat surface derived from a flat face of the solid. You can machine a face feature using the Parallel Lace cycle, or Five Axis Milling cycle, for example. Face Features are lost if their geometry in the solid is deleted (unlike other types of feature which can still exist as 'orphaned', if their geometry is deleted). Manually identify using Face Feature (only). Edge Loop These can be used as containment boundaries in cycles and operations (loops only), and in 4/5 Axis Simultaneous Milling as drive curves (for example). Edge Loop Features are useful if you want to maintain associativity with the solid model - when used as a containment boundary instead of a wireframe boundary for example. Unlike other types of feature, these can be '3D', so the edge loops you digitise need not lie in a flat horizontal plane (that is in the XY plane of the CPL). Manually identify using Edge Loop Feature (only). Turn Features These represent profiles you can use in Turning. There are several Turn feature sub-types, including 'Front Turn' and 'Back Turn'. These are created to be machineable by the various different tools and tool orientations. See illustrations... Find automatically using Feature Finder (Turn tab).
Use Properties window and/or editing dialog (same edit dialog as pockets/bosses)
This type only has 'style' type properties, such as the Layer and Colour.
Properties include 'Spindle' (useful for features copied to the sub-spindle - see details) and CPL. Use the Properties Window.
381
Manually identify using Turn Feature Note there is also a set of superseded Turn features (pre-Version 12.50). These are compatible in terms of their machining cycle support, but are more limited in functionality and properties.
382
383
The cycle will only process the surfaces you have grouped together, this will prevent full gouge protection of the solid body.
384
If the original design file is still open it is not possible to reload the model and a warning will be displayed.
385
Align Body for Turning to re-align and position a solid body for turning.
(Note that you can also opt for the part to be automatically aligned on opening - check Options menu Preferences Solids tab Auto align for turn. You need the ZX environment set as the default, as determined by the specified defaults file.) The command prompts you to digitise faces to be used for the re-orientation. Each digitise immediately results in the re-orientation, so you can work interactively. Perform a finish (right-click for example) to move on to the next prompt. Before the finish you can digitise again to change your selection. Before the finish you can digitise the same face or edge to rotate the body (see below). You can perform the finish without digitising if you want to skip a stage. The prompts are: 1. Select face to define axis of rotation. Click on a cylindrical face to be aligned with, and centred round, the Z axis. Click the face again if you want to then invert the body (rotates 180 around the X Axis). 2. Select face to define origin plane. Click on the face that you want to be placed at the origin (centre of face placed at Z & X = 0). 3. Select face to define C orientation. Click on a face that you want to be normal to the X axis, rotating the part round Z. This will typically be a flat in a cylindrical face. Each subsequent click further rotates the body 90 round Z. As an alternative to a flat face, you can click one of the faces of a radial hole.
386
Use Solids menu Align Body for Milling to rotate a solid body to a more convenient orientation relative to the current CPL, and optionally move the body to a more convenient position within the CPL. The command prompts you to digitise a face, edge and point, to be used for the re-orientation. Each digitise immediately results in the re-orientation, so you can work interactively. Perform a finish (right-click for example) to move on to the next prompt. Before the finish you can digitise again to change your selection. Before the finish you can digitise the same face or edge to rotate the body (see below). You can perform the finish without digitising if you want to skip a stage. The prompts are: 1. Select Face to Define XY plane. Click on a face to provide a vector to be aligned with the CPL's Z Axis (face normal vector for planar faces, face axis for cylindrical, conical or toroidal faces). Click the face again if you want to then invert the body (rotates 180 around the Y Axis). 2. Select linear edge to define CPL plane Axis. Click on the edge that you want to be parallel with the CPL's X Axis. Click the edge again if you want to rotate the body 90 around the CPL's Z Axis. 3. Select point to translate to origin. Click on the point you want to move to the CPL's origin. Alternatively you can position the centre of the solid at the origin ('centre' meaning the centre point of a bounding box round the solid). To do this hold down the Ctrl key and digitise the whole solid body, or any of its faces. Before finishing you can optionally adjust the height of the solid by pressing the Z key, clicking OK in the coordinate dialog, then digitising a point to be placed at Z=0.
387
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
388
Feature Capping
The Feature Caps option on the Feature Finder (Solids menu) dialog allows you to cover pocket or hole features in solid models with STL caps that can be used to exclude the hole or pocket feature from any surface machining cycle. To do this, the cap must be included in the cycle. If the Feature Caps option is checked when using the Feature Finder command on a solid with Find Pockets and/or Find Holes checked all pocket and/or hole features will be capped. The following rules apply: If Group Similar Holes is checked, then the caps will also be grouped. The caps are generated from the parent feature and are associative with the solid. Caps have their own definable layer, colour and name. Caps are represented as Edgecam STL entities and capped features are treated as STL models for surface machining instructions. If you explode a capped feature, the cap will be kept as a separate STL entity. Please note that exploding caps will break associativity. When the features are displayed rendered, the cap will be displayed rendered, otherwise it will be displayed as points around the cap boundary. Capping complex non-planar shapes (e.g. a hole breaking through a fillet) may produce caps that are not smooth.
389
390
Note that when digitising loops or combinations of edges, the feature will have a height set to the highest point on the loop or edges. See also Digitise Vertex for Depth in Profile Features.
391
Here is the help for the Edge Loop Feature dialog (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
392
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
393
Here are details on the Hole Feature dialog's settings (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
394
Here are details on the Turn Feature dialog's settings (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
395
396
397
This is useful if you intend using the Prismatic Geometry option of the Profiling cycle, as it shows the faces (red) which cannot be output in the toolpath as prismatic geometry. For full details click the Help button in the Preferences dialog. Render by Slope This uses colours to indicate the amount of slope of a face. This is useful for example when deciding whether near-vertical faces will need undercutting. Blue faces will need undercutting.
This is also useful when using the Flat Land Finishing cycle, which can only cut the flat areas. These are shown in white (appear as grey in the illustrations above due to the lighting direction). For full details click the Help button in the Preference dialog.
398
399
400
PCI Customisation
PCI is a parametric macro language that works directly on the Edgecam database. Its main features are: Save command sequences as ASCII text files. These can replayed to recreate the same or similar sequences of events. Edit the PCI file to add functionality. Any Edgecam command may be called, with both predefined modifier values and digitised information for that command. Program flow, user input/output, entity selection, string manipulation and calculations are aided by a set of high level directives. Automatically generates comments during the command save. Further comments can be added at any time. Create, call, and delete user-defined variables. Interactively define and use variables and user input dialogs with the command save facility. Complete family of parts macros can be developed without further editing. Program flow control based on conditional tests can be added by editing the PCI macro in any text editor. PCI files can only be created and executed from within the Design and Manufacture modes. This includes the ability to initialise the Code Generator and Tool Library and then return to the Manufacture mode to continue a sequence. PCI Variables can be displayed in the PCI Variables Window. From this window you can edit/delete/view the PCI Variables. PCI files usually work correctly on non-English language versions of Edgecam. To start finding out about PCIs, see PCI - Command Macros.
401
PDI Customisation
PDIs are executable programs written to extend the functionality of Edgecam. A PDI is a library of commands used to perform a particular task. By running a PDI you could, for example, draw a bolt head in one operation. To run a PDI: 1. Click the Custom menu then click Run Executable. 2. In the PDI dialog that appears click the Name box and from the drop down list select the PDI. Note that this runs a PDI in the folder 'installation folder\cam\pdi\cat-run'. PDIs that you use in this way are called 'category run PDIs'. (PDIs are also used to provide some of the standard menu commands of Edgecam, such as Rectangle. These are in the folder installation folder\cam\pdi\menu-run directory.)
Note for Advanced Users - You can produce your own PDIs with the PDI Toolkit. You must also learn about the internal workings of Edgecam.
402
PCIs that initialise sequences select the discipline by position in the available list. Depending on your licence configuration, this list can change. To avoid problems in this area, set the displine in the PCI to any|0 and allow the specified Code Generator to dictate the discipline.
403
404
As you create the sequence and ultimately your PCI a further set of questions arise. The earlier in the project these are answered the more efficient the PCI creation process will be. 1. What is the optimum sequence of instructions to be included? 2. Which machining parameters can be safely left as fixed values and which will need to be set up as runtime variables? 3. Which instructions need to present full dialog interfaces at run-time? 4. Do any of the user prompts need clarification or expansion.
A PCI created in an inch environment will run in metric and vice versa but no attempt will be made to convert any values entered. Particular care must be taken in respect of feeds, speeds and cut increments/offsets if this circumstance is likely to arise. See Also Usual Sequence of Events when Creating a PCI
405
Sequence of Events
The following provides a guide to the usual sequence of events when creating a PCI. 1. Decide the purpose and outline requirements of the PCI. 2. Create an Edgecam sequence that performs the desired functions. 3. Decide which cycles will present full dialogs and where run-time variables should replace fixed values. 4. Where necessary, edit the sequence to place variables in the cycles. 5. Make sure that the sequence contains no unnecessary commands. 6. Ensure that the sequence contains adequate comments. 7. Create the PCI. 8. Test the PCI, first on identical geometry and then on variants of the geometry to ensure that it runs correctly and that prompts etc are adequate. 9. If necessary, edit the PCI (see Finishing the PCI). 10. If the PCI is intended for general use, always get another user to carry out tests, in addition to your own, before releasing it for production use.
406
To generate a PCI using the menu command 1. Select the PCI Template (Custom menu) command. You will be prompted for the PCI file name that you want to create. 2. Enter a name for the .pci file. You will be presented with a list of the instructions in the current sequence. 3. Pick the instructions to be included by selecting the individual instructions with a left-hand mouse click. Tip - Selecting Instructions 4. If required, use the Comments field to display a header/basic description before the initial user request at run-time. This allows you to explain the purpose of the PCI and to tell the user which geometry elements to select.
To generate a PCI using instructions in the Sequence Window 1. Select the instructions you want to include in the PCI. 2. With a right-hand mouse click, open the shortcut menu and select the PCI Template option. You will be prompted for the PCI file name that you want to create.
It is not recommended that PCI templates are saved to the \cam\operates folder because the operation PCIs are stored in it. We suggest you save your PCI templates to the \cam\pci folder in your Edgecam installation.
407
408
Selecting Geometry
When the PCI is created any geometry used by more than one cycle will be identified and at run-time the user will be given a single prompt to select it at the start of the PCI. If you want to give users of the PCI additional instructions for selecting geometry they can easily be added to the basic PCI. You can either add these instructions at the time of PCI creation by using the Add Comment (MFunctions menu) command (see Adding Comments and Prompts) or at a later stage in an editor (see Finishing the PCI).
409
Run-Time Variables
To give users of the PCI flexibility you may want to use variables in certain dialog fields instead of fixed values. Where only one or two fields are variable this may be preferable to displaying the whole dialog. Any numeric entry field can be filled with a user-defined variable. Simply enter the variable name in the appropriate field, enclosed in square brackets [ ]. For example you may wish to give the user the ability to specify the cut increment for a profile cycle Use [Finish-Profile-Cut-Increment]. When you use a variable in this way you will be prompted to enter a value. This value will become the default value in the PCI variable input dialog, which is displayed for data input at run-time. All the variables in a PCI are collected together in a single dialog at the beginning. Each PCI variable must be unique within an individual PCI and for the purposes of automatically created PCIs the names should be self-explanatory in meaning. Note that if a cycle is to present a full input dialog at run-time there is no point in placing named variables in the input fields.
410
Comments beginning with a ? will be converted to user prompts (using the PCI %DISPLAY directive) and will not appear in the sequence or NC file created when the PCI is used. Alternatively, additional PCI prompts and instructions can be added afterwards using an editor. See Finishing the PCI.
411
You may find the following directives especially useful: To add additional instructions or information for the user To add more variables or to subdivide the automatically generated form To change the prompt shown to the user when digitising geometry
Run-time environment Your PCI template will contain a check to ensure that it is run in the correct machining environment, therefore a lathe PCI cannot be run in mill mode. If you want to use, for example, a mill PCI on CY lathe parts it is necessary to modify the %IF [&3AXMILLL] = 0 statement in the PCI. See PCI System Variables. Please note that PCI templates have not been designed for use in the wire environment. If used, severe limitations will be encountered.
412
413
Remember that * comments are for the PCI writers benefit only. Users of the PCI will not see them as the PCI runs. Note that the auto-generation process places a number of comments in the PCI file anyway to make it easier to understand: Example * Setting modifier 'Gauge Point' %SetModifier=[cmd0],214,Orthogonal|3
414
415
416
PCI Syntax
PCI Directives and variables are not case-sensitive and can be identified by their prefix. Here is a list of prefixes and other syntax used within the PCI system: PCI directive prefix, for example %ASKBOX String variable prefix, for example $array Digitised position variable prefix, holding the X co-ordinate Digitised position variable prefix, holding the Y co-ordinate Digitised position variable prefix, holding the Z co-ordinate System variable prefix, for example &PLUNGEFEED Read-only variable prefix, for example #FREEDIG Comment line, not processed by the PCI system, for example * This is a comment line [] () Use the contents of these brackets, for example %IF[ANG]=>[EANG]%GOTO=endloop Perform an operation in these brackets first, as in standard mathematical notation
% $ X@ Y@ Z@ & #
417
418
2. Pressing the Ctrl and '=' keys displays the current value for the variable:
419
String
String variables contain alphanumeric text and must be preceded by an $ to identify them. Typically these would be used for text creation, filenames or user identification in an Edgecam command. String variables may be up to 80 characters in length. These are preceded by an @ and refer to a digitised position. These positions are 3D and therefore have an X, Y and Z component. The X, Y and Z components of the digitised variable @ORIGIN can be referred to as X@ORIGIN, Y@ORIGIN and Z@ORIGIN respectively. These have no prefix and can contain any floating point or integer value. These are set up by Edgecam and are prefixed by &. A typical example would be &NEXTENT, which defines the next available entity number in the database. A full definition of all system variables is included in the reference section of this specification. These are preceded by a # character and can only be written-to once. They always have a numeric value. All subsequent writes using different values generate an error. These are typically used to add clarity to a macro and are used to identify so called magic numbers. For instance, the number that indicates a user has selected a free digitise position is defined as #FREEDIG. This and a number of other read only variables are created by the system when initialising a command save or executing a PCI macro.
Digitised
Numeric System
Read only
420
Numeric value 0
Behaviour Same as if variable not set, normal behaviour of command. The break option will always keep the start of the broken entity as the original entity number. Normal behaviour of the trim command except for the break option which will try to keep as the original entity the broken section nearest the second intersection point (or the first digitised point if only one intersection). Note this is close but not exactly the same as the old command's behaviour. Use the command as shipped prior to Edgecam version 5.50.0 which is limited to the current CPL and lines/arcs.
421
PCI Comments
Comments are lines prefixed by an *, that are not processed when the PCI is run, and are typically used to document various parts of a PCI program. Full inline comments can be automatically generated or user specific comments specified at any time during the command save process. Comments can also be added by manually editing the resultant PCI macro file.
422
Using Commands
This sample of ptams.cmd, the command file that describes the menu structure of Edgecams Design mode, is shown here to illustrate the meaning of various terms, including verb, noun, and modifier:
*VERB SWITCH package helpnum dongle * NOUN SWITCH package helpnum dongle * Modifier switch type menu options exclusive control help prot * * * ******************* Executive function *************************** * * curves * ****************************************************************** #Curves 4 0 0 315 47 Alter 1 0 0 316 47 Bezier^Bzier 63 0 0 317 47 Tolerance 56 5 0 0 0 0 0 318 47 Colour 1 10240 0 0 0 0 0 341 47 Layer 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 342 47 Style 2 10240 0 0 27 0 0 343 47 Name 242 8352 0 0 0 0 0 1322 47
Each Edgecam command may have modifier and digitised information associated with it and PCI directives are available to set up both sets of information prior to command execution. Two PCI directives are required to execute an Edgecam command: one to initialise it and a second to execute it following the setting up of modifier and digitised information.
423
Using Modifiers
Each Edgecam command can have a number of modifiers each with its own identifying number between 1 and 255. When a modifier value is set, its modifier number and its requested value must be specified. Many Edgecam modifiers offer a drop down list for selection, but the selected option always translates to a numeric value inside Edgecam. Because of this, PCI needs that number when setting the value for a drop-down list type modifier. One example is colour, where Blue is referenced as Blue|2 in the command save file. The associated number relates to the colours position on the drop down list, so Green=1, Blue=2, Cyan=3 and so on, from 1 to 32. In a similar way, the line style font number is based on its position on the list, except that the list goes from 0 to 3, so Solid=0, Dotted=1, Dashed=2, and Chained=3. Note that the text before the | is unnecessary. If the command save facility is used to generate the PCI macro, this information is generated automatically. The %TOOLBARMODS directive can also be used to access the current toolbar settings for colour, style and layer information.
424
425
426
427
Writing Programs
A command sequence save usually provides the best template for a PCI, because it supplies all of the relevant information to recreate the geometry and other information. User variables can be added during a command save or added later along with flow control directives where appropriate to add parametric capability.
428
Editing Programs
PCI files can be constructed in many ways, for example, by cutting and pasting existing PCIs into a single file, or by adding flow control and interactive calls to a command sequence save. Comments can be used to mark a specific area of a file, or typically to indicate when another PCI has been called from within the command save.
429
Debugging Programs
Edgecam contains a useful feature, the %DEBUG directive, that allows you to step through the PCI file and view the contents (including the name and value of variables). The %DEBUG directive toggles debugging on or off. You can direct the output to screen or disk.
430
431
432
433
434
435
Press the Browse... button to display the standard File Open dialog, and select a PCI file to execute. Click OK to run the selected PCI. You can abort a PCI at any time by pressing the Abort button or the F8 key.
436
Defining Variables
The definition of new or existing variables can be accessed by right clicking in the PCI Variables window and selecting New from the shortcut menu. This will open the Define Variable dialog box:
String Value The string to be assigned to the variable (if the variable name indicates a string variable that is, the variable name is preceded by $) Numeric Value The numeric value to be assigned to the variable (if the variable name indicates a numeric variable). The user may also select the <digitise> option in which case a digitise type variable is created. Prompt string The optional prompt string to be displayed by the PCI macro when replayed to prompt for user input. If a prompt string is specified, the PCI macro contains a %ASK directive which prompts for input of a new value for the specified variable each time the macro is executed. If no prompt string is defined, the macro contains a %CALC directive and the input value is used for all subsequent executions of the macro. Variable Name The variable name to be assigned. A new name can be entered or an existing one can be selected from the drop down list, and its value and/or prompt changed if required.
437
Complete Check this box to confirm that the Askbox definition is complete. Until this box is checked, the above dialog is repeatedly displayed after each click of the OK button to allow definition of multiple Askbox entries. Prompt String The prompt string for the variable displayed in the resultant Askbox dialog. Variable Name The name of the variable to be assigned when using this Askbox. String and numeric variable are supported by the Define Askbox command. Digitise type variables must be defined using the Define Variable command. To open the Define Variable dialog, right click in the PCI Variables Window and select New from the shortcut menu.
438
The wndow works on a tree- view principle, so clicking on a plus sign expands the view to display all variables within that category, while clicking on a minus sign collapses that part of the structure.
Once a category has been expanded, the variables and their values are displayed:
439
See Also About Arrays Example of a One Dimensional Array Mixing String and Numeric Variables Evaluating Variables in an Array Example of a Two Dimensional Array
440
About Arrays
Within computing, an array of data can be thought of as the equivalent of a table of numbers (or text strings). A single dimension array is like a row of items across a page: Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
A two dimension array represents a table of rows and columns: Week Monday Tuesday Wednesday 1 1 2 3 2 8 9 10 3 15 16 17 4 22 23 24 5 29 30 1
Sometimes groups of data are more easily stored as arrays, since the data can be referenced using index numbers representing the row and column position of the data. You can use this method to store data within PCIs by allowing the use of one or more indices in a variable name. Variables as indices, enclosed in [ ], will be evaluated. For example, in a one dimensional array, myarray(1) indicates element 1 in myarray
In a two dimensional array, calendar(3,5) indicates the element in row 3, column 5 of table calendar.
You can place data in an array by structuring the variable name. For example, %CALC=stock(1,5)=30 places value 30 in variable stock(1,5), and %MessageBox=Value is [stock(1,5)] makes use of that same data.
441
See Also Example of a One Dimensional Array Mixing String and Numeric Variables Evaluating Variables in an Array Example of a Two Dimensional Array
442
* Initialise TestArray() with 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 %CALC=Index=0 %LABEL=Initialise %CALC=Index=[Index]+1 %CALC=TestArray([Index])=[Index] %IF [Index] < 10 %GOTO=Initialise %CALC=$Title=Initialised %GOSUB=DisplayArray * Now Reverse the array %CALC=Forward=1 %CALC=Reverse=10 %LABEL=RevLoop * Swap array elements %CALC=Temp=[TestArray([Reverse])] %CALC=TestArray([Reverse])=[TestArray([Forward])] %CALC=TestArray([Forward])=[Temp] * Loop for half the array %CALC=Forward=[Forward]+1 %CALC=Reverse=[Reverse]-1 %IF [Reverse] > 5 %GOTO=RevLoop %CALC=$Title=Reversed %GOSUB=DisplayArray %END * Display contents of array %LABEL=DisplayArray %CALC=$ArrayContent=
443
%CALC=ArrayIndex=0 %LABEL=DispArrayLoop %CALC=ArrayIndex=[ArrayIndex]+1 %CALC=$ArrayContent=[$ArrayContent] [TestArray([ArrayIndex])] %IF [ArrayIndex] < 10 %GOTO=DispArrayLoop %MessageBox=[$Title] TestArray(1 - 10) [$ArrayContent] %RETURN
444
445
446
* Initialise array Points() with profile vertices (Z,X) %CALC=Points(1,Z)=0.0 %CALC=Points(1,X)=0.0 %CALC=Points(2,Z)=0.0 %CALC=Points(2,X)=20.0 %CALC=Points(3,Z)=-20.0 %CALC=Points(3,X)=20.0 %CALC=Points(4,Z)=-20.0 %CALC=Points(4,X)=60.0 %CALC=Points(5,Z)=-30.0 %CALC=Points(5,X)=60.0 %CALC=Points(6,Z)=-30.0 %CALC=Points(6,X)=40.0 %CALC=Points(7,Z)=-40.0 %CALC=Points(7,X)=40.0 %CALC=Points(8,Z)=-40.0 %CALC=Points(8,X)=60.0 %CALC=Points(9,Z)=-50.0 %CALC=Points(9,X)=60.0 * Initialise digitise buffer for Create Line command %InitDigInfo=gdhPoints %CALC=Index=0 %LABEL=InitialisePoints %CALC=Index=[Index]+1 %AddFreeDig=[gdhPoints],Z[Points([Index],Z)]X[Points([Index],X)] %IF [Index] < 9 %GOTO=InitialisePoints
447
%AddFinishDig=[gdhPoints],[#FINISH] * Switch into turning %InitCommand=cmd1=16,31 %SetModifier=[cmd1],100,ZX|2 %ExecCommand=cmdret=[cmd1],-1 * Create profile %InitCommand=cmd1=2,1 %ClearMods=[cmd1] %SetModifier=[cmd1],155,<Yes> %ExecCommand=cmdret=[cmd1],[gdhPoints] %FreeDigInfo=[gdhPoints] %End
448
Building an Operation
These directives allow a PCI to build an Edgecam dialog using a combination of modifiers from previously initialised commands and user defined variables. This means that you can specify all information required for a single operation within a single dialog. This dialog will optionally have a number of tabs allowing more complex operations to present information clearly (the button method for addressing other pages on an Edgecam dialog is not available for PCI operations). To build a PCI operation Step 1 - Initialise the Operation Step 2 - Initialise the Edgecam Commands to be used in the Operation Step 3 - Clear All Previous Modifier Values Step 4 - Set Any Default Modifier Values Step 5 - Build a Dialog for User Input Step 6 - Add Any User Defined Modifiers to the Dialog Step 7 - Set Up Mutual Inclusion Relationships Between Modifiers Step 8 - Prompt for Selection of PCI Operation Modifiers Step 9 - Select Entities Used in the Operation Step 10 - Execute Each Edgecam Command Step 11 - Free the PCI Operation reference
449
%INITOPERATION=OperationId=Rough Face Mill,EdgeOp.hlp,10021 OperationId is the PCI variable used to identify the operation. Rough Face Mill is the textual name of the operation. This string is also used as the title of the operation dialog when displayed to the user and for the name of the operation displayed in the Edgecam operations list. EdgeOp.hlp is the name of the help file to be used to display context sensitive help. This will be located in the language directory in the normal way. 10021 is the help context ID for this command. The help file name and the context ID are optional parameters.
450
Each step corresponds to an Edgecam machining command. The PCI initialises each Edgecam command to be used. %InitCommand=cmdMillTool=36,108 %InitCommand=cmdRapidMove=101,1 %InitCommand=cmdFaceMill=102,4 %InitCommand=cmdHome=101,40 An additional parameter will be added to the %InitCommand directive to disable the validation of a command based on the currently selected tool.
451
452
%SETMODIFIER=[cmdMillTool],100,EndMill|0 %SETMODIFIER=[cmdFaceMill],28,[ZCLEAR] A number identifies each modifier. Tooltype is modifier 100, Z Clear is modifier 28. Full details of all modifiers are defined in edgekrnl.txt.
453
%ADDCMDMODTOOPERATION=[OperationID],[cmdMillTool],47 %ADDCMDMODTOOPERATION=[OperationID],[cmdMillTool],116 %ADDCMDMODTOOPERATION=[OperationID],[cmdMillTool],48 %ADDCMDMODTOOPERATION=[OperationID],[cmdFaceMill],5, Cutting Data^Feedrates %ADDCMDMODTOOPERATION=[OperationID],[cmdFaceMill],6, Cutting Data^Feedrates %ADDCMDMODTOOPERATION=[OperationID],[cmdFaceMill],7, Cutting Data Again, a number defines each modifier. 47 = Diameter, 116 = Units, 48 = Position, 5 = Planar Feed, 6 = Plunge Feed and 7 = Spindle Speed. An additional parameter allows you to specify mutual exclusivity of operation modifiers. This is a bit-oriented value and is applied as follows:
%ADDCMDMODTOOPERATION=[OperationID],[cmdMillTool],48,,1 %ADDCMDMODTOOPERATION=[OperationID],[cmdFaceMill],5, Cutting Data,1 Each modifier with the same bit field set is considered to be mutually exclusive. You can set up mutual exclusivity between several modifiers by assigning multiple fields of the bit-oriented value. In the above example, modifier 48 is mutually exclusive with modifier 5. If one of the modifiers contains a value, the other modifier is greyed out and unavailable. Edgecam commands have their own mechanism for defining mutual exclusivity. If the optional exclusivity field is used in any Edgecam operation, the normal Edgecam mechanism is disabled. The usual application of this exclusivity field would be to have a user defined modifier control the availability of a command modifier.
454
%ADDUSERMODTOOPERATION=[OperationID],_checkTailstock, Use Tailstock,Misc^Machine In this case the user modifier will prompt for Use Tailstock on the Misc. tab of the dialog and set up the PCI Variable _checkTailstock. As the variable name is prefixed with _check a check box will be displayed and the value of _checkTailstock will be set as 0 or 1 depending on if the box has been checked. The prefix of the user modifier name controls the modifier type. In the above example, _check is used to specify a check box type modifier. Click here to see a full list of modifier types.
455
%ADDVALIDSTATE=[HoleOp],_listStrategy,1,[DrillCmd], [PitchMod],1 This would set up a relationship between the strategy user modifier and the Pitch command modifier, such that the Pitch is only valid if Strategy has a value of 1.
%ADDVALIDSTATE=[HoleOp],_listStrategy,0,_realDepth,0 This would set up a relationship between the Strategy user modifier and the Depth user modifier, such that the Depth is invalid if Strategy has a value of 0.
456
%DOOPERATIONMODS=cmdRet=[OperationId] If the user completes the dialog and selects OK, cmdRet is assigned the value #FINISH. If the user selects Cancel #ESCAPE is assigned. A standard Edgecam dialog is displayed, containing each modifier as specified by the %ADDCMDMODTOOPERATION and %ADDUSERMODTOOPERATION directives.
457
458
459
%FREEOPERATION=OperationId
460
%ADDALLVISDIGINFO
Description Adds all visible entities to a previously initialised digitised information buffer. The valid entity type is controlled by a string which states which of the 255 Edgecam entity types are allowed to be digitises. For example -255 states that all entity types are valid whereas the string 1;2;4 indicates only Lines, Arcs and Points are valid. For a full list of entity types, see Edgecam Entity Types. Format %AddAllVisDigInfo=NumDig=handle,visible
Example %AddAllVisDigInfo=NumDig=gdh1,1 (Select all visible line entities) %AddAllVisDigInfo=NumDig=gdh1,1;2 (Select all visible line and arc entities) %AddAllVisDigInfo=NumDig=gdh1,0-255 (Select all visible entities)
461
%ADDCALLBACKREF
Description: Will take a value specified in the ToolStore and place its value in the modifier. Example: %AddCallBackReference=[OpId],tsFinish,[#IndexMillDepth],_realProfileDepth This command is intended for use with ToolStore toolchanges and will usually be used together with %SETCALLBACK. Click here to see an example.
462
%ADDCMDMODTOOPERATION
Description: Each time a machining Operation is executed, the user will be prompted to supply values for Tool Diameter, Tool Position, Spindle Speed and Feedrate. The PCI creates a dialog containing these modifiers and allows other modifiers to be added. Feed and Speed are placed on a separate tab, labelled Cutting Data. The tooling parameters are placed on the primary page. By default this is labelled General. Also, the separator can be specified by appending ^Separator_name to the tab name. An additional parameter is available to specify the mutual exclusivity of operation modifiers. Format: %AddCmdModToOperation=[OperationID],[cmdname],modifier %AddCmdModToOperation=[OperationID],[cmdname],modifier,tab_name^separator_name %AddCmdModToOperation=[OperationID],[cmdname],modifier,tab_name^separator_name,exclusivity Example: %AddCmdModToOperation=[OperationID],[cmdMillTool],47 %AddCmdModToOperation=[OperationID],[cmdMillTool],116 %AddCmdModToOperation=[OperationID],[cmdMillTool],48 %AddCmdModToOperation=[OperationID],[cmdFaceMill],5,Cutting Data^Feedrates %AddCmdModToOperation=[OperationID],[cmdFaceMill],6,Cutting Data^Feedrates %AddCmdModToOperation=[OperationID],[cmdFaceMill],7,Cutting Data Again, each modifier is defined by its number. 47 is Diameter, 116 is Units, 48 is Position, 5 is Planar Feed, 6 is Plunge Feed and 7 refers to Spindle Speed. The mutual exclusivity parameter is a bit-oriented value and is applied as follows: %AddCmdModToOperation=[OperationID],[cmdMillTool],48,,1 %AddCmdModToOperation=[OperationID],[cmdFaceMill],5,Cutting Data,1 Each modifier with the same bit field set is considered to be mutually exclusive. Mutual exclusivity between several modifiers can be set up by assigning multiple fields of the bit-oriented value. In the example above, modifier 48 is deemed to be mutually exclusive with modifier 5. If one of the modifiers contains a value the other modifier is greyed out and unavailable. Edgecam commands have their own mechanism for defining mutual exclusivity. If the optional exclusivity field is used in any Edgecam operation, the normal Edgecam mechanism is disabled. The usual application of this exclusivity field would be to have a user defined modifier control the availability of a command modifier.
463
Note that the command may span multiple lines with comment lines, but blank lines are not permitted. A number of record types can be used to complete the definition of the digitise and these are detailed below. The first number always refers to the record type. The information following is dependent on record type. The number of records following the directive is dependent on the type of digitise being asked for. Read only variables are defined for each record type and PCI command save shows references to these read only variables rather than the record numbers itself. The attribute value used in some record type specifies if the 3D snap was selected on or off (0 or 1). For Entity Digitises it also indicates if the entity was selected using the CHAIN submodifier and becomes a bitwise value (bit 2 is set if the CHAIN submodifier was selected on). #DIG_ENTNO_DIG, Entity number, attributes, direction #DIG_ENTNAME_DIG,Entity name,attributes,direction #DIG_COORDSTR,3D Snap ,Coord input string #DIG_LOCATION, 3D Snap, X location, Ylocation, Zlocation #DIG_WORLD, X location, Ylocation , Zlocation #DIG_VIEW, X location, Ylocation #DIG_SCREEN: X location, Ylocation #DIG_UVSURF: U parameter, V parameter #DIG_PORTNUMBER, port number #DIG_ELEMENT, element number, element direction #DIG_CONSTRUCT_REF, digitise type, number of component digitises #DIG_COMPONENT_INFO, Attributes, type, number of records in component digitise Extensive use is made of read only variables to improve clarity. For details see PCI Read-Only Variables.
464
%ADDENTNAMEDIG
Description: Adds an entity name digitise to a previously initialised digitise information buffer. This directive requires the following information about the entity, its entity name, 2D snap status (0=2D, 1=3D), and direction (0=forward and 1=reverse) Format: %ADDENTNAMEDIG=handle,entity name,2D snap status,direction. Example: %ADDENTNAMEDIG=[gdh1],fred,0,0 This directive adds an entity digitise on the entity named fred to the digitise buffer referenced by the handle [gdh1]. with 2D snap on, and in the forward direction i.e. from the start of the entity
465
%ADDENTNODIG
Description: Adds an entity number digitise to a previously initialised digitise information buffer. This directive requires the following information about the entity, its entity number, 2D snap status (0=2D, 1=3D), and direction (0=forward and 1=reverse) Format: %ADDENTNODIG=handle,entity number,3D snap status,direction Example: %ADDENTNODIG=[gdh1],[&BASEENT] + 20,0,0
466
%ADDFINISHDIG
Description: Adds a FINISH, REDO or ABORT to a previously initialised digitise information buffer. These values are defined by [#FINISH], [#REDO] and [#ABORT] respectively. Any sequence of digitised values requires this to terminate the command. If an %ADDFINISHDIG is not added, Edgecam reverts to interactive input when all digitised information has been processed. Format: %ADDFINISHDIG=handle,value Example: %ADDFINISHDIG=[gdh1],[#FINISH] This example will add a FINISH to the buffer referenced by the variable [gdh1].
467
%ADDFREEDIG
Description: Adds a free digitise position to a previously initialised digitised information buffer. The co-ordinate string is as would be typed in to the Co-ordinate input dialog and may include incremental and polar values as well as absolute X, Y and Z axis values. Format: %ADDFREEDIG=handle,co-ordinate string Example: %ADDFREEDIG=[gdh1],X[X@POSITION]Y[Y@POSITION] This example would add a free digitise at the X,Y location referenced by the variable [POSITION] to the buffer referenced by the variable [gdh1].
468
%ADDMESSAGESTRING
Description: This PCI directive adds a string on a new line after all the lines already stored in the message string using %MESSAGEBOX. Format: %AddMessageString=MessageHandle=String to add MessageHandle: Handle number returned by %INITMESSAGESTRING String to add: Text to be added on its own line Example: Initialise message string, add three lines of text, display message string and free it. %InitMessageString=strMessage %AddMessageString=[strMessage]=First line of text %AddMessageString=[strMessage]=Second line of text %AddMessageString=[strMessage]=Third line of text %MessageBox=nRet=[#MB_ICONWARNING],[strMessage] %FreeMessageString=[strMessage] See Also: %FreeMessageString, %InitMessageString, %MessageBox
469
%ADDUSERMODTOOPERATION
Description: In some cases it is advantageous to add some additional user-defined modifiers to the dialog. These may be used to control ancillary functions such as the tailstock which may need to be moved during the operation. This is done using the %ADDUSERMODTOOPERATION directive. Format: %AddUserModToOperation=[OperationID],prefixvariable,prompt,tabname^name Example: %AddUserModToOperation=[OperationID],_checkTailstock,Use Tailstock,Misc^Machine In this case, the user modifier will prompt for Use Tailstock on the Misc. tab of the dialog and set up the PCI Variable _checkTailstock. As the variable name is prefixed with _check, a check box will be displayed and the value of _checkTailstock will be set as 1 if the box has been checked and 0 is the box is empty. The prefix of the user modifier name controls the modifier type. In the above example, _check is used to specify a check box type modifier. Click here to view a full list of types.
470
%ADDVALIDSTATE
Description: Gives the user modifiers the ability to control the availability of other modifiers, based on the current state of the user modifier. In the case of a hole operation, different finishing strategies are offered, such as Tap and Bore, with a user modifier being used for Strategy. In the case where Bore is selected as the strategy, the Pitch modifier for Tap should be greyed out, and is only enabled if the strategy is changed to Tap. Two flavours of the directive are required, one to set the valid states for a command modifiers, and one for a user modifier. Format: %ADDVALIDSTATE=[OperationID],UserVariable,Value,[CommandId],[ModifierId],[State] %ADDVALIDSTATE=[OperationID],UserVariable,Value,UserVariable,[State] Example: %ADDVALIDSTATE=[HoleOp],_listStrategy,1,[DrillCmd],[PitchMod],1 This would set up a relationship between the strategy user modifier and the Pitch command modifier, such that the Pitch is only valid if Strategy has a value of 1. %ADDVALIDSTATE=[HoleOp],_listStrategy,0,_realDepth,0 This would set up a relationship between the Strategy user modifier and the Depth user modifier, such that the Depth is invalid if Strategy has a value of 0.
471
%ALIAS=VAR1=VAR2
Description: Gives you the ability to use the name var1 instead of var2. Example: %ALIAS=FEED=XYFEED
472
%ANG
Description: The angle between two points, specified by the X and Y signed increments from the first to the second point. The value of this angle is returned under a specified variable. %ANG returns values in the range 0 to 360. Format: %ANG=variable=[XINC],[YINC] Example: %ANG=ANGLE=[XINC],[YINC] %ANG=ANG=10,10 Given two points, P1 at X0 Y0 and P2 at X10 Y10, the angle in the direction of P1 to P2 gives an X increment of 10 and a Y increment of 10. With these values %ANG would return an angle of 45. The angle from P2 to P1 would give increments of -10 and an angle of 225.
473
%ASK
Description: This displays a prompt to ask the user to enter a value for a numeric or string variable. The prompt string can comprise a maximum of 45 characters (you can use spaces). Format: %ASK=prompt=variable Examples: %ASK=Please enter billet length:=BLEN %ASK=ARC RADIUS:=RAD %ASK=ENTER TEXT STRING:=$STRING When this first line is run, the prompt is displayed Please enter billet length If the variable has already been assigned a value, this is displayed as the default.
474
%ASKBOX
Description: This command is similar to %ASK, but is used for multiple input. If any of the variables have been defined before the %ASKBOX command, these values are used as the default values. Format: %ASKBOX=prompt1=variable1=prompt2=variable2... Example: %ASKBOX=BlockLength=LEN=BlockHeight=HGT This displays a dialog prompting for values for the variables:
An Askbox can be generated during a Command save using the Define Askbox command. %ASKBOX can also be used in a similar way to %OPTION, in that it can be made to display a list of options. For example: %ASKBOX=LIST^LIST1^LIST2^LIST3=LIST results in this dialog:
You can be more explicit in the type of variable you want to assign. Prefix the variable name with one of these strings:
475
Displays a Check Box in the dialog. The value returned to the variable is CHECKED=1, UNCHECKED=0. Displays an integer field with up and down arrow controls. Displays a standard numeric field. Displays a single-line text field. Displays a multi-line edit box. Displays a list of selectable options. Text strings for the _LIST type are listed in cam\examples\pci\ptmods.txt. In the example below _LIST5 is specified, which will display the options listed on line 5 of ptmods.txt. This example is \cam\examples\pci\askbox.pci
For example: %ASKBOX=RealNumber=_REAL_VALUE=IntegerNumber=_INT_VALUE=List Box=_LIST5=Check Box=_CHECK_BOX=TextEntry=$_TEXT_ENTRY=Multi-line Text Entry=$_MTEXT_ENTRY=Default Data Type=DEFAULT results in this dialog:
Note that the %ASKBOX is written on one line and only appears as wrapped due to the limitations of this
476
document.
477
%ASKDIG
Description: Displays a prompt for a digitise and saves the resulting co-ordinate information. Format: %ASKDIG=<PROMPT>=<VAR> The prompt <PROMPT> is displayed asking the user to digitise a point or entity on the screen. The variable <VAR> assumes the co-ordinates of the point snapped to. %ASKDIG sets up system variables as follows:
&ENTNO &ENAME &ETYPE &XDIG &YDIG &ZDIG &XSNAP &YSNAP &ZSNAP &DIRFLAG &PORT &DIGSTAT
entity number entity name entity type number X cursor location Y cursor location Z cursor location X snapped location Y snapped location Z snapped location 0=start of entity, 1=end of entity port in which digitise was made >=0 position given -1 abort ([#ABORT] read only variable) -2 escape ([#ESCAPE] read only variable) -3 finish ([#fFINISH] read only variable)
Notes: The system variables only retain these values until the next %ASKDIG. Because of the complexity of even simple 3D entities with associated matrices (and so on), no information is available on a snapped entity except for the point that was snapped to. Snapped locations on the graphics screen can be provided through entity and grid digitises. Any prompt string can comprise a maximum of 45 characters.
478
nret
determines if the user has done a finish, escape or abort when performing the getdata. [#FINISH],[#ABORT] or [#ESCAPE]
number of digitises entered (including final finish, redo or abort) string to tell user what to digitise handle number for digitise buffer (defaults to gdh) list of selectable entity types. type of digitise allowed [#FREEDIG] for free digitises [#ENTITYDIG] for entity digitises
Example 1 %INITDIGINFO=point %ASKDIGINFO=NUMDIG=Dig Hole Locations=[point],4;11,[#FREEDIG]+[#ENTITYDIG] %ADDFINISHDIG=[point],[#FINISH] This PCI directive would allow a series of free digitises and entity digitises to be added to the specified digitised information handle called point. The entity digitises are restricted to point and group elements only (4;11). Example 2 %AskDigInfo=nret,NumDig="Select points"1,[hDigBuffPoints],[#ENTITYDIG]+[#FREEDIG],4;11 The PCI author can now test the value of nret, it will be set to [#FINISH],[#ABORT] OR [#ESCAPE] The example below tests against nret, if the user has pressed escape or abort the PCI will go to the bottom and finish with no action :%if [nRet]<>[#Finish]
479
480
%ASKMODS
Description: Once a command has been initialised, you can allow the user of the PCI to override the set parameters using the %ASKMODS directive. The dialog for the command will be displayed and the user can change the parameters before the PCI continues. Example: %INITCOMMAND=cmd1=2,1 %CLEARMODS=[cmd1]
The %ASKMODS directive will display the modifier dialog for the Line command and the above parameters can be changed.
%ASKMODS=CMDRET=[cmd1]
481
%ASKPROFILE
Description: This is the operation PCIs need to execute the machining cycles with a digitise buffer. All user input must be contained within this buffer. You cannot use %AskDig and %AskDigInfo to emulate the profile selection methods (arrows and stars etc.). %AskProfile calls through to the same Edgecam function (mc_gen_profs()) as the cycles themselves. In this way, an exactly matching digitise buffer can be constructed, and fed to the cycles later. Format: %AskProfile=NumDig=Prompt=Handle,ProfType,Side NumDig returned as the number of digitises added to the buffer. Prompt the text to display in the Edgecam prompt window. Handle the previously initialised digitise buffer. ProfType one of [#PROF_CLOSED] (like AreaClear or Lace) or [#PROF_OPEN] (like Profile or Slot) Side either [#PROF_SIDE_DIGITISE], [#PROF_SIDE_CENTRE], [#PROF_SIDE_LEFT], [#PROF_SIDE_RIGHT]. If side is passed as [#PROF_SIDE_DIGITISE], it will be returned as either [#PROF_SIDE_LEFT] or [#PROF_SIDE_RIGHT] to indicate which side the user chose. Example: %AskProfile=NumDig=Digitise profile=[hgdSlot],[#PROF_OPEN],[#PROF_SIDE_CENTRE] %AskProfile=NumDig=Digitise profile=[hgdLace],[#PROF_CLOSED],[#PROF_SIDE_DIGITISE]
482
%ASKSURFACES
Description: This directive generates a digitise buffer which can be used with surface machining cycles (e.g. Parallel Lace, Profiling etc). %AskSurfaces uses the same Edgecam code as the cycles themselves. Format: %AskSurfaces=ReturnCode=Prompt,Handle %AskSurfaces=ReturnCode=Prompt,Handle,HandleSides ReturnCode: Either [#FINISH] if successful, or [#ESCAPE]/[#ABORT] if the user cancels the operation of invalid data is input. Prompt: The prompt displayed in the status bar Handle: Previously initialised digitise buffer to hold surfaces selected to machine and if HandleSides is not supplied will also contain the offset selection digitises HandleSides: Optional argument which if present causes all offset selection digitises into this buffer leaving just the surface selection in the [Handle] buffer. Example: %InitDigInfo=gdh1 %AskSurfaces=nRetCode=Digitise surface for machining,[gdh1] %MessageBox=Return code from AskSurfaces [nRetCode] %FreeDigInfo=[gdh1]
483
%CALC
Format: %CALC=variable1=expression Description: This assigns the result of an expression to a variable. See also Creating More Read Only Variables. This command supports all variable types. The variable that is being assigned is not surrounded by square brackets [], but any variable used in the expression must have square brackets, as you are using the value held by that variable. For example: %CALC=variable1=[variable2]+[variable3] For numerical calculations the operators are, in order of precedence:
*/ +-
You can use brackets (parentheses) to change the order in which operations are performed. Strings can be concatenated as follows: abc + def = abcdef The trigonometric functions SIN(#), COS(#), TAN(#), ASIN(#), ACOS(#) and ATAN(#) are all supported, with their arguments specified in degrees. SQR(#) gives the square root of a number. ABS(#) returns the absolute value of a number. POW(#,#) returns the power of the number. INT(#) truncates the number to return its integer value. LOG(#) gives the natural logarithmic function, log e x. EXP(#) gives the exponential function, ex .
484
Please note when using integer values in %CALC that a number followed by a decimal point - but without a numerator - is illegal (see example below). Example %CALC=VAR=5.0 + 2 %CALC=VAR=5 + 2 %CALC=VAR=5.+ 2 is correct is correct is illegal
485
%CHAINENTNAME
Description: This directive chains entities from the specified entity name. The entity numbers chained are stored as separate entity digitises in the supplied digitise buffer.
EntsChained: The number of entity digitises added to DigBuff DigBuff: Digitise buffer to accept digitises for entities chained StartEnt: Starting entity name for chain Direction: Direction for chain, either [#DIR_FORWARD] or [#DIR_REVERSE] 3DSnap: Perform chaining in 3D? Either [#TRUE] or [#FALSE] Branch: Check for branches? Either [#TRUE] or [#FALSE] EndEnt: Optionally stop at this entity name if part of the chain Example: Select named start and end entities for a chain and smooth the entities chained. * Wait for user to select entity to start chain %CALC=$Empty= %Label=StartEntity %AskDig=Select first NAMED ENTITY for chain=Digitise %If [&EName] = [$Empty] %MessageBox=nRet=[#MB_ICONERROR],"Must Digitise a NAMED entity" %GOTO=StartEntity %Endif %CALC=$Start=[&EName] %CALC=ChainDir=[&DirFlag] %Label=EndEntity %AskDig=Select NAMED ENTITY to terminate chain=Digitise %If [&EName] = [$Empty] %MessageBox=nRet=[#MB_ICONERROR],"Must Digitise a NAMED entity" %GOTO=StartEntity %Endif
486
* Chain entities storing in buffer %InitDigInfo=gdh1 %ChainEntName=nEnts=[gdh1],[$Start],[ChainDir],[#TRUE],[#FALSE],[&EName] %MessageBox=[nEnts] selected by chain %AddFinishDig=[gdh1],[#FINISH] * Create a smoothed continuous through the entities chained %InitCommand=cmd1=2,56 %SetModifier=[cmd1],56,0.01 %SetModifier=[cmd1],43,1 %ExecCommand=cmdret=[cmd1],[gdh1] %FreeDigInfo=[gdh1]
487
%CHAINENTNO
Description: This directive chains entities from the specified entity number. The entity numbers chained are stored as separate entity digitises in the supplied digitise buffer. Format: %ChainEntno=EntsChained=DigBuff,StartEnt,Direction,3DSnap,Branch %ChainEntno=EntsChained=DigBuff,StartEnt,Direction,3DSnap,Branch,EndEnt
EntsChained: The number of entity digitises added to DigBuff DigBuff: Digitise buffer to accept digitises for entities chained StartEnt: Starting entity number for chain. Direction: Direction for chain, either [#DIR_FORWARD] or [#DIR_REVERSE] 3DSnap: Perform chaining in 3D? Either [#TRUE] or [#FALSE] Branch: Check for branches? Either [#TRUE] or [#FALSE] EndEnt: Optionally stop at this entity number if part of the chain Example: Chain entities, change their colour to Lime Green and verify the changes. * Wait for user to select entity to start chain %Label=EntityRequired %AskDig=Select first ENTITY for chain=Digitise %If [&Entno] <= 0 %MessageBox=nRet=[#MB_ICONERROR],"Must Digitise an entity" %GOTO=EntityRequired %Endif * Chain entities storing in buffer %InitDigInfo=gdh1 %ChainEntno=nEnts=[gdh1],[&Entno],[&DirFlag],[#TRUE],[#FALSE] %MessageBox=[nEnts] selected by chain %AddFinishDig=[gdh1],[#FINISH] * Change colour of entities to Lime Green (14) %InitCommand=cmd1=1,1 %SetModifier=[cmd1],1,14|14 %ExecCommand=cmdret=[cmd1],[gdh1] * Verify entities chained %InitCommand=cmdh=17,69 %ExecCommand=ret=[cmdh],[gdh1] %FreeDigInfo=[gdh1] See Also: %ChainEntName
488
%CLEARMODS
Description: Clear all Edgecam modifier values for previously initialised command. Format: %CLEARMODS=handle handle: handle number for the command Example: %CLEARMODS=[cmdh]
489
%COMMITOPERATION
Description: This directive commits the operation to the Edgecam database and creates a machining command in the instruction list. Subsequent Machining instructions generated by the PCI are created as child instructions for the operation. These are displayed with the '***' prefix in the instruction list. Format: %CommitOperation=OperationID %CommitOperation=OperationID,DigBuff1^DigBuff2^&ldots;
OperationID: The ID returned by %InitOperation DigBuff: Digitise buffer to be added to the operation. Each digitise buffer is added using the ^ separator. No digitise buffers have to be supplied if the operation does not require user interaction. The digitise buffers supplied are added together and used when regenerating the operation.
490
%COPYMODIFIERS
Description: To copy similar modifiers from one command to another (similar is defined as having the same number and type). Format: %CopyModifiers=SrcCmd,DestCmd,ListOfModifiers SrcCmd: the handle of the command from which to copy the modifiers. DestCmd: the handle of the command into which to copy the modifiers. ListOfModifers: an optional parameter. It can be a caret-separated list of those modifiers that you wish to copy. If not supplied, all similar modifiers are copied. Examples: For example, in the Pocket operation, the roughing cycle can either be AreaClear or Lace. Nearly all the modifiers in the operation are common between these two cycles (Stepover, Cut Increment, Depth parameters etc.). The most efficient way to implement this would be to add command modifiers from one of the two commands (say Lace), and if the user chooses AreaClear, then copy over the modifiers from the Lace command to the AreaClear command. %CopyModifiers=[cmdLace],[cmdAreaClear] This would copy over all similar modifiers from one command to the other. %CopyModifiers=[cmdLace],[cmdAreaClear],28^29^161^9 This would copy the depth modifiers (Clearance, Retract, Level and Depth) from one command to the other.
491
%DEBUG
Description: This selects the level of debug, allowing you to view the substituted and unsubstituted version of each line of the parametric as it is run. Format: %DEBUG=<d/s><0/1> Debug messages can be output to: Screen only (%DEBUG=s) Disk File only (%DEBUG=d) Screen and Disk File (%DEBUG=ds). When output to a disk file, the file PT_DEBUG.TXT is created in the system temporary file location. Control the level of debug by adding 0 or 1 to the end of the statement: %DEBUG=0 debug off %DEBUG=1 debug on all lines When debug text is output to the screen, any lines longer than 78 characters are truncated. Example: %DEBUG=ds1 %DEBUG=0 %DEBUG=s1
492
%DELETE
The %DELETE directive deletes the specified variable name. This directive is usually placed at the beginning or the end of a PCI file. Note that all variables continue to exist until the PCI stops running. Format: %DELETE=variable Examples: %DELETE=$TEXT %DELETE=COUNT
493
%DELETE_ALL_VARS
The %DELETE_ALL_VARS directive deletes all currently defined variables. This directive is typically used at the beginning or the end of a PCI file to delete all currently defined variables. Note that all variables continue to exist until the PCI stops running. Format: %DELETE_ALL_VARS
494
%DISPLAY
Description: Allows text to be displayed on screen. Multi line text is supported by delimiting each line with the \ character. Note that %MESSAGEBOX can also display text in a dialog without the need to have a trailing \ on the message. If a single line display is used, the text appears on the status bar and processing continues. You should not exceed 80 characters per display line. If the Feedback Dialog option on the General tab of the Preferences (Options menu) dialog is checked multi line %Display text is sent to a dialog box and must be dismissed by the user before further processing of the PCI takes place. If this preference is not checked the text is displayed in the feedback window and processing continues without user acknowledgement.
Format:
%DISPLAY=<text to be displayed> Examples: Single line text %DISPLAY=The value of the calculation is: [VAR] If the value of [VAR] is 75 then the following text would be displayed The value of the calculation is: 75 Note: the text for a single line display is displayed on the status bar, not in a dialog. Multiple line text %DISPLAY=Option 1\Option 2\Option 3 This would display the following in a dialog box: Option 1 Option 2 Option 3
495
%DOOPERATIONMODS
Description: Prompts the user to enter values for the modifiers. A standard Windows dialog is presented containing the modifiers as specified by the %ADDCMDMODTOOPERATION directives. If the user completes the dialog and selects OK , cmdRet is assigned the value #FINISH. If the user selects Cancel #ESCAPE is assigned. A standard Edgecam dialog is displayed, containing each modifier as specified by the %ADDCMDMODTOOPERATION and %ADDUSERMODTOOPERATION directives. Format: %DOOPERATIONMODS=cmdRet=[OperationId]
496
%END
Description: To terminate PCI processing. This is typically used before subroutine definition or in an error condition. Note that if %END is executed in a %INCLUDE file, the entire PCI is terminated. Format: %END=[#FINISH] %END If no parameter is given then [#FINISH] is assumed. %END=[#ESCAPE] %END=[#ABORT] See Also: %GOSUB.
497
%ENDIF
Description: To signify the end of a multiple %IF statement. Format: %ENDIF Example: %IF [FRED]=5 %CALC=BILL=[FRED]+6 %IF [BILL]>10 %GOTO=LABEL2 %ENDIF %GOTO=LABEL3 %ENDIF
498
%ERROR
Description: To enable/disable the display of warning messages on the screen. Format: %ERROR=# If %ERROR is set to 1 then any warning messages will be displayed on the screen (this is the default action). This option can be used to re-instate the display of messages on the screen. If %ERROR is set to 0 then any warning messages will NOT be displayed on the screen. This option allows a parametric to continue, skipping over a message that would be displayed on the screen (thereby halting the PCI until the detection of a keypress). Example: In this example a zero length line warning message would be displayed by default. However, no warning messages will be displayed because %ERROR has been set to zero. %ERROR=0 * Initialising command:- Line %INITCOMMAND=cmdh=2,1 %CLEARMODS=[cmdh] * Setting modifier 'Colour' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],1,Green|1 * Setting modifier 'Layer' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],3,1 * Setting modifier 'Style' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],2,Solid|0 %INITDIGINFO=gdh * Add Free dig to Digitised input data %ADDFREEDIG=[gdh1],X-85.77Y28.655 * Add Free dig to Digitised input data %ADDFREEDIG=[gdh1],X10.9162Y-49.7076 * Add Entity to Digitised input via its number 3DSnap NO Direction Reverse %ADDENTNODIG=[gdh1],[&BASEENT]+1,0,1 * Add Entity to Digitised input via its number 3DSnap NO Direction Reverse %ADDENTNODIG=[gdh1],[&BASEENT]+1,0,1 * Finish Digitised input %ADDFINISHDIG=[gdh1],[#FINISH] %EXECCOMMAND=cmdret=[cmdh],[gdh1] %FREEDIGINFO=[gdh1]
499
%EXECCOMMAND
Description: This directive executes the previously initialised command (using %INITCOMMAND) with the modifiers and sub-modifiers as defined by the user. The %EXECCOMMAND includes context checking to prevent Edgecam commands being used with invalid tooling. Additionally, the %EXECCOMMAND completes the initialisation of the command. Format: %EXECCOMMAND=retval=handle,getdata_vmh
return value from executed command handle number for command optional getdata buffer
%EXECCOMMAND=cmdret=[cmdh],[gdh1] Multiple digitise buffers may be used when executing a command In some instances it is useful to add together digitise buffers, before passing a single handle to %INITCOMMAND. Typically this helps when dealing with islands with the geometry from each island held in a digitise buffer. %EXECCOMMAND optionally takes additional digitise buffers in its arguments, as shown below. %EXECCOMMAND=[cmdProfile],[gdOuterProf]^[#FINISH]^[gdIsland]^... A variable number of digitise buffers are supported by this method. The read only variables #FINISH, #REDO, and #ABORT may be used directly to complete the specification of digitised information.
500
%FREECOMMAND
Description: This directive frees all storage associated with a previously initialised command. This is only used if the command is not executed since the %EXECCOMMAND automatically frees any storage used. Format: %FREECOMMAND=handle handle: handle number for the command
501
%FREEDIGINFO
Description: This directive closes the (previously initialised) digitised information buffer. This must be carried out for each occurrence of %INITDIGINFO, since %EXECCOMMAND does not release storage allocated by this buffer. Note that you may want to retain the digitised information held in the buffer (to use data in another command). You can do this by changing the name of the handle on the %INITDIGINFO (and associated data) to a unique name and only execute the %FREEDIGINFO=uniquename once you have finished with the data. An example of this is in the involute.pci file. This can be found in the edge\cam\examples\pci directory. Format: %FREEDIGINFO=handle handle: number for the digitise buffer
Example: FREEDIGINFO=[gdh1]
502
%FREEMESSAGESTRING
Description This PCI directive frees a message string previously initialised by %INITMESSAGESTRING. Format: %FreeMessageString=MessageHandle MessageHandle: Handle number returned by %INITMESSAGESTRING Example: %FreeMessageString=[strMessage] See Also: %AddMessageString, %InitMessageString, %MessageBox
503
%FREEOPERATION
Description: Frees memory used by the PCI operation. Format: %FREEOPERATION=OperationId
504
%GETMODIFIER
Description: This directive has to used in conjunction with %AddCmdModToOperation. Format: %GetModifier=variableset=[command handle],modifier number,variable name to store returned value Example: In the example below bSet is 1 when a value is returned for tool diameter or 0 when no value is returned, and _realtooldiam is used to store the returned diameter value. * Diameter %AddCmdModToOperation=[OpId],[cmdTool],47,^"Tooling"17 %AddCallBackReference=[OpId],tsFinish,[#IndexDiameter],[cmdTool],[#ModDiameter] * %Label=DoOpMods * %DoOperationMods=nOpRet=[OpId] %GetModifier=bSet=[cmdtool],47,_realtooldiam See Also: %COPYMODIFIERS.
505
%GOSUB
Description: Processing jumps to the line specified by a label, until a %RETURN statement is encountered, at which point processing resumes at the statement following the %GOSUB. Subroutines may be nested. Format: %GOSUB=label Example: %ASK=ANGLE IN DEGREES? =DEG %GOSUB=DEG_TO_RAD %DISPLAY=ANGLE IN RADIANS IS [RAD] %END
%LABEL=DEG_TO_RAD %CALC=RAD=[DEG]*3.14159/180 %RETURN This example prompts for an angle in degrees and then displays that value in radians. The calculations are carried out in a subroutine.
506
%GOTO
Description: Processing jumps to a line specified by a label. Using this command, a loop may be created to execute a portion of the parametric file several times, to jump over a section of code, or to jump out of another loop. Note that you can create an infinite loop if there is no end condition, or if the end condition is not met. Format: %GOTO=label Example: %GOTO=JUMP ... ... %LABEL=JUMP
507
%IF
Description: If the result of the comparison between variable1 and variable2 is true, then processing jumps to the line specified by a label. Format: %IF variable1 operator variable2 %GOTO=label The variables may be of any type, but numeric and string variables may not be mixed. Operators supported are:
not equal to less than or equal to greater than or equal to less than greater than equal to
%IF [COUNT]<10 %GOTO=REPEAT %IF [COUNT]>[NUMBER] %GOTO=END %IF [$STRING]=Q %GOTO=STOP Note that single-line IF statements only work with %GOTO statements. Example 2: %IF [COUNT]=[NUMBER] %CALC=[NUMBER]*2 %ENDIF Multiple statements are also permitted, in which case an %ENDIF is used to signify the end of the conditional statement. Nested %IF statements are valid. Example 3: %IF [COUNT]=5 %CALC=NUMBER=[COUNT]+6 %IF [NUMBER]>10 %GOTO=LABEL2
508
%ENDIF %GOTO=LABEL3 %ENDIF Indentation may be used as above to aid readability, but you can only use tabs.
509
%INCLUDE
Description: Calls an existing PCI from within another PCI. Format: %INCLUDE=path path: Directory location and filename (variables may be used) Note that any variables used in the %INCLUDE string must be defined before PCI execution. Example: %CALC=$PATH=c:\tmp %INCLUDE=[$PATH]\test.pci ... where $PATH has previously been assigned a value, for example c:\Edgecam\examples.
510
%INITCOMMAND
Description: This directive initialises a command from within a PCI. Each call of this directive returns a handle, which is a unique reference to that instance of the command and is required with all subsequent references to it. The variable cmd1 is the default for a command handle. Format: %INITCOMMAND=handle=verb,noun
returned handle number for command Verb number for command Noun number for command
%INITCOMMAND=cmd1=2,1 This would set up a handle for the GEOMETRY LINE command. Turn off context checking when initialising a command The PCI directive %INITCOMMAND needs valid tooling to be selected for the command being initialised. Normally this works well, but when building up a PCI operation, the tooling is unlikely to have been pre-selected since the tooling is an integral part of the operation. The %INITCOMMAND has an optional additional parameter to turn off the context checking when initialising a command: %INITCOMMAND=cmdFaceMill=102,4,[#FALSE] This will initialise the Edgecam command with no checking for the validity of the selected tool.
511
%INITDIGINFO
Description: Initialises storage space for digitised information. When command save is used the variable gdh1 is always used to reference this storage. Format: %INITDIGINFO=handle handle: name of the digitise buffer Example: %INITDIGINFO=gdh1
512
%INITMESSAGESTRING
Description: This PCI directive initialises a message string and sets up a handle used to identify it. A message string is a list of text strings each of which is shown on a separate line when displayed using %MESSAGEBOX. Format: %InitMessageString=MessageHandle MessageHandle: Returned handle number used to access message string Example: %InitMessageString=strMessage When a message list is no longer required it can be freed by using %FREEMESSAGESTRING. When a PCI terminates all message strings still defined are automatically freed. See Also: %AddMessageString, %FreeMessageString, %MessageBox
513
%INITOPERATION
Description: This initialises a new Edgecam operation. A variable name is defined and this is used as reference to the operation in subsequent steps. A name for this operation is also given. Format: %INITOPERATION=PCI variable=operation name,help file name,help context id Example:
%INITOPERATION=OperationId=Rough Face Mill,EdgeOp.hlp,10021 OperationId: the PCI variable used to identify the operation. Rough Face Mill: the textual name of the operation. This string is also used as the title of the operation dialog when displayed to the user, and for the name of the operation displayed in the Edgecam operations list. EdgeOp.hlp: the name of the help file to be used to display context sensitive help. This will be located in the appropriate language directory or subdirectory. 10021: the help context id for this command. The help file name and the context Id are optional parameters.
514
%ISTOOLSAME
Description: The Toolchange command should only be executed if the current tool is different from the new one. %ISTOOLSAME compares the tool defined in a toolchange command handle with the currently selected tool. Format: %IsToolSame=Result=CommandHandle Result: a variable in which the result will be placed. The result will be either #TRUE or #FALSE. CommandHandle: the handle to the toolchange command about to be executed. Example: %IsToolSame=bToolSame=[cmdMillCutter] %If [bToolSame]=[#FALSE] %ExecCommand=cmdret=[cmdMillCutter],[hDigBuffEmpty] %EndIf
515
%ISVARDEFINED
Description: If a PCI accesses an undefined variable (using a %Calc directive for instance), an error message is displayed. It can be useful to check if a variable exists without causing an error. It is also essential to be able to tell if a User Modifier has had its value set by the user. %ISVARDEFINED lets you check if a variable has been defined. Format: %IsVarDefined=Exists=Variable Exists: a variable that will be set to [#True] or [#False]. Variable: the subject of the test. Example: %IsVarDefined=bExists=_realDepth %If [bExists]<>[#True] %MessageBox=Depth must be specified %Endif
516
%LABEL
Description: This is the destination of a %GOTO or %GOSUB statement. Format: %LABEL=label Example: %IF[VAR]=1%GOTO=END .. .. %LABEL=END
517
%LEN
Description: The length of a string is loaded into a numeric variable. Format: %LEN=variable=string Example: %LEN=LENGTH=ABCDEF The string ABCDEF is six characters long, so the directive assigns a value of 6 to the numeric variable LENGTH.
518
%LOADTOOL
Description Loads tools from the currently selected ToolStore. Example %LoadTool=[cmd1],10mm Slot Drill - 2 Flute - 13A F30m
To use this directive in a PCI the following sequence of commands is suggested: * Initialising command:- Milling Cutter %InitCommand=cmd1=36,108 * Clear the command modifiers %ClearMods=[cmd1] * Load required tool from ToolStore %LoadTool=[cmd1],10mm Slot Drill - 2 Flute - 13A F30m * Present dialog for interactive input (Optional) %AskMods=cmdret=[cmd1] * Check command completed %if [cmdret]<>[#FINISH] %FreeCommand=[cmd1] %endif * Execute command	 %if [cmdret]=[#FINISH] %InitDigInfo=gdh1 %ExecCommand=cmdret=[cmd1],[gdh1] %FreeDigInfo=[gdh1] %endif
Note that if an attempt is made to load a non-existent tool, no data will be placed in the dialog. This will be trapped by the system at run time as it expects at least a diameter to be specified for each tool and a warning to the effect that no diameter has been set will be given. If no dialog is to be presented for user input then the %ASKMODS line, above, should be omitted.
519
%MESSAGEBOX
Description: Although you can use the %DISPLAY directive to display a Windows message box, for compatibility with DOS a fixed-width font is used. A better look can be achieved by using %MESSAGEBOX since it uses a proportionally spaced font. Read-only variables are supplied to define the message-box styles. There are two forms of this directive, a shortened version which just displays the message with an OK button and the full version which allows the style to be configured and the return code from the box to be determined. The shortened version is an alternative to %DISPLAY. Format: %MessageBox=Message %MessageBox=ReturnCode=Style,Message ReturnCode Indicates the button pressed to exit the message box. This can be one of the following constants: [#MB_RET_OK] OK button was pressed [#MB_RET_CANCEL] Cancel button was pressed [#MB_RET_YES] Yes button was pressed [#MB_RET_NO] No button was pressed Style Controls the Icon and buttons displayed on the message box. The button style and icon style can be specified by using a + between them. Button styles are: [#MB_OK] OK button is displayed [#MB_OKCANCEL] OK and Cancel button are displayed [#MB_YESNOCANCEL] Yes, No and Cancel buttons are displayed [#MB_YESNO] Yes and No buttons are displayed [#MB_ICONERROR] Message box has error (x) icon [#MB_ICONINFORMATION] Message box has information (i) icon [#MB_ICONQUESTION] Message box has question (?) icon [#MB_ICONWARNING] Message box has warning (!) icon [#MB_DEFBUTTON2] Second button is default [#MB_DEFBUTTON3] Third button is default [#MB_NODEFBUTTON] No button is default [#MB_RIGHT] Message is right justified
Examples
520
%MESSAGELISTBOX
Description: This directive is an alternative to %OPTION directive. Instead of buttons the options are displayed in a listbox. The return value is the option selected (first option is 1) unless Cancel is pressed when 1 is returned. The default value determines which item is initially selected when the listbox is displayed. Format: %MessageListBox=Selection=DefaultOption,Title,Option1^Option2^Option3 Selection: Indicates the option selected (1, 2, 3 &ldots;) or 1 if Cancel was pressed. DefaultOption: Determines which option is initially selected (1, 2, 3...). If this is not a valid option number the last option is selected. Title: This is the title for the ListBox Option1^&ldots;: The list of options, each one separated by ^. Note: The options cannot contain commas. Example: Display a list of three choices (second choice is the default), and report user selection. The same sample is also shown using message strings * Listbox with second option defaulted %MessageListBox=nRet=2,Select an Option,Option1^Option2^Option3 %MessageBox=Selected option : [nRet] * Use Message Strings %InitMessageString=strOptions %Calc=Option=0 %Label=OptionLoop %Calc=Option=[Option]+1 %AddMessageString=[strOptions]=Option[Option] %If [Option] < 3 %GotoOptionLoop %MessageListBox=nRet=2,Select an Option,[strOptions] %MessageBox=Selected option : [nRet] %FreeMessageString=[strOptions]
521
%MID
Description: This stores part of one string variable as another. That is, part of string2 is loaded into the string1 variable (see the format and example below). The starting character and the length of the part are also defined. Format: %MID=string1=string2,start,length length must be 252 or less Example 1: %MID=$SUBSTR=[$STRING],3,2 Example 2: %MID=$STRING=ABCDEF,3,2 This second example would define $STRING as CD.
522
%OPTION
Description: To prompt the user to select one of a list of options and assign that option to a variable. Format: %OPTION=prompt^option1^option2^option3=variable An %OPTION directive line can be a maximum of 128 characters long. The prompt string can be a maximum of 45 characters long. Note that %ASK can perform a similar function. Example: %label=page1 %OPTION=PAGE1^PAGE2^PAGE3^PAGE4^END=PAGE %if[page]=1%goto=Page2 %if[page]=2%goto=Page3 %if[page]=3%goto=Page4 %if[page]=4 %end %endif
%label=page2 %option=Page2^page1^page2^page3^page4^end=page %if[page]=1%goto=page1 %if[page]=2%goto=page2 %if[page]=3%goto=page3 %if[page]=4%goto=page4 %if[page]=5 %end %endif ... (etc.) This produces an option box from which only one option can be chosen. The selected option is then assigned to the variable PAGE. The first option sets PAGE=1, the second sets PAGE=2 and so on. The value of PAGE can be used with %IF statements to determine the program flow (see below)
523
With fewer options the dialog changes in style, presenting a labeled button for each option. NOTE: This shows the options as buttons on a dialog. However if the options are Yes^No or OK^Cancel then %MessageBox is better. If you want to display a list of options instead of buttons, use %MessageListBox. See Also: %MessageListBox, %MessageBox
524
%PADTEXT
Description: To justify the text string relative to the position defined, and "pad" the entire string to the specified length. Format: %PADTEXT=variable1=string,justification,length
Text string 0 = Left, 1 = Right, 2 = Centre specifies the total number of characters in the string
%PADTEXT=$STR1=1234,0,10 %PADTEXT=$STR2=1234,1,10 %PADTEXT=$STR3=1234,2,10 * %MessageBox=1 *[$STR1]*\2 *[$STR2]*\3 *[$STR3]* The text for this example appears as follows (with spaces shown as "-"): 1 *1234------* 2 *------1234* 3 *---1234---*
525
%QUERY
Description: To query Edgecam entities. Format: %QUERY=nret=[entno],[#true] %QUERY=nret=[$entname],[#true] entno the entity name or number #true determines if the co-ordinates are returned in CPL or World Co-ordinates A single directive is used for convenience. The variable ('nret') is set to 1 if the entity exists, or 0 if the entity is deleted or doesn't exist. This variable must be specified. This will set up appropriate system variables for the entity specified. The system variables will be dependent on the type of the entity being queried. System variables are set as follows:
System Variable &ETYPE &ENAME &ENTNO &XSTART, &YSTART, &ZSTART &XEND, &YEND, &ZEND &XCENTRE, &YCENTRE, &ZCENTRE &RADIUS
Contents Entity Type (if deleted (that is recoverable with Undo), 16384 is added) Entity Name. Entity Number Start point of entity
&Query returns values for X,Y and Z as if for the milling environment. If working in another environment then due allowance must be made for this. For example, in the turning environment the XStart and XEnd values will be held in &YStart and &YEnd and the ZStartZEnd values will be in &XStart and &XEnd.
526
%QUERYDIGINFO
Description: To allow the PCI to query the contents of a digitise buffer. Format: %QUERYDIGINFO=nret=[gdh],[ElementNumber] The directive needs a specified digitise buffer [gdh] and element number. Once executed the appropriate system variables are updated with the entities information. The variable ('nret') is set to 0 if the entity is deleted, or 1 if the entity is not deleted. This variable must be specified. See PCI System Variables
Entity Name digitises are returned as DIG_ENTNODIG for the type (the name can be retrieved from the relevant system variable). Free digitise locations specified by co-ordinate strings are returned as DIG_LOCATION for the type. The coordinate string is not accessible. For free digitises, the X, Y and Z locations are set up in the system variables &XDIG, &YDIG and &ZDIG respectively. For world and view digitises, &XDIG, &YDIG and &ZDIG contain the world and view co-ordinates respectively. For port digitises, the port number is set up in the system variable &PORT. No other system variables are set up for the other digitise types (DIG_SCREEN, DIG_UVSURF, DIG_ELEMENT, DIG_CONSTRUCT_REF and DIG_COMPENENT_INFO). For entity digitises, the information set up is as for the %QUERY directive. All information is set up in the co-ordinate system of the current CPL. Example
527
%REINITCOMMAND
Description: A command can be initialised out of context, that is without the normal checks to see if it is valid to execute the command at that time. In bypassing the context checking, a number of actions that normal take place during command initialisation are also bypassed. Modal values are not loaded, and modifiers from the code generator are not added. In certain cases, these must be accessed before the command is executed, so use %REINITCOMMAND to re-initialise a command that has been initialised out of context. Format: %ReInitCommand=CommandHandle CommandHandle is the handle of the command to be re-initialised Example: %ReInitCommand=[cmdHole]
528
%RESPONSE
Format: %RESPONSE=value Description: There are a number of places in Edgecam which require confirmation from the user before a certain action is carried out. There are three cases to consider: Overwriting an existing data file. An example of this is saving a file over one which already exists. Overwriting an existing part file by loading a new data file. Exceptional circumstances, such as printer off line require a retry option box to be offered to the printer. This directive gives a mechanism to prevent Edgecam from offering an option box, thereby halting the PCI application to wait for user input. The %RESPONSE settings are:
%RESPONSE=0 %RESPONSE=1
System processes all system confirmation boxes and asks user for confirmation. This is the default value. System ignores all file overwrite confirmation requests, assuming a positive response.
Option boxes presented to the user in exceptional circumstances only (such as printer off line) always pause and prompt the user for input. No method is offered for automatically forcing a negative response.
529
%RETURN
Description: Used at the end of a subroutine to return processing to the line following the last %GOSUB statement. Format: %RETURN Example: See %GOSUB.
530
%SETCALLBACK
Description: Sets up the ToolStore to be ready to return values into modifiers contained in the PCI. Example: %SetCallBack=tsFinish=[OpId],[cmdToolFinish],[#ModToolStore]
This command is intended for use with ToolStore toolchanges and will usually be used together with %ADDCALLBACKREF. Click here to see an example.
531
%SETFEATUREVARS
Description: Assigns feature attribute values to PCI variables. To see the assigned values, use the PCI variables window (use Right-Click menu window). Note that some feature attributes are not available as PCI variables. Refresh once in the
This variable names shown in the window are the actual ones you need to use in PCI directives, such as '~Diameter~', for Hole features. This needs to be called before you create modifiers that use the variables, to be added to the operation dialog (using AddUserModToOperation, AddCmdModToOperation and so on). If more than one such feature is digitised, then only the attributes values common to all the features are set. For example, if the diameter of a number of holes is the same then the ~diameter is set, but if they have different depths then ~depth will not be set. Format %SetFeatureVars=handle
You can use the directive without the handle to clear the variables, after use. Only certain features support this mechanism:- Mill features found in Edgecam Version 9.0 (unless they are superseded), Hole features found in Edgecam 10.0 or earlier and Turn features. For other features, use Strategy Manager to allow operations to access feature attributes, rather than PCIs. The behaviour of the PCI variables set by %SetFeatureVars will not be guaranteed in any PCIs that use them (apart from the Edgecam operations); they may unintentionally become incompatible.
532
%SETMODIFIER
Description: This directive sets the value for an Edgecam modifier. Format: %SETMODIFIER=handle,modifier #,modifier text|value handle modifier # modifier text value Example: %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],1,Blue|2 Handle number for command Modifier number to set Text associated to the modifier value Modifier value
533
%SETPACKAGE
Description: To switch Edgecam between Design and Manufacture. Format: %SETPACKAGE=value The %SETPACKAGE settings are: 0 = Design 1 = Manufacture Example: When moving to manufacture and initialising a new sequence the PCI currently assumes the machining sequence values follow immediately afterwards in the PCI as shown in the example below: %SETPACKAGE=1 * Initialising command:- Machining Sequence %INITCOMMAND=cmd=2,90 %SETMODIFIER=[cmd],105,Mill|1 %SETMODIFIER=[cmd],102,rotary.mcp %SETMODIFIER=[cmd],244,[&TOP] %SETMODIFIER=[cmd],212,Incremental|0 %EXECCOMMAND=cmdret=[cmd],-1 If the machining sequence information is not present in the PCI or a sequence already available, the PCI will fail.
534
%TOOLBARMODS
Description: This directive allows a PCI program to use the toolbar controls for colour, layer and style. Format: %TOOLBARMODS=toolbarmods
toolbarmods:
Controls where the PCI obtains colour, layer and style information: 0=Use embedded values in PCI, 1=Use current values from the toolbar.
By default, the PCI uses any values for these parameters that have been embedded in the PCI program. Example: %TOOLBARMODS=1 This allows the PCI to use the current toolbar values.
535
%WAIT
Description: Inserts a pause of the specified number of seconds. Pressing function key 8 stops the pause and aborts the parametric. Format: %WAIT=time Example: %WAIT=20 This causes the program to pause for 20 seconds before continuing.
536
&BASEENT
This system variable is set to the last entity number in a new worksession or loaded part. This allows the creation of new entities to be generated and referenced to the variable, instead of to an actual entity number which could be different between worksessions and loaded parts. For further details on the following system variables refer to the %ASKDIG directive.
Colour number Active CPL Name 0 = Radial 1 = Diametral >=0 position given. -1 abort ([#ABORT] read only variable) -2 escape ([#ESCAPE] read only variable) -3 finish ([#fFINISH] read only variable)
&DIRFLAG
0=start of entity, 1=end of entity Used in conjunction with %ASKDIG, %ASKDIGINFO, %QUERYDIGINFO
Holds the text sting in the selected language for the drawing CPL Drawing tolerance The master folder path. The local folder path, for example: c:\Program Files\Edgecam\Cam
&EDGETOOLDIR &ENAME
String value containing the path for the tool library. Returns the entity name. Used in conjunction with %ASKDIG, %ASKDIGINFO, %QUERYDIGINFO
&ENTNO
Returns the entity number. Used in conjunction with %ASKDIG, %ASKDIGINFO, %QUERYDIGINFO
&ENVIRONMENT &ETYPE
1 = Milling/Wire 2 = Turn Returns the entity type. Used in conjunction with %ASKDIG, %ASKDIGINFO, %QUERYDIGINFO
&GRID &LAYER
537
This system variable is set to the next entity number available in the current part. See &NEXTENT for details Returns number of solids in part file. The path and filename of the open part. Port in which digitise was made. Used in conjunction with %ASKDIG, %ASKDIGINFO, %QUERYDIGINFO
&RADIUS &STYLE &SYSTOL &TOP &FRONT &LEFT &RIGHT &BOTTOM &BACK &TURN &INV_TURN &RADIAL &AXIAL &WRAP &UNITS &VERSION
Arc radius Style number System tolerance Holds the text string in the selected language for the standard milling CPLs
Holds the text string in the selected language for the standard turning CPLs
Returns the current part units, either [#IMPERIAL] or [#METRIC]. Returns the current Edgecam version number (as reported in the About box) as a string, e.g. in Edgecam version 7.0 it will return "7.0" but in the "a" patch it would return "7.0a".
&XCENTRE &YCENTRE Arc centre co-ordinates &ZCENTRE &XDIG &YDIG &ZDIG XYZ cursor position. Used in conjunction with %ASKDIG, %ASKDIGINFO, %QUERYDIGINFO &XEND &YEND &ZEND &XSNAP &YSNAP &ZSNAP &XSTART &YSTART &ZSTART Manufacture Only Arc or line end co-ordinates XYZ snapped location. Used in conjunction with %ASKDIG, %ASKDIGINFO, %QUERYDIGINFO Arc or line start co-ordinates
Defined as #TRUE or #FALSE. If #TRUE, the machine tool is a mill. Defined as #TRUE or #FALSE. If #TRUE, the machine tool has 4 axis capability Tool is at the tool change position (#TRUE / #FALSE). Tool is at the tool home position (#TRUE / #FALSE).
538
&BAXIS
0 = No B Axis. 1 = Positional Only (machine can index to B angles but not simultaneously drive the B axis). 2 = Simultaneous (machine can drive the B axis simultaneously).
&COOLANT
Current coolant status (assumes coolant is Macro 104). The values returned are 1-based lists, as defined by the Code Wizard templates. A value of 0 is returned if the macro has not been used and -1 is returned if the macro is not found for the current machine. CSS selected (#TRUE / #FALSE). Defined as #TRUE or #FALSE. If #TRUE, the machine tool has C/Y Axis capability. Current planar feed rate. Feed/Min (0) Feed/Rev (1). Current Gear Status (Assumes Gear is Macro 110). The values returned are 1 based lists, as defined by the Code Wizard templates. A value of 0 is returned if the macro has not been used and -1 is returned if the macro is not found for the current machine. Defined as #TRUE or #FALSE. If #TRUE, the machine tool is a lathe. 0 = Fixed 1 = Driven Current plunge feed rate. Returns the name of the current code generator. Example: %messagebox=The current code generator is [&POSTNAME]
Defined as #TRUE or #FALSE. If #TRUE, the machine tool has rotary capability. Currently active sequence's name. Current spindle speed. Current spindle status (assumes spindle is Macro 101). The values returned are 1 based lists, as defined by the Code Wizard templates. A value of 0 is returned if the macro has not been used and -1 is returned if the macro is not found for the current machine. Current turret position. Current tool radius. Type number of the tool currently in use. One of: Wire = -2, PDI tool = -1, End mill = 0, Ball nose = 1, Tap = 2, Drill = 3, Taper = 4, Turn = 6, T-Slot = 6, Bore = 7, Lollipop = 7, Groove = 8, Thread = 9, Parting off = 10, Pre load = 11, Assembly = 12
&WIRE
539
&XPOS &YPOS &ZPOS Current tool position (xyz). &XTOOL &YTOOL &ZTOOL Tool Change position (xyz).
540
&NEXTENT
Description: Assigns the next free entity number to the variable <VAR>. The advantage of &NEXTENT over &BASEENT is that the value for &NEXTENT is continually updated during the execution of the PCI, because it references the next available entity number. For details of other system variables, see %ASKDIG.
*Create a set of points %INITCOMMAND=cmd1=2,36 %CLEARMODS=[cmd1] %SETMODIFIER=[cmd1],1,Gold|21 %SETMODIFIER=[cmd1],3,44 %SETMODIFIER=[cmd1],2,Solid|0 %INITDIGINFO=gdh1 %ADDFREEDIG=[gdh1],X0Y0 %ADDFREEDIG=[gdh1],X10Y-10 %ADDFREEDIG=[gdh1],X20Y0 %ADDFREEDIG=[gdh1],X30Y-10 %ADDFREEDIG=[gdh1],X40Y0 %ADDFINISHDIG=[gdh1],[#FINISH] %EXECCOMMAND=cmdret=[cmd1],[gdh1] %FREEDIGINFO=[gdh1]
*Create line polyline between the points %INITCOMMAND=cmd1=2,1 %CLEARMODS=[cmd1] %SETMODIFIER=[cmd1],155,1 %SETMODIFIER=[cmd1],1,Gold|21 %SETMODIFIER=[cmd1],3,44 %SETMODIFIER=[cmd1],2,Solid|0 %INITDIGINFO=gdh1 %ADDDIGINFO=[gdh1],1,[#ENTITYDIG] [#DIG_ENTNODIG],[NEXTENTITY],[#DIG_CHAIN]+[#DIG_3DSNAP],[#DIR_FORWARD]
541
%ADDDIGINFO=[gdh1],1,[#ENTITYDIG] [#DIG_ENTNODIG],[NEXTENTITY]+1,[#DIG_CHAIN]+[#DIG_3DSNAP],[#DIR_FORWARD] %ADDDIGINFO=[gdh1],1,[#ENTITYDIG] [#DIG_ENTNODIG],[NEXTENTITY]+2,[#DIG_CHAIN]+[#DIG_3DSNAP],[#DIR_FORWARD] %ADDDIGINFO=[gdh1],1,[#ENTITYDIG] [#DIG_ENTNODIG],[NEXTENTITY]+3,[#DIG_CHAIN]+[#DIG_3DSNAP],[#DIR_FORWARD] %ADDDIGINFO=[gdh1],1,[#ENTITYDIG] [#DIG_ENTNODIG],[NEXTENTITY]+4,[#DIG_CHAIN]+[#DIG_3DSNAP],[#DIR_FORWARD] %ADDFINISHDIG=[gdh1],[#FINISH] %EXECCOMMAND=cmdret=[cmd1],[gdh1] %FREEDIGINFO=[gdh1]
542
Digitise Types
[#FREEDIG] [#ENTITYDIG]
543
544
545
546
Chaining Types
[#DIR_FORWARD] [#DIR_REVERSE] [#DIG_CHAIN] [#DIG_2DSNAP] [#DIG_3DSNAP]
547
Boolean Types
[#TRUE] [#FALSE]
548
549
550
Unit Types
[#METRIC] [#IMPERIAL]
551
Environment Types
[#MILL_ENV] [#TURN_ENV]
552
%CALC=#TOOLDIAMETER=47 A range of read only variables cover the popular identifiers used with %INITCOMMAND, %SETMODIFER directives. These are referred to as verb, noun and modifier identifiers. A unique verb and noun combination identifies an Edgecam command. Modifier identifiers may be duplicated, but not within the same command. Read only variables for verbs, nouns and modifiers begin #VERB, #NOUN and #MOD respectively. The full definition of all verbs, nouns and modifiers are given in the Edgecam include files verb.def, noun.def and modifier.def. Each constant from these files will be included as read only variables. This will not give an exhaustive list as not all identifiers are included in these files. The PCI Command Save will use these constants wherever possible.
553
$SolidFilename This variable name is used to reload a solid in a PCI. Useful for updating Solids or loading a different model of the same family. Example - %calc=$SolidFilename=c:\data\part1234.x_t See Associative Reloading of Solid Models. NoLayer If the PCI variable "NoLayer" exists (with any numeric value, including 0) then Layer number "1" will be called "1" instead of "Layer1"
DeleteOrphans Orphaned features can be deleted by setting the numeric PCI variable DeleteOrphans: 1. In the PCI Variables Window, right-click the User Variables branch. 2. From the shortcut menu, select New. 3. Set the Numeric Value to 0 and enter the Variable Name DeleteOrphans. 4. Click OK.
554
555
218 Edge Loop feature 219 Open Pocket Feature 250 Stock feature 251 Fixture feature
* You can digitise these to pick the topological object out of the solid entity and pass it to the command, but no Edgecam database entities are created. This means that any entity reference in the PCI will be lost if you reload the part or the solid.
556
Limitations to PCI
Since PCI is a method of directly manipulating the Edgecam database, it is not applicable outside of the main Edgecam Design and Manufacture modes. Although both the Code Generator and Tool Library applications can be called from within a PCI, neither can interpret PCI directives. Machining instructions cannot be manipulated directly under the control of PCI. Instruction editing commands can be called up but require user intervention to select machining instructions.
557
558
%endif %if[eang]<=[deg] %display=End angle is less than increment.\ %goto=ask %endif %if[deg]=<0 %display=Degree increment must be greater than 0.\ %goto=ask %endif
%CALC=RAD=[diam]/2 * Initialising command:- Arc %INITCOMMAND=cmdh=2,2 %CLEARMODS=[cmdh] * Setting modifier 'Diameter' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],111,[diam] * Setting modifier 'Colour' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],1,Green|1 * Setting modifier 'Layer' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],3,88 * Setting modifier 'Style' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],2,Solid|0 %INITDIGINFO=gdh1 * Add Free dig to Digitised input data %ADDFREEDIG=[gdh1],X0Y0 * Finish Digitised input %ADDFINISHDIG=[gdh1],[#FINISH] %EXECCOMMAND=cmdret=[cmdh],[gdh1] %FREEDIGINFO=[gdh1] * Initialising command:- Line %INITCOMMAND=cmdh=2,1 %CLEARMODS=[cmdh] * Setting modifier 'Polyline' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],155,1
559
* Setting modifier 'Colour' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],1,Cyan|3 * Setting modifier 'Layer' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],3,88 * Setting modifier 'Style' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],2,Solid|0 %INITDIGINFO=gdh1 * Add Free dig to Digitised input data %ADDFREEDIG=[gdh1],X[RAD]Y0 * %LABEL=LOOP %CALC=ANG=[ANG]+[DEG] %CALC=LEN=(6.2831853*[RAD])/(360/[ANG]) %CALC=HYP=SQR(([LEN]*[LEN])+([RAD]*[RAD])) %CALC=HYPANG=ATAN([LEN]/[RAD]) %CALC=REANG=[ANG]-[HYPANG] %CALC=XCOORD=[HYP]*COS([REANG]) %CALC=YCOORD=[HYP]*SIN([REANG]) * Add Free dig to Digitised input data %display=End [eang] degrees : [ang] degrees Coord= x[xcoord] y[ycoord] %ADDFREEDIG=[gdh1],X[XCOORD]Y[YCOORD] %IF[ANG]=>[EANG]%GOTO=endloop %GOTO=LOOP %LABEL=endloop * Finish Digitised input %ADDFINISHDIG=[gdh1],[#FINISH] %EXECCOMMAND=cmdret=[cmdh],[gdh1] ***%FREEDIGINFO=[gdh1] * * The %FREEDIGINFO line has been removed so that the data handle can be used for the smooth operation. *%FREEDIGINFO=[gdh1] * ********** SMOOTH ********* * %option=Smooth^Yes^no=smooth
560
%if[smooth]=2 * No smooth required. Ensure data handle is freed before PCI ends %FREEDIGINFO=[gdh1] %goto=nosmooth %endif %calc=tol=0.01 %askbox=Tolerance=tol * * Initialising command:- Smooth %INITCOMMAND=cmdh=2,56 %CLEARMODS=[cmdh] * Setting modifier 'Tolerance' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],56,[tol] * Setting modifier 'Colour' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],1,Red|4 * Setting modifier 'Layer' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],3,1 * Setting modifier 'Style' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],2,Solid|0 * Setting modifier 'Continuous' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],43,1 *%INITDIGINFO=gdh1 * Remove INITDIGINFO so that the data handle does not get cleared %EXECCOMMAND=cmdret=[cmdh],[gdh1] %FREEDIGINFO=[gdh1] %label=nosmooth * Initialising command:- Zoom Port %INITCOMMAND=cmdh=4,6 %CLEARMODS=[cmdh] * Setting modifier 'Extents' %SETMODIFIER=[cmdh],8,1 %INITDIGINFO=gdh1 %EXECCOMMAND=cmdret=[cmdh],[gdh1] %FREEDIGINFO=[gdh1]
561
562
Manufacture Mode
The following chapter helps you learn about and use the basic commands in Edgecams Manufacture mode. To use the Edgecam system, you should be experienced in CAD/CAM methods and the appropriate equipment and terminology. You also need to have some experience of the Microsoft Windows NT graphical user environments.
563
(Note that this is the default setup; you might have a non-default setup where only one button is visible, or no buttons are visible; see Mode Buttons for details.) On first entering Manufacture mode after creating the part, the Machining Sequence dialog opens so you can create a new sequence. You are prompted to specify, for example, the type of machining (Mill or Turn) and the Code Generator to use (code generators are specific to particular machine tools, and act as an interface ensuring correctly formatted NC code is output). See full details. You might be prompted to enter the text for the machine-specific commands that appear in the M-Functions menu. On switching between Design and Manufacture modes you can opt for automatic checks to be made for deleted geometry (if this does not cause too much delay - see Deleted Geometry Checking for details). About Creating Wire Toolpaths Before you try to create wire toolpaths, you should already have created a Wire Profile. Whichever method you used to create the profile, simply select the command Machine Design (Wire Cycles menu). This command uses whatever information is stored in the profile to generate the appropriate toolpaths. Also see Creating the Design Intent.
564
...in the General tab of the Machining Sequence dialog you set the Machine Datum position. Here are details on this setting in the dialog's help (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
565
...in the General tab of the Machining Sequence dialog you set the Initial CPL. Here are the details on this setting in the dialog's help (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
566
Parts can contain multiple sequences, for example two milling operations on the same model. Also, more than one discipline (mill, inspection, turning, and so on) can be used with the same model. If you have to physically move the workpiece from one setup to another, you should consider using separate sequences, as the output will be for machine tools used in that setup. If the part is complex, the redraw time may get quite long, so you may want to break it down. However, you must then merge the files together with an editor (the Edgecam Editor is recommended).
567
(You can also access the help below by clicking the Help button in the dialog.)
You can subsequently edit the sequence setup using the Lathe Setup dialog (edits the sub-spindle setup for lathes) and the Machine Parameters dialog (you can also check the values for the current machining sequence).
568
569
570
571
572
573
You can also group instructions together as operations using Operation (Instructions menu) This means that when editing the instruction list you could edit individual commands or entire operations. Do not confuse these with the operation commands (such as the 'Roughing') in the Operations menu.
574
Whenever you are specifying or editing a tool, you can obtain full details of the tool parameters by clicking the dialog's Help button. See Also Saving Tool Graphics Automatic Speeds and Feeds Selecting a Safe Distance for the Tool
575
Offset - Select the offset register for the tool, as specified by the machine tool controller. This is only valid if you are using controller compensation. Usually, the turret number is used to determine the offset register. However, you may want to use multiple registers, for example when turning a part with different diameters, using different offsets to compensate for tool deflection.
576
577
Driven milling tools loaded at an angle When a driven milling tool is loaded at a B-angle (B-axis configurations only) it is the same as performing a Move Angular B command. Having loaded a tool at an angle planar mode is forced and the program coordinates are XYZ milling. Link to Move Angular.
578
579
This is in the Turning Tool dialog and the Boring Tool dialog. Note that: To maintain surface finish there is a reduction in the feedrate when the tool is not cutting on the wiping portion of the profile. This can happen when cutting tapers for example. See %Feed non Wiper in the illustration above; the default value of %30 (%70 reduction) is recommended. The Finish Turn cycle toolpath is shaded where the wiping portion of the profile is in contact. Only valid combinations of (insert) Symbol, Nose Radius, Edge Length/Inscribed Circle and Wiper Style settings can be made. A table of valid combinations is provided in the online help - see below. (Invalid combinations result in a 'No Wiper match found' message.) To machine with a Wiper insert, Radius Compensation (Type) must be set to Pathcomp. The Finish Turn cycle will then generate the correct offset for the wiper insert. For full details click the dialog's Help button (or click here). The details include the valid setting combinations.
580
The parameters for the command are: Tool Graphics Saves current tool graphics data to a .csv file. Click Browse to look for an existing file. Holder Graphics Saves current holder graphics data to a .csv file. Click Browse to look for an existing file.
Further information on how to create tool graphics can be found in the ToolStore help. To find the relevant topics: 1. Open the ToolStore application and click the Help button. 2. Go to the Overview tab. 3. Select the User Defined Graphics link in the See Also list. You cannot create tool graphics with Edgecam in Student Edition mode.
581
Click here to display the menu (as shown) Drag here to undock the menu
You can also use the Configure View dialog (Tool tab).
582
For Rough Turning cycles, a Safe Distance move is added to the end of a pass:
583
4. Now start to create the cycle. In the cycle's dialog you should see automatically calculated Feedrate and Speed values. The Speed (RPM) value, for example, will have been calculated from the specified insert linear Speed and the specified tool diameter.
See Also Selecting values from technology tables in the Tool Library
584
585
The actual items that appear depend upon your current Code Generator file. Each Code Generator can add extra functions to the M-Functions menu. These functions can be switches (for example, Coolant On/Off) or values (for example, New Offset). The Code Generator assumes one of the options as a default (Coolant is assumed to be on unless otherwise specified). Therefore, if the function has not been used, the machine status reports -DEFAULT as shown above.
586
The actual items that appear depends upon your current Code Generator file. This is listed here as the Machine Tool.
587
Turning Example
If Override Angles have been specified for the tool, these are shown in place of the clearance angles, in { } brackets:
Wire Example
The numbers in brackets are the Upper and Lower Guide heights (see Selecting the Wire for details).
588
589
590
Resolved When moving from point to point the toolpath is linear. This means that one axis may move slower than the other, so that a straight line is achieved between points. Unresolved When moving from point to point both axes accelerate at the same rate until one axis has reached its position. The other axis then completes its move, thereby producing a dog-leg move. The Code Generator has a parameter that sets the rapid type for your machine.
It is important that the correct display is shown so that you can see if the toolpath has inadvertently collided with the part. Please refer to your machine tool manual for details. In the Milling environment, if Rapid 3D is not selected, the default method depends on whether the tool is moving: a. Out of the work- the tool moves in the Z+ direction first, then in the workplane. b. Into the work the tool moves in the workplane first, then in the Z-direction.
Note that some machine tool controllers can override the programmed rapid in three dimensions, in a similar manner to cases a and b described above. Please consult your machine tool manual for details. You can also specify a different colour for your rapid moves. Select the Colours (Options menu) command and set the Rapids & Normals parameter. See Also Editing Co-ordinates of Rapid and Feed Moves
591
Warning: Do not use this command while a wire is threaded. Note that the Code Generator may already be configured to cut the wire and re-thread at the new location. See Also Editing Co-ordinates of Rapid and Feed Moves
592
Feed moves can also be used as freehand machining commands where more complex machining cycles are unnecessary. In the milling environment, if 2D Snap is off, the feed move ignores all Z information (for example, from an entity digitise).
593
As you select co-ordinates in the window, the node (a single position) in the toolpath is highlighted in the graphics area. A right click on a co-ordinate in the window calls up the shortcut menu which allows you to edit or delete individual existing co-ordinates or to insert new co-ordinates:
Editing co-ordinates Right click on an existing co-ordinate in the window and select Edit from the shortcut menu. You can now specify new co-ordinates for this position by a using a free digitise, snapping to an entity or using co-ordinate input and/or construction tools. Note that modal values inherited from the previous line are shown as blank. Inserting new co-ordinates Right click on an existing co-ordinate in the window and select Insert from the shortcut menu. You can now specify a new co-ordinate position by a using a free digitise, snapping to an entity or using co-ordinate input and/or construction tools. The new position is inserted before the selected node. If incremental values are input or if only some of the required co-ordinates are given, the inserted node will be based on the position given in the previous node. If a co-ordinate value which has dependants in subsequent co-ordinate nodes or move instructions is changed then those dependent values (incremental or blank) will also update automatically. (Milling only) Use of the 2D Snap option when creating co-ordinates will result in Z values being modal, based on the last specified Z height. Deleting co-ordinates Right click on an existing co-ordinate in the window and select Delete from the shortcut menu. Multiple nodes can be deleted by holding down the shift or control key when selecting a range or multiple individual coordinates. If you select all of the co-ordinates of a rapid or feed move for deletion, the whole instruction will be removed.
If you make changes to the instruction list, the display is not updated automatically. Use the Refresh option to ensure that the instruction list is displayed correctly in the Sequence Window. Note: Double clicking on an a move or individual co-ordinate calls up the rapid/feed move dialog. Checking the Coord Input box allows you to change the position of the toolpath(s) by using free digitises, entity digitises and/or explicit co-ordinates. However, when this option is selected the original toolpath is deleted and you need to re-specify all positions for the toolpath without reference to the originals. If reference co-ordinates are used, the window shows both the reference point and the required offset
594
595
596
Angular to open the dialog below (you can also access this help using the Help button in the dialo
597
Move to Toolchange
Use Move menu Toolchange to open the dialog below.
(You can also access this help using the dialog's Help button.)
598
You use the Move to Home dialog that opens. This includes settings for constraining the move to the X or Y axes, for example. For details click the dialog's Help button or click here (milling version). These settings are remembered for when you next open the dialog (the settings are also remembered from the Move to Toolchange dialog; the same settings appear in both dialogs). The default home position is defined in the Code Generator file, and is specified relative to the Machine Datum and in the orientation of the Initial CPL. To change the Home position, right-click on the sequence name in the Sequence Window and in the shortcut menu that opens click Edit. In the Machine Parameters dialog that opens, switch to the Home tab and make your changes. Note that you cannot change the Home position if the sequence's code generator contains Machine Simulation graphics. Automatic Moves to Home You can opt for moves to the Home position to be inserted automatically. The moves are added to the end of the sequence on generating CNC code for the sequence (but only if the tool is not already at the Home position). Check Options menu Preferences Toolpaths tab Force Rapid to Home.
The move uses the last settings you made in the Move to Home dialog, when creating a move (or that you made in the Move to Toolchange dialog).
599
The Initial Plane is a height at which the tool is safe to move without any risk of colliding with any part of the workpiece, clamps or fixtures. The default value is taken from the Code Generator file. You can set the height of the Initial Plane by specifying a value for the Initial Plane parameter in the Machine Parameters (M-Functions menu command.
Note that while toolchange and home positions are defined in world co-ordinates the initial plane is defined from the initial CPL of the sequence. These two datum points may be different.
600
Freehand Milling
Rather than use specific commands listed under the Cycles menu, for simple machining tasks you may find it easier to use commands for moving the tool at the feed rate. You can use the Feed, Arc and Relative commands under the Move menu. In this example, feed moves have been used to facemill a part:
As an alternative to the Profile (Cycles menu) command automatically positioning the tool, you may want to manually move the tool to the required position. To do this, use the Relative (Move menu cycle. Use an offset value to distance the tool from the profile, select the entity to offset from, and select feed as the type of move. This generates an offset feed move running parallel to an existing profile section. In this example, a tool is moved relative to a piece of geometry:
As the tool moves relative to the geometry, the angle of the geometry does not matter.
601
The solution is to use the Move menu commands Relative, Relative Two or Constrained with Pathtrace Compensation selected. These cycles calculate the real position for the tool and place the tool correctly.
602
603
When using the Constrained command, the move type can be set to either Feed or Rapid. Note, however, that for non-linear moves the output will always be in Feed mode. Rapid moves will be subject to the same dog leg restrictions that apply to all other rapid moves, depending on the characteristics of the selected machine tool.
604
605
606
Selecting a Cycle
Once you have selected a tool and possibly used a rapid move to bring the tool closer to the work, you are ready to select a machining cycle. You can find all machining cycles permitted by the Code Generator file selected for the machining sequence, and the current tool, in the Cycles menu. Individual buttons provide another method of selecting the appropriate cycle (which of these are displayed on the toolbar is also determined by the machining sequence and the current tool).
607
Finishing a Command
The help refers to the action Perform a Finish when describing how to use certain commands. In Edgecam, selecting the right hand mouse button will finish a command. Alternatively, selecting the Enter/Return key will also finish the command. You can also use the Finish command. In the standard configurations this command is not present in the User Interface, so you will need to add the command button to a toolbar or menu yourself. The command is in the Input Options category.
608
Compensation Controller
Left/Right
Toolpath co-ordinates are to be output, but Design Intent co-ordinates are to be the tool is instructed to use the contents of output, but the tool is instructed to use an offset store. contents of an offset store. Not recommended, as this changes the actual size of the final component.
Note that Radius Compensation is also available as a command from the Cycles menu.
See Also Using No Compensation Using Controller Compensation Using Pathtrace Compensation
609
How you set the compensation depends on the particular cycle. First check the cycle dialog and if it contains 'Compensation' settings, use these. If not use Radius Compensation in the Tooling menu. For further help click the dialogs' Help button.
610
Displaying Toolpaths
You can use these methods to control how toolpaths appear on the graphics screen: The colour for the toolpath is set by its tool. When specifying or editing the tool, set Colour in the More tab of the tool's dialog. (You can also specify different colours and styles for different parts of the toolpath (rapids for example); in the Options menu click Colours to open the Colour Configuration dialog.) Use the Mode (View menu) command. Switch on the Simulation toolbar.
611
612
The top slider shows the progress of the simulation throughout the instruction list. The current cycle or command is displayed (Profiling in this example). You can narrow the selection to a smaller portion off the instruction list by dragging the slider while holding down the Shift key, then click Zoom. Click Zoom again to return to the entire instruction list. You can control the speed of the simulation by moving the bottom slider, left to slow down and right to speed up. The number to the right of the bottom slider acts as a multiplier to the speed set by the slider. Use the buttons to the left of the number to change it. Click the Constant button to activate it and set the simulated tool/wire to move at a fixed rate. Click the button again to de-activate it, when the tool will move at a rate proportional to the rates generated for the cycle.
Please note that the simulation of toolpaths in Four Axis Turning cycles is only correct when Constant is OFF. Using the Stop button halts the simulation for the current tool only.
613
2. Choose the Rendered option from the Display parameter on the General tab.
614
615
The way in which depths are use can vary between cycles. Any unique information is included in the topics for each specific cycle.
616
As the illustrations show, when checked, you specify values that are incremental from key elevations of the solid or feature to be machined. For example, an associative level will be incremental from the top-most point (highest Z value) of the model you select. When not checked, you specify absolute values. (Note that for features, the 'key elevations' are given by their Level, Depth and Bottom properties.) Note: These associative parameters are not available when 3D curve profiling.
617
618
619
Specifying Pockets
In the Roughing, Plunge Roughing, Profiling and Flat Land Finishing cycles, one or more closed profiles can be selected and they are automatically interpreted as pockets; that is the inside of the profile will be machined. You need to manually set the Level and Depth parameters. When just machining pockets using the Roughing and Profiling cycles, set Stock Type to None. When just machining pockets using the Flat Land Finishing cycle, set Boss to unchecked.
620
621
622
623
Effect (Spindle rotation is Clockwise) Tool cuts on the left of the profile Tool cuts on right of the profile
See Also Climb Milling Conventional Milling Selecting a Mill Type of <None>
624
Climb Milling
Caution: Using this on a hard material could damage the cutter. Use Climb milling for soft materials such as aluminium. The tool moves along the left of the profile, so that the cutter rotates like a wheel rolling along the ground. Climb is often referred to as Upcut when wood routing.
625
Conventional Milling
Caution: Using this on such a soft material could weld swarf to the surface of the material, resulting in a rough-looking finish. Use Conventional milling for hard materials such as steel. As the tool moves along the right of the profile, the cutter rotates so that the cutting forces on the teeth are increased gradually. Each tooth starts with a shallow cut that gets thicker until the tooth leaves the material. This action minimises the stress on the cutter teeth and the material. Conventional is often referred to as Downcut when wood routing.
626
627
Above the Retract plane, the tool rapids to the Retract plane. Below the Retract plane, the tool rapids up to the Clearance plane and then rapids down to the Retract plane.
The tool then feeds down to the Depth plane, and feeds into position at depth. For more information, see Using Ramp Moves. See Also Selecting a Start Point Automatically Retracting the Tool
628
629
630
Step Angle (Helical only) The helix is made up of straight line move segments. Specify the amount by which to change the angle after each segment. The default is 30 degrees. Angle (Zigzag only) Specify the vertical angle of the ramp, with 90 degrees being a vertical move. Length (Zigzag only) Specify the length of each ramp segment, which must be a positive value. Feedrate Specify the horizontal cutting speed of the tool. Speed Specify the rotational speed of the tool. Start Level Specify the absolute height at which the move is to start. Direction (Helical Only) Specify whether the helical move is to be Clockwise or Counterclockwise. Name Specify a named cycle. The approach move will be made to the start of the named cycle. This is mutually exclusive with the Replace parameter.
631
For further information on the usage of the different stock types, please click on the links below: None 3D Model Thickness Bounding Box Profile The Stock Offset is a 3D offset that can optionally be applied to all stock types, but is required for the Thickness type. Rest Roughing automatically uses to same stock type as the previous roughing cycle.
632
633
2D Example
3D Example
634
Note that digitised Stock/Fixtures (Geometry menu) can only select solids. Therefore Edgecam Simulator cannot display surface or STL stock.
635
The Stock Offset is a 3D offset that can optionally be applied to all stock types, but is required for the Thickness type.
636
2D Profile Cycle
Use the Contouring tab of the 2D Profile cycle to make multiple passes around the profile. (You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
637
You can also use contour walls to control the interpretation of wireframe geometry. For example you might want to use the two (green) wireframe profiles to produce a pocket within a pocket. Normally however the inner profile is interpreted as the top of a boss, so you need to force the interpretation by adding the two (blue) contour entities, with the outer entity only reaching down to the level of the inner profile:
In this example the contour entities have been added to force an interpretation of the profiles into complex nested pockets and bosses (note that the tops and bottoms of the contour entities must coincide, where two entities define the same floor, for example):
638
A rounding error of 0.0005mm can cause the arc to bulge by up to 0.317mm on a 50mm radius.
639
Exact Start/End
Rounded Start/End
The error is monitored, and to prevent it becoming unacceptable a switch to IJK output is enforced. This solution is only implemented in code generators based on Version 9.75, or later, templates.
640
Containment Boundaries
Some milling cycles prompt you to 'Digitise containment boundary entities' (see the help on the individual cycles, which link back to this topic). Only the portion of the toolpath lying within the containment boundaries is generated. Right-click (for example) to carry on without using containment boundaries. You can digitise closed loop geometry (lines/curves) or Edge Loop features. The Containment is in the XY plane, so the boundaries are projected in Z, to form a surface within which to contain the toolpath. The cycles' Tool Control options allow you to control which part of the tool is constrained within the boundary (see the dialog's help for details). Use containment boundaries for example: To avoid clamps. To limit the toolpath only to those areas that need machining, as in this profiling example:
Instead of feature based machining, where the geometry is too complex to be found as features (select the whole solid to be machined, rather than a feature - the example below uses an Edge Loop feature).
641
642
Moving at High Feedrate in Surface Cycles Use a high feedrate instead of rapid moves when optimised is selected for long link moves to ensure that the tool is moved in a straight line and no unresolved or dog-leg moves are produced. You can define the value for the high feedrate within the Code Wizard or by editing the machine parameters and specifying the Max High Feed value.
643
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
644
2D Profile Cycle
Use Mill Cycles menu 2D Profile to open the dialog below.
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
645
Planar Milling
'Planar Milling' refers to cycles which can only operate on flat planes, as opposed to surface or solid based cycles. Use these commands for driving the tool on or around a profile: 2D Profile (Mill Cycles menu) Move menu Relative for precise tool positioning relative to the profile's geometry. Make sure you have read the methods for chaining and branching. Use these commands or methods for pocketing and stock removal: Facemill (Mill Cycles menu) Freehand machining (Move menu commands).
Use these operations to combine several machining commands (see Operations in Milling for details): Facemilling (Operations menu)
646
2D Profile Cycle
Use the Advaced tab of the 2D Profile cycle to make settings such as dynamic billeting and engraving. (You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
647
648
649
650
Hole Cycle
Use Mill Cycles menu Hole Cycle to machine holes.
Here are details on using the cycle, and on the cycle's settings (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
651
652
653
654
Thread Milling
Edgecams Thread Mill (Mill Cycles menu) command allows you to create a thread up or down the vertical axis of the machine. The cycle supports straight, taper, multi-start and arc lead-in/lead-out options. You can also machine multiple threads within the same command. Note that the thread units can differ from the units used for the rest of the part. If you get an unexpected result from this cycle, check the values you used for the cycle parameters. This example shows four views of a single-start external thread with an arc lead in and out. Normally, you start defining the thread by selecting an arc entity. This arc represents the major diameter of an external thread, or the minor diameter of an internal thread (see example). You can also digitise a point that represents the centre of the thread (when using the thread milling cycle with hole features for example). In this case, use the Major/Minor Diameter fields on the Thread tab to specify the major/minor diameter for the thread. On the Depth tab, you can use the Level and Depth parameters to define the start and end heights for the thread. Alternatively, depths may be specified as distances above and below the defined geometry using the Upper and Lower Distance parameters. All measurements are taken from the bottom of the thread, so if you define an overlapping tool, the system mills a thread above this height. On the Thread tab, the Thread Side parameter sets the thread as internal or external, and the Hand of Thread parameter sets the thread as left or right-handed. See Defining the Thread. The thread's direction of cut depends on these parameter values and is explained under Determining the Thread Mill Cut Direction. See Also Defining the Thread Making Single Start Threads Making Multiple Starts Cutting One Pitch at a Time Leading In and Out in Thread Milling How the Thread Mill Cycle Calculates the Feed Rate Compensating for the Tool Radius in Thread Milling Specifying Tooling Parameters for Thread Mill
655
Pitch of Thread Specifies the pitch of the thread (the pitch is the distance travelled down the axis of the thread when the thread has rotated through 360). Pitch is NOT the same as the lead of the thread, which is calculated as follows: Lead = Pitch of thread x Number of starts. Number of Starts Specifies the number of starts for the thread. If you want more than one start, the starts will be equally spaced around the top of the thread.
Start Angle Specifies the start angle of the initial thread. The default is 0. The angle is measured from the direction of the X axis anticlockwise in the direction of the Y axis.
656
Thread Side Selects an Internal or External thread. Hand of Thread Selects a Right or Left-Handed thread. See Also Determining the Thread Mill Cut Direction Cutting a Tapered Thread
657
658
659
660
661
If you do set Change Start Height, the tool leads in at a higher position at the original Start Angle and starts to thread. Here the start point is half a pitch higher but at the same XY position as the first start point (see example).
662
If you mark the Maximum Cut 360 parameter box, when the tool has completed a full 360 (one pitch) of thread, it leads out and then leads in before cutting another pitch of the thread.
663
See Also Using the Arc Radius (Arc 1) Method Using the Distance (Direct) Method Using the Arc Distance (Arc 2) Method
664
665
666
667
Where: fr = New feed rate fi = Input feed rate cthread = Thread (arc selected) circumference ctool = Toolpath (centre line) circumference
668
669
670
Roughing Cycle
You use the Roughing (Mill Cycles menu) command to produce a gouge-protected roughing cycle, using a concentric or lacing clearance pattern on 2D geometry as well as features, surfaces, solids and STL models.
The cycle includes an option to select a number of points that define the entry point for each region. The Approach Type modifier on the Approach tab offers you the ability to start the Roughing cycle from pre-drilled hole(s) and set a preference for Ramp or Helical approach. The cycle has been optimised for high speed machining, including tangential links between passes and optimised retract moves. The cycle includes the following features: Associative depth parameters. Intermediate slices to reduce the size of the step left by the roughing cycle. Flat Land detection to machine down to the specified Z Offset from the top of the island(s) and/ or the base of pockets. Draft Wall definition with optional blend radii. Clean Up Stepover for the last pass at each Z level that is machined. Corner Type option to control the behaviour of the cycle on sharp corners. Close Open Pockets option to treat all pockets as closed pockets (concentric strategy only). Rest Roughing to remove material left behind by the roughing cycle. Trochoidal milling in full width cuts. Optional high speed corners.
See Also Using Adaptive Feedrates - Roughing Cycle Controlling the Approach Moves in the Roughing Cycle Selecting the Approach Type Selecting the Link Method Avoiding Clamps and Fixtures Intelligent Lead and Link Moves
671
672
In a narrow channel there may not be room for a trochoidal cut, in this case the channel is excluded from the cycle. When using Trochoidal milling the tool cannot run as tightly into corners. These areas can be cut with the Rest Roughing cycle.
673
Use the 'Increment(%)' value to control the sensitivity of the feedrate adjustment. Use small values for fine adjustment, at the expense of bulkier CNC code and slower cycle processing. Use large values for coarse adjustments, with less bulky CNC code and faster cycle processing. Note that adaptive feedrates are only applied to moves in XY. They are not applied to any 'end cutting' plunge (ramp) moves. See how this is indicated by the different colour for the helical part of the toolpath in this example.
674
675
676
Intermediate Slices
Intermediate slices may be used to reduce the size of the step left by the roughing cycle. Only the step region is machined for intermediate slices. Intermediate slices will always be cut from bottom to top within each cut increment to reduce unnecessary cutting. This method roughs and semi-roughs the part in one cycle while allowing the tool to cut to its maximum depth for the main increments. Component
Intermediate Slices
677
We recommend to leave the option unchecked when working with large surface parts with no flat areas to increase processing speed.
678
When using the Lace strategy the clean up stepover is limited to 20% to avoid leaving behind pegs of material.
679
680
This example shows the toolpath with the Close Open Pockets option checked:
681
682
Rest Roughing
You can machine only the left-over material from a previous Roughing cycle by checking Rest Rough (in the General tab). The left-over material may be the result of a large tool that could not reach into the corners, for example. When rest-roughing: The 'Stock Type' is the same as the cycle being rest roughed. These parameters cannot be modified: Tolerance, Offset, Stock Type, Stock Offset. You can use separate boundaries for each rest-rough, so you can rest-rough different areas with different tools/cycles (see an example where there is a separate green boundary/toolpath for round the central boss, and red boundary/toolpath for the corners....). In the example a 'cascade' has been prevented - see below. You can 'cascade' rest roughs so a rest rough removes material left be a previous rest rough. There, with no limit to the number of rest roughs cascaded. To prevent the cascade (see the 'separate boundaries' example above), check Digitise Roughing, which allows you to specify any Roughing cycle to rest rough (rather than the previous (rest) Roughing cycle in the sequence, which is the default). Rough
Rest Rough
683
Less CNC code. All toolpath corners have an angle from the profile, however sharp. Higher machine stresses. Increased toolpath length. Toolspeed reduced. Increased cycle time.
Note The final pass does not have introduced rounded corners. This always follows the profile, subject to the Minimum Radius setting (0 in the case of the illustration). The introduced corner radius is not fixed. It is a percentage of the % Stepover setting for the cycle.
684
Calculating the Ramp Angle The cycle is capable of calculating the maximum ramp angle based on the tool geometry. This is achieved by specifying the Maximum Plunge Depth of the tool which used with the Tool diameter to calculate the maximum Ramp Angle. Click here to view a diagram illustrating this modifier.
Centre Cutting Tool A check box on the Approach tab denotes whether a tool is capable of centre cutting. i.e. plunge cutting. The state of this modifier can affect the ramp moves. Non-centre cutting tools are never allowed to plunge cut and will use the specified Ramp Angle or the calculated Ramp Angle (whichever is the shallowest). Any pocket area that cannot apply a ramp will no be machined. Centre cutting tools can plunge by the Maximum Plunge Depth. The tool will only plunge the ramp move cannot be applied.
Tip: To force the tool to plunge cut set the Ramp Angle to 90 degrees, check the Centre Cutting tool modifier and leave the Maximum Plunge Depth field blank.
Maximum Plunge Depth This modifier specifies the maximum distance in the Z-axis that the tool can plunge feed. The value will be used to check that the ramp move does not exceed this value. The maximum plunge is assumed to be equal to the Cut Increment when modifier is left blank. Note on specifying the Approach Type and Maximum Plunge Depth If Maximum Plunge Depth is set to 0 the tool cannot plunge or ramp. Therefore, the cycle can only machine external areas or pocket areas that have pre-drilled holes. Approaching from the outside The XY Standoff modifier allows you to specify the distance between the stock and the tool when approaching from outside. Previously, a hard coded value of 1mm (or 0.03937 inches) was used. See Also Selecting the Approach Type for the Roughing Cycle Selecting the Automatic Approach Type Selecting the Link Method
685
Automatic - The cycle automatically applies an appropriate ramp method. See Selecting the Automatic Approach Type. Pre-Drill - Specify a pre-defined drill point as the point of entry. The tool will plunge down the nearest hole to the start point in a region. When no valid point is available the tool will ramp instead. To ensure that a valid point is available, create a point or a set of points that represent the XY position of the hole at full diameter depth. Prior to using the Roughing cycle, drill the points you have created. When choosing a tool for the drill cycle, we would recommend you select the Full Diameter Depth Type option on the More tab of the tool change dialog. The tool will rapid down the hole to the desired depth unless it is within the safe distance of the pre-drill point where it will feed to depth from the safe distance above the point. If Feed When Plunging is checked the tool will feed down the hole at the Plunge Feedrate.
The point represents the XY position of the hole and the full diameter depth.
Helix - Helical approach to the pocket. The cycle will always attempt to place a helical approach in pocket areas before any other approach type. Ramp - Ramp approach to the pocket. The cycle will always attempt to place a ramp approach in pocket areas before any other approach type. If the Maximum Plunge Depth is set to 0 the tool cannot plunge or ramp. Therefore, the cycle can only machine external areas or pocket areas that have pre-drilled holes.
686
687
Plunge Roughing
Plunge Roughing is machining away stock in a series of Z axis plunges.
Plunge Roughing is primarily used for machining pockets and external stock - in deep mould and dies for example. Long tools gain stability from a cutting force directed up the tool axis rather than as a side force. Here are some key points, with associated tab indicated (if appropriate): Material is removed as a series of concentric passes (offsets of the boss profile for example). The tool works around the pass with repeated plunges, stepping sideways by the 'Recommended Stepover(%)' distance between plunges. Once the pass is complete the tool advances by the 'Maximum Forward Step' distance (General tab), to start the next pass. Note that two step values are constrained to maximum values within the cycle to avoid upstands of material being left between plunges. Maximum recommended Forward Distance is limited by insert length. The cycle is not optimised for centre cutting tools (though you could use such a tool). For example: The advance between plunges cannot be more than the tool radius. You need an approach strategy, such as a pre-drilled hole, for pocket regions (you need a centre point defined, though this need not correspond to an actual hole). (Approach tab) The depth of a plunge cannot be deeper than the previous plunge within a region (so to rough out a doughnut you would need to machine the outside working inwards, then the hole in the middle working outwards). To reduce tool wear and breakage, a 'Lead Out' move pulls the tool back from the cutting face before the Z-retract. You can set the angle (from the XY plane) and length of the Lead Out (Approach tab). Roughing out a channel that's the same width of the tool is problematic as the Lead Out (see above) would be obstructed by the cusps left. You can use Minimum Radius (General tab) to prevent the tool entering narrow channels. (You could also set '0' for the length.) The depth of the cycle is the same as other cycles (specified as a value or derived from model geometry). However full-depth plunges cannot always be made (for example because of swarf clearance problems in a pocket). In this case you can set a Cut Increment value, when there will be multiple passes round the profile, each increasing in depth by the cut increment. (Depth tab). Using the 'Floor Approach' settings, the feedrate can be reduced towards the bottom of the plunge to compensate for the increased cutting area of angled inserts.(Approach tab).
688
689
690
691
Profiling Cycle
You use the Profiling Cycle to produce a gouge-protected profiling cycle based on wireframe geometry, surface geometry and STL models, solid geometry or features. See Using the Profiling Cycle for more information. The cycle finishes the selected geometry in a series of XY profiles down the Z axis.
Main Cycle features include: Associative depth parameters. Multiple passes. Flat Land detection. Common interface for 2D and 3D input. Integrated Cutter Radius Compensation. Gouge protected leads and links. Automatic & Manual start/end point control. Minimum Radius adjustment. Corner Type option to control the behaviour of the cycle on sharp corners. Nearest neighbour & cut by region. Helical profiling. Containment boundaries that limit the cycle to a portion of the selected surface(s). Optional minimum and maximum contact angles. Check Surfaces, which protect surfaces from machining. 3D curved profile support (Wireframe). Also profiles that are non-parallel to the CPL. Shallow area finishing. Undercut Machining. Exact Prismatic Profiling.
692
Clipping to Depth. As this Profiling cycle includes 2D options, it effectively supercedes the old Profile cycle. We recommend the Profiling cycle as it offers more features and has a user interface that is consistent with other recent cycles.
693
694
If Mill Type is Climb or Conventional, the tool performs a constant cut strategy.
695
696
697
Note that this can only be used with these geometry types: Wireframe. 2D (prismatic) features. 2D (prismatic) solid geometry. For this geometry you also need to check the 'Prismatic Geometry' box (also in the General tab). 2D features with contouring. When 3D curve profiling the setting is fixed at 'None'. Compensation None - The output toolpath is for the centre of the tool. No radius compensation codes are output specifying Left or Right for any further radius compensation applied at the controller. Centre Line (2D only) - The output toolpath is for the centre of the tool. Codes (typically G41/42) are output specifying Left or Right for any further radius compensation applied at the controller. (These will typically be compensations for wear on the tool.) Geometry (2D only) - The output toolpath is for the edge of the tool. Codes (typically G41/42) are output specifying Left or Right, for compensation to be applied at the controller to calculate the centre toolpath. Note that the toolpath is not simply the entity or feature outline - the toolpath will not contain internal corners with a smaller radius than that of the tool, for example. Note: You are recommended to specify tools with a diameter equal to, or larger, than is likely to be used on the machine. This is to avoid controller problems, and problems with the machined part not being as simulated in Edgecam. As a further precaution you can specify a minimum radius, as explained below in the section Possible Errors with Controller Compensation. CRC Register This is the machine tool controller CRC offset register. Applying & Removing Cutter Compensation When applying and removing cutter radius compensation (CRC) you must follow the rules of the machine tool and specify your lead moves accordingly. Most controllers expect CRC to be applied on a perpendicular linear approach move. This move is generated automatically by Edgecam when Centerline or Geometry is specified. It can be overridden by specifying a perpendicular value in the cycle lead parameters. The length of the automatically generated move is specified in the code generator machine section. A Radius Compensation factor of 1.5 is the default. CRC is applied (G41/G42) on the first linear lead in move and cancelled (G40) on the last linear lead out move.
698
Centerline (G41/42) The default perpendicular lead length is 0.5 * cutter radius.
None No automatic leads are generated and no CRC codes are output. Toolpath is centerline only. Possible Errors with Controller Compensation For 'Geometry' cycles, the controller applies a compensation offset based on the tool radius the operator specifies. The offset reduces internal corner radii in the toolpath, and if the operator specifies the same tool radius that was specified in Edgecam, or a larger one, zero or negative corner radii will produced, possibly causing an error condition. The example below could cause the controller to error. It shows the situation in Edgecam; the part outline is in green and the tool centre path in yellow. It is when the controller re-creates the tool centre path that the problems may arise.
699
To help in this situation you can use the Minimum Radius parameter (see Minimum Radius for full details). This would make the corners less sharp, reducing the possibility of controller errors.
700
When merging sequences in multiplane milling it is possible that digitised start and end points will move. To ensure this doesn't occur your start and end points should be positioned in a defined view, not in "dynamic". Alternatively use one of the automatic start and end controls.
Digitising the Start and End Points In general the start and end points are initially positioned at the profile edge start or mid point that is nearest to where you clicked to digitise (select) the profile. Here for example, the start and end points are positioned half-way along a side of the pocket, near to the digitise that selected the pocket.
You then see prompts to digitise the start and end points, when you can click to select them and drag them to new positions on the profile. In some cases you can also click to select the side of the profile to be machined. Depending on the circumstances, there are constraints on how you can move the start and end points. When machining an open wireframe for example, the start point is automatically moved to one end of the profile or the other, according to which side you select, and the Mill Type setting (Climb, Conventional or Optimised). When profiling a surface, there is no initial start/end point that you can move. You need a point or line to digitise, and the start/end point is positioned near this.
701
The full set of strategies are: Round (default setting) Tool radius roll over which maintains tool contact with the corner. In some cases this causes the corner to be eroded Sharp Replaces the roll over with a sharp corner. The tool looses contact with the corner.
Twizzle - Replaces the roll over with a twizzle move. The Twizzle Radius modifier specifies the radius of the twizzle. Where corners include a very narrow internal angle, the twizzle is omitted.
702
High Speed - Replaces the roll over with a rounded corner with a radius of 75% of the tool's radius. This helps maintain tool velocity.
For the corner strategy to take effect on 2D Profiling the Corner Type (Contouring tab) modifier must be set to Sharp.
703
704
Angle, Radius & Length The length value is applied tangentially to the arc.
Angle & Radius, Length & Perpendicular Perpendicular generates an additional right angled linear lead. If compensation is set to centerline or controller the perpendicular move is generated automatically.
705
Links applied to the Profiling cycle Link moves are moves joining a lead-out to a lead-in. There are long links and short links. Long links are made at rapid or high feed rate and short links are always at feed. The distance to determine a short link can be specified in the cycle link parameters. If the distance from the last lead out move to the next lead in move is equal or less than the short link distance a short link will be applied. Long links When the long links are set to Clearance, the tool retracts to the clearance plane between each pass.
When the long links are set to optimized the tool retracts to the last depth of cut and moves to the start of the next lead in move at high feedrate.
Short Links
706
A Step link feeds across in XY to the next lead in position and then feeds down in Z to the next depth of cut.
A Straight link feeds directly from the lead out position to the next lead in position.
A Smooth link generates a smooth transition from the lead out position to the next lead in move.
707
When the Cut by Region parameter is not checked, all profiles on a level are machined before moving on the next level.
708
Nearest Neighbour
Please note that the availability of this option is licence dependant. The profiles will be machined in an order to give the shortest path based on always machining the next nearest profile. If this is not checked the profiles will be machined in the order they were digitized. This is not applicable to 3D, since all toolpaths are nearest neighbour. The digitised order has no influence on a 3D toolpath.
709
Helical Profiling
To implement Helical Profiling check Helical in the cycle's Depth tab. A spiral toolpath is generated ensuring the tool is always in contact with the material eliminating potential marks on the component made through leading in and leading out. This has the additional benefit of reduced cycle times because lead moves are not required at each level. The pitch of the helix is controlled by the cut increment. You can use the option to implement Helical Boring.
Check NC Output Smoothing in the General tab for helical arc moves (typically G2/G3) in the NC output. Helical Arcs must be supported in the code generator (in the Code Wizard you set the 'Helical Arc Capability' machine parameter). We only recommend this for vertically-walled components to prevent problems caused by the constantly changing arc radius. Note: Helical Profiling is not available when 3D curve profiling.
710
3D Curve Profiling
You can machine wireframe profiles that vary in height (Z value) along their length, these are: Profiles that curve in three dimensions. Planar profiles in a plane non-parallel to the CPL. To machine these profiles you check the 3D Profiling box in the General tab. This would be useful in removing the flashing from moulded components, for example. Note that 3D Profiling is only available with Model Type (in the cycle dialog's General tab) set to Wireframe. Tip: when double-clicking to select a profile of adjoining entities in 3D, remember you will probably need to hold down the Ctrl key, for more details see Selecting Adjoining Entities by Chaining. The height of the cycle's z-level passes is dependent on the Level modifier, and normally you specify this as an absolute value. When 3D curve profiling however the height cannot be fixed, so you specify Level as an incremental offset from the height of the profile. (So specifying a Level and Depth of 0 produces a toolpath that follows the profile at the same height, wherever the profile is positioned vertically.)
Retract and Depth are relative to Level, so they are influenced by the 3D Profiling setting. Clearance is absolute, so it is not affected. Otherwise, when 3D curve profiling you use the cycle in the same way, apart from: Offset parameter This becomes a purely XY offset. CRC Compensation and CRC register settings These become unavailable. The toolpath is always for the bottom centre of the tool. The toolpath follows the geometry, offset by the tool radius in the XY plane (as viewed down the tool axis). (This applies to any wireframe profiling.) Lead Moves The cycle dialog's Lead tab modifiers operate as if the profile is flattened into a flat XY plane. Modifiers made unavailable by setting 3D Profiling General tab Z Offset (use the Level value to set an offset from the profile height). Minimum Radius. Compensation (permanently set to 'None'). Depth tab
711
Cusp Height Helical Detect Flat Lands. Control tab All the modifiers. Start/End tab Start End Overlap Contouring All the modifiers
712
Undercut Profiling
When using the Profiling cycle you can machine undercuts. To do this you need to: When specifying the tool, in the Toolchange dialog set a Lollipop or T-Slot type (General tab), along with an 'Undercut Distance' value (More tab). Alternatively you can select an appropriate undercutting tool from the ToolStore. When creating the cycle, in the cycle dialog's General tab set Model Type to Surface or Solid. Also in the General tab, check Undercut (you cannot undercut and rest profile, so this makes the Rest Profiling tab settings become unavailable). When using an undercut tool, boundary entities can be '3D'; that is they can curve in three dimensions, or lie in a plane that is not parallel to the CPL. The toolpath will undercut up to a maximum of the specified Undercut Distance. This means that where the geometry demands a larger undercut, passes are still made but material is left unmachined.
713
Rest Profiling
You can set the Profiling cycle to only machine material left by previous machining. This is mainly for 2D situations, as in this example where the tool rapids down to machine just the corners of the profile (which the previous tool was tool large to reach into):
Previous Toolpath
Rest Toolpath
You enable rest profiling by specifying values in the Rest Profiling tab. You specify the Previous Tool Diameter and Previous Minimum Radius, which are then used to calculate where the leftover material lies. Note that: The values need not apply to any actual machining, they are valid even if there is no previous machining in the sequence. You cannot rest profile if Undercut is checked in the General tab (the Rest Profiling tab settings become unavailable). There is only one pass round the profile. If this does not remove all the rest material (for example if the rest tool radius is too small), this material is left in place. The rest cycle will start machining where the 'previous tool' was calculated to stop being able to follow the profile. As this calculation is affected by the cycle tolerance, you might want to specify an overlap onto the previous machining, using the Start and End profile extensions (cycle dialog's Start/End tab).
714
When machining nearly flat surfaces, the limiting factor is the cycle tolerance. Profiles will not be produced where the vertical distance between levels is less than the specified cycle Tolerance value. Cusp Height is a useful method of controlling finish, but on the example notice that, although the handle of the part is now well-defined by the cycle, extra passes have been generated around the larger surface. These passes will not add anything to the surface finish but will extend the total cycle time. Using these parameters can result in a trade-off between overall surface finish and cycle time.
In these cases it may be better to either use Finish Shallow, Contact Angles in conjunction with Parallel Lace cycle as shown below.
715
See Also Finish Shallow Areas Using Contact Angles Using Boundaries
716
717
718
719
720
Please be aware that at external corners the 3D offset can cause the toolpath to stop short as the offset protects part of the surface. The example toolpath on the left below shows how the lower check surface prevents the tool from machining the entire horizontal face. (The lower check surface is being used to prevent its face from being gouged by a tool roll-round.) We would recommend that the lower check surface be de-selected, and 'Ignore External Edges' used instead to prevent the gouge, as shown on the right.
The illustration above involves a Parallel Lace cycle. Here is the same point illustrated using a Profiling cycle:
721
* see below
* Note that a vertical surface cannot be machined if a check surface is selected that is adjacent to the top edge. This means that the cycle could not machine the surface marked in the illustration while the sloping surface is a check surface.
722
As the cycle is not designed to detect shallow areas the flat lands must be perfectly flat. For solids, you could use Render by Slope to indicate the flat regions. You identify the shapes to be machined in a similar way to the Profiling and Roughing cycles. Using wireframe geometry for example, you specify a level and depth value, and only the flat regions within this range are machined. You specify how to interpret the geometry by checking on unchecking the Boss option. This interpretation is necessary because the tops of bosses (and islands), and the bottoms of pockets are treated differently. When cutting a top, the tool can make a cutting pass that extends beyond the edge of the flat region. When cutting a bottom, the tool can only make cutting passes wholly contained within the flat region, as otherwise they would contact the walls of the pocket. You can base the cycle on Wireframe, Surface or Solid (also includes features) geometry. The cycle applies one of three strategies, concentric, lace and finish pass only. For further information on these strategies, please click here. Containment boundaries are fully supported and enable the cycle to be restricted to specified areas. The cycle employs standard Level and Depth settings to control which levels are to be machined:
The Minimum Width parameter controls the minimum width of flats to be detected, for example if this is set to 2mm, flats narrower than 2mm will be ignored. The cycle offers standard offset control with an additional stand off distance. You can either specify a threedimensional toolpath offset from the surface and/or an XY stand off distance. The Finish Pass strategy is used to finish off the component walls. The cycle will cut by region, using nearest next calculation. The default approach move into each region is horizontal. Please note that the cycle does not support a cut increment as it is intended as a finishing cycle. "Rest Machining" allows you to machine rest material areas that have been left by a larger tool in a previous machining cycle (not limited to Flat Land Finishing, previous cycle may have been Roughing or Parallel Lace for example). See Rest Machining in the Flat Land Finishing Cycle.
723
An Close Open Pockets option allows you to (concentric strategy only). See Close Open Pockets in the Flat Land Finishing Cycle. To use the Flat Land Finishing cycle Note on using Flat Land Finishing With Corner Radius Tools See Also Intelligent Lead and Link Moves Specifying Pockets Using Wireframe Specifying Pockets with Islands Using Wireframe Specifying Male Parts Using Wireframe Defining Draft Walls
724
Lace - Generates a linear lacing pattern across flat faces, at the angle specified, followed by a finish pass:
725
726
727
1. Select the Flat Land Finishing (Mill Cycles menu) 2. Set the parameters for the cycle and click OK.
command.
3. Select the surfaces you want to machine and perform a Finish. 4. Digitise containment boundaries if required and perform a Finish. Edgecam now produces the toolpath. Note on using Flat Land Finishing with corner radius tools
728
729
This example shows the toolpath with the Close Open Pockets option checked:
730
731
Specifying a larger corner radius on your tool will force the Flat Land Finishing cycle to machine closer to the wall.
732
Surface Milling
Edgecams surface milling module can simultaneously control the XYZ linear axes of the machine tool. Exact mathematical definitions are used to store and display Edgecam surfaces. The accuracy of a surface milling toolpath therefore depends entirely on the value you specify for the Tolerance parameter for that cycle. Also see Notes on Surface Creation. Operations menu commands Cycles menu commands
See Also Roughing Cycle Parallel Lace Cycle Profiling Cycle Constant Cusp Finishing Rest Finishing Cycle Flat Land Finishing Projection Cycles Pencil Mill Cycle Feeding the Tool Over Parametric Surfaces
733
Parallel Lace includes in-built gouge protection, which makes it the ideal cycle to machine multiple surfaces with. You can use this cycle for roughing (by specifying values for the Level, Cut Increment and Safe Distance parameters), semi-roughing or finishing the surface. The Parallel Lace cycle applies lead moves to all levels when a Cut Increment has been specified. You can also use a bounding entity to limit the cycle to a portion of the selected surface(s). This cycle works best with flat or gently curved parts. When machining parts with significant bulges and depressions, consider using the Profiling cycle instead. The Control tab offers a number of modifiers that can be used to optimise the Parallel Lace toolpath You can choose whether to automatically maintain 'Up Mill' or 'Down Mill' cutting whatever the angle of the surface. See Choosing Up or Down Mill in the Parallel Lace Cycle. You can restrict the toolpath generated by the cycle by specifying minimum and maximum contact angles. See Using Contact Angles. You can specify Check Surfaces, which are surfaces that you don't want to be machined. The Exclude Flat Areas option allows you to exclude flat areas. These can be machined separately using the Flat Land Finishing cycle. See Excluding Flat Areas in the Parallel Lace Cycle. Use the Perpendicular Lace option to re-machine steeper areas. See Using the Perpendicular Lace Option. Improve the lead in/out conditions by removing any rollovers on the external edge of the part. See Ignoring External Edges. The tool normally rolls around any external corner and maintains contact. In some cases this causes the corner to be eroded, so Edgecam offers several corner control strategies. See Corner Strategies in the Parallel Lace Cycle. You can 'clip to depth'. You can contain the toolpath within boundary geometry.
To use the Parallel Lace cycle You should have one or more surfaces ready to machine. 1. Select the Parallel Lace command. 2. Set the parameters for the cycle and click OK. 3. Select the surfaces you want to mill and then perform a Finish. 4. Digitise any boundary entities to limit the extent of the cycle and then perform a Finish. The system now produces the toolpath.
Also See
734
735
In general, an Up Mill cut is best, so that the cutting is done by the side of the tool. To maintain Up Mill cutting along the stripe, it is broken into opposite-direction portions.
However, Up Mill cutting towards a steep face may overload the tool, so in this case Down Mill is better.
The break points in the stripes are always at the lowest or highest points in the stripe. For flat high planes, the break is at one end or other of the flat. For flat low planes, the break is in the middle of the flat. You can prevent unwanted breaks on slight undulations using the Filter Angle setting. A region must be tilted by more than this angle from the horizontal, along the direction of the stripe, to cause a break. Typical values would be 10-20 degrees.
736
737
738
Use the Strategy parameter on the Control tab of the Parallel Lace cycle to choose the appropriate corner strategy: Round Tool radius rollover that maintains tool contact with the corner.
Sharp Replaces the rollover with a sharp corner. The toolpath extends past the corner until it intersects with the next section. Twizzle - Replaces the round with a twizzle move.
High Speed - Replaces the rollover with a blended corner. The toolpath extends past the corner until it intersects with the next section, where it is then blended with a radius of 50% of the tool radius to maintain toolpath tangency and will help the tool maintain its velocity.
739
740
741
742
See Also Intelligent Lead and Link Moves Using Contact Angles Clipping to Depth
743
744
The drive curve is a single entity, which can be a line, arc, continuous or curve.
745
746
Here are details on using the cycle, and on the cycle's settings (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
747
748
Projection Cycles
Edgecam provides a series of cycles for surface machining, based on projecting existing or new 2D cycles onto surfaces. Depending on your licence, these cycles are available:
Project Toolpath Finishing cycle Project Boundary Collapse Finishing produced by projecting an existing Planar cycle cycle produced by projecting an Areaclearance onto one or more surfaces. cycle onto one or more surfaces*. Project Flow Curves Finishing cycle Project Circular Pattern Finishing cycle produced by projecting a Lace cycle based on for round bosses or pockets, with three pattern two curves onto one or more surfaces*. strategies (Radial, Concentric and Spiral)*. These toolpaths are all fully gouge-protected. With all projection toolpath cycles, the toolpath can be clipped to selected containment boundaries. You can select more than one boundary, and boundaries may lie inside another so as to define a region. However, one boundary may not overlap another, and a single boundary may not intersect itself.
See Also Project Toolpath Cycle Project Boundary Collapse Cycle Project Flow Curves Cycle Project Circular Pattern Cycle Cut Across and Step Angle Toolpath Off Surface for Projection Cycles
749
3. Specify the parameters for the cycle and click OK. 4. Digitise the surfaces for projection and then perform a Finish. The toolpath is now generated.
750
This functionality is also available through the Project Boundary Collapse operation To use Project Boundary Collapse
cycle.
2. Complete the parameters for the cycle and click on OK. 3. Digitise the surfaces on which to project the toolpath. 4. Digitise a Line, Arc, Continuous or a Curve to act as a profile. This must be a closed profile. 5. Digitise any containment boundary entities to form a closed boundary and then perform a Finish. The cycle now generates the toolpath.
See Also Intelligent Lead and Link Moves Clipping to Depth Using Containment Boundaries
751
The first pass follows the first selected curve (when viewed from above) and the final pass follows the second selected curve. Intermediate passes gradually blend from the first curve to the second. You must digitise two entities from which to generate the toolpath. Valid entity types are lines, arcs, curves and continua. The Start point of the cycle is taken from the nearest end of the first digitised entity. Once this point has been reached, the tool feeds directly along the first entity. The number of passes is calculated from either the specified % Stepover or a Planar distance, but the final pass always feeds directly on the second entity (even if this is an uneven cut). You can control the link move between toolpath stripes using Constant Cut. When this box is unchecked, the toolpath lace cuts between stripes. When the box is checked, the tool always cut in the same direction as the first entity and retracts clear at the end of each stripe. To control the finish in Project Flow Curves, you can specify either % Stepover, which is a percentage of the tool diameter, or a Planar Distance. The two options are mutually exclusive. The Stepover value specifies the maximum gap between adjacent stripes in the XY plane. However, this means that the gap will be smaller than specified in some places. This functionality is also available through the Project Flow Curves operation To use Project Flow Curves See Also Intelligent Lead and Link Moves Clipping to Depth Using Containment Boundaries .
752
These strategies are described under separate headings. The Project Circular Pattern operation also provides this functionality.
To use Project Circular Pattern See Also Machining a Segment in Project Circular Pattern Radial Strategy for Project Circular Pattern Concentric Strategy for Project Circular Pattern Spiral Strategy for Project Circular Pattern Intelligent Lead and Link Moves Clipping to Depth Using Containment Boundaries
753
cycle.
2. Complete the parameters for the cycle and click OK. 3. Digitise the surfaces to be projected onto and then perform a Finish. 4. Digitise the outer arc. 5. Optionally digitise an entity to set the inner radius value. 6. Digitise the containment boundaries to form a closed boundary and then perform a Finish. The cycle now generates the toolpath.
754
755
When the Constant Cut box is unchecked, the tool laces up and down the radial lines and links the ends by following the inner or outer arc, thus producing a continuous path to project. When Constant Cut is checked, the radial lines are cut in a constant direction (which depends on the Start parameter). Finally, the Direction determines which way to go around the feature.
756
When the Constant Cut box is checked, the tool cuts each concentric arc in the same direction, performing a retract move between each cut. When Constant Cut is unchecked, the tool lace cuts between concentric arcs and ignores the Direction modifier.
757
The toolpath starts at either the inner or outer arc (dependent on Start) at the nominated Start Angle. The Angle defaults to 0 degrees (3 oclock). Once positioned on the surface using the standard approach method, the cycle will commence. The Direction will force the tool to cut CLW or CCLW. The cycle performs a finish pass on the inner arc (if given) and the outer arc. The tool will cut completely around the start circle, then cut the spiral, then cut the finish circle.
758
759
760
Step Angle Project Circular Radial only. Specifies the angle between cuts for a Radial strategy. In this example Step Angle is set to 10 degrees.
761
762
You can select any number of surfaces, STL models or solid models for this cycle which will then detect all internal intersections and place a toolpath at that point. The order of machining should, where possible, try to link intersections together to form a continuous path. This will have the effect of keeping the tool down on the surface. A "shortest path" between successive curves will be taken to reduce the length of non-cutting moves. As part of the data input for this cycle, you will be able to define containment boundaries. Any pencil curves outside the specified boundaries will be discarded and those that cross the boundaries will be trimmed to their edges. The Pencil Mill cycle offers support for multiple passes. Please note that the Pencil Mill operation uses the "old" (i.e. pre-version 7.50) cycle. See Also Multiple Passes Down Milling Intelligent Lead and Link Moves Clipping to Depth Using Containment Boundaries
763
Multiple Passes
The Pencil Mill cycle offers support for multiple passes, i.e. you can add additional passes either side of the centre trace using the Number of Passes and % Stepover parameters on the General tab.
Number of Passes - Specifies the number of additional passes either side of the center trace. % Stepover - Specifies the exact maximum spacing between each pass as a percentage of the tool diameter when adding additional passes either side of the centre trace . Entering a value of 100 would, for example, represent a distance of 100% of the tool diameter, and so the consecutive passes would be no more than one tool diameter apart.
764
Down Milling
This option will analyse a curve and find the high and low points along its length. At these points the curve will be machined from the high point to the next low point where the tool will retract and move to the next high point etc. The General tab of the dialog offers a check box which allows you to enable this option. You can specify the Down Mill Angle (range between 0-90 degrees) which defines the minimum angle at which down milling is used. This will ensure that curves are not split up at every slight change in angle. The default angle is 30 degrees.
This example shows that it is unnecessary to split the curve at the high point, as the angle from the start is below the minimum angle:
765
766
767
See Also Specifying Lead Moves Advanced Lead Options Specifying Link Moves
768
NOTE: If you have specified a depth and do not want the lead move to go below this level use vertical or horizontal only. The Feedrate for lead moves is specified as a percentage of the feedrate on the General tab. Check Apply To Long Link Only to only apply lead moves where they join long link moves. These lead moves will only be applied at the beginning (lead in) or end (lead out) of a region. If Length, Angle and Radius are set to 0 or unspecified there will be a lead of zero length, i.e. no lead move. The cycles ensure that the tool feeds from the Safe Distance. If the start of the lead move is not the Safe Distance off the model then a feed move will be inserted. Also see Advanced Lead Options
769
Automatic Start Point Instead of trimming a lead move back because of gouge protection, the start point will automatically move along the toolpath until the lead move can be fitted the safe distance away from the gouge point. In the event that a suitable position cannot be found the original start point will be used and the lead will be trimmed away as before.
770
Safe Distance
Plunge Feed
771
772
773
Profile Extensions
On the Lead tab of the Profiling, Pencil Mill and Flat Land Finishing (on finish pass only) cycles you can specify an extension distance for the start and end of the profile (for open profiles only). This helps avoid leaving small marks on the component. The open toolpath will be extended tangentially by the distance specified. The extensions will be gouge checked and removed if they are found to gouge the component. Typically the extensions are not suitable in concave regions of the model.
774
Short Links can be one of three types: Smooth An arc-like smooth transition between ends. Straight A straight linear connection. Step A connection consisting of two straight lines. Either a move in XY is followed by a move down in Z OR a move up in Z is followed by a move in XY. Long Links can be one of two types: Optimised The tool moves up in Z to the highest point on the part (offset by the Safe Distance) along the joining move, followed by a straight horizontal move and a move down to the start of the Lead In or Safe Distance (whichever is higher). The tool then moves down any remaining distance at the Plunge Feedrate. All of these moves will be at the maximum feedrate specified in the postprocessor. Please note that all pre-version 5.75 pencil milling cycles will use this link type by default. Clearance The tool makes a rapid move to the Clearance plane, followed by a rapid move in XY and a rapid move down to the start of the Lead in or the Safe Distance (whichever is higher). The tool then moves down any remaining distance at the Plunge Feedrate. Safe Distance Specifies the safe distance above the part from which the tool will feed into position. The safe distance is also included when calculating the optimised retract height over the model. Feed When Plunging When checked, the tool will use the Feedrate when moving down in the Z axis during the cycle. This is a safe option when the amount of stock material is unknown. When unchecked, the tool will rapid to the safe distance above the model then feed into position. At the start of the surface machining cycles the tool will rapid to the clearance plane first, then continue down to the start of the lead move.
775
This may have the effect of breaking the toolpath down into regions. In this case the normal rules for leads, links and ordering will be applied to each region, and the move between the regions. To avoid the toolpath fragmenting into small sections, additional Z level passes may be included outside the contact angle range. See a Profiling example. See a Parallel Lace example. Please note that the minimum and maximum contact angle cannot be the same value.
776
Batch Mode
Batch Mode can be applied to all surface cycles. You may find that some cycles take some time to generate the appropriate toolpaths. Checking the Batch Mode (Cycles menu) command lets you to bypass the toolpath generation and move on to other tasks in the worksession. At the end of the worksession, turn off Batch Mode and generate the batched toolpaths by selecting Regenerate.
777
Setting Preferences
Use Options menu tolerances. Preferences to set preferences such as the units for the part and the
Here are details on the preferences (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the Preferences dialog):
778
779
To use this functionality, a tool holder must be defined in the toolchange. You can generate a tool holder definition by opening the ToolStore and defining a graphics file on the Mounting tab. This can be a predefined .csv file or a profile drawn in Edgecam. The holder Z offset specifies the distance from the holders datum point (CPL) to the shank datum.
780
If the Cusp Height parameter is left blank, the Stepover value will be applied to the cycle as normal. However if a Cusp Height has been stated, the Stepover value represents the maximum stepover of the tool. This would come into effect when using an Endmill on a flat (or near-flat) surface, where the Cusp Height would try to step over the width of the tool.
781
782
783
chord distance If the 'chord distance' is less than the machine's Output Tolerance setting (Machine Parameters dialog, General tab), the arc is output as a line. Note that as a general rule you should set the Output tolerance to the resolution of the NC controller. Most metric formats are 4,3 (3 decimal places), so set Output tolerance to 0.001mm. Inch format is 3,4 (4 decimal places), so set the output tolerance to 0.0001. This setting is 'modal'; it defaults to the last value you set, and is remembered from one Edgecam session to the next.
784
To help machine bounded areas on the same model you can turn on Batch Mode, which inhibits processing. Set up and apply the first cycle, then use the Sequence Window to copy the cycle and then edit the boundary information for each cycle. Then turn off Batch Mode and generate all the cycles at once. This saves time waiting for each small area to process before selecting the next. Choose your cycle Note that cycles which use a full 3D constant offset algorithm are more memory intensive. These are: Constant Cusp Rest Finish Profiling with Finish Shallow Areas set to Constant Cusp, with Helical checked or a Cusp Height specified.
785
Cycles that use less memory include: Parallel Lace Profiling (without Finish Shallow) Use large ball or bull nose tools For example a 1mm (0.04) tool will use 10 times the memory of a 10mm (0.4) tool. An Endmill (sharp corner) will use more memory than a Bull or Ball nose cutter. Periodically clear the Undo / Redo Buffer At convenient times save and re-load the part to clear the buffer. The buffer stores the previous state of the toolpaths each time you edit, regenerate or add commands. This is a very useful, but when generating large surface toolpaths it can be expensive on memory.
786
A Surface Feed UV move is always straight in UV space (as shown above), but in 3D space its shape is determined by the shape of the surface.
787
788
Problem Areas
Degenerate surfaces (surfaces that cross over themselves) Degenerate surface curves on trimmed surfaces (surface curve intersects with itself) Tangent continuous corners on Coons Patches
789
See Also Areaclearance in Pre-V10.5 Five Axis Drilling in Pre-V10.5 Five Axis Slotting in Pre-V10.5 Five Axis Specifying Pre-V10.5 Five Axis Cycle Parameters
790
1. Select the Five Axis Areaclear (Mill Cycles menu) parameters for the cycle. 2. Set the parameters for the cycle and click on OK. 3. Digitise the surface. 4. Digitise the first corner of the surface. 5. Digitise the second corner of the surface. 6. Select the side of the surface for the toolpath. 7. Perform a Finish. The system now generates the toolpath. See Also Using Pre-V10.5 Five Axis Areaclear Strategies
791
The surface boundaries that are used are determined by the digitises defining the start and direction for the cycle. This strategy does not use any specified Overshoot values for the cycle.
792
1. Select the Five Axis Drill (Mill Cycles menu) for the cycle. 2. Set the parameters for the cycle and click on OK. 3. Digitise the surface. 4. Select the side of the surface for the toolpath. 5. Perform a Finish. 6. Digitise one or more locations to drill. 7. Perform a Finish. The system now generates the toolpath. See Also Using Pre-V10.5 Five Axis Drill Strategies
793
794
795
Negative Depth parameter = Tool or Tool is offset by Tool Radius plus any specified Offset Corner Radius value (not endmills). Negative Depth parameter For ballnose and bullnose cutters only. < Tool or Corner Radius The offset is calculated for the point of tool contact. For example, Depth = -5, Tool Radius = 2, Corner Radius = 1. The negative Depth is greater than either the Tool or Corner Radius, so the tool is offset by the Tool Radius plus any specified Offset value.
796
797
The Side angle is the angle between the tool and the surface normal (or the vertical axis of the machine tool), in a plane at 90 to the pass direction. A positive angle is to the left of the pass direction (see below).
Alternate Lead Clear this box to apply the Lead angles in the direction of the first pass. Check this box to apply the Lead angles relative to the current pass. Alternate Side Clear this box to apply the angles at the first pass. Check this box to apply the angles relative to the current pass. Lead Start Specifies a Lead angle to alter the tool orientation by at the start of a cut. Lead End Specifies a Lead angle to alter the tool orientation by at the start of a cut. If you do not enter a value, the cycle uses the Lead Start angle. If you do specify a value, the cycle interpolates the Lead angle as the tool moves along the cut.
798
Side Start Specifies a Side angle to alter the tool orientation by at the start or end of a cut. Side End Specifies a Side angle to alter the tool orientation by at the end of a cut. If you do not enter a value, the cycle uses the Side Start angle. If you do specify a value, the cycle interpolates the Side angle as the tool moves along the cut. Relative To Select the axis that the Lead and Side angles are taken from. Normal To use the angles relative to the surface normals. Vertical To use the angles relative to the machine tools vertical axis (not the same as the driven tool axis).
799
800
SWARF Machining, where the tool is laid along a face, following the changes in the face orientation, and cutting is on the side of the tool.
5 Axis Finishing, where the tool axis is kept normal to the surface for a consistent finish.
For each of these techniques (and Five Axis Curve machining) there is an operation. The operation quickly sets up the Five Axis cycle for the technique, as an alternative to you having to set up the cycle manually. To remove bulk material you can make multiple copies of cuts. Note that Code Generators may be set up to use Inverse Time Feedrates for 4/5 Axis Simultaneous Milling. More details are provided in the Code Wizard help.
801
Here are details on the using the cycle and the cycle dialog's settings (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
After digitising the surface(s) to form the group, you would then click on the material side (here this is the top face, as indicated by the red lines):
If you then select this surface group as the drive surface for the cycle, the machining will be on the correct side:
811
When performing axial machining (on the end of the cylinder), the tool's Z axis is parallel to the rotary axis.
Note that Edgecam Rotary Milling only supports table-mounted axes. Whether one or both of these machining options is open to you is dependent on your machine tool. Rotary Milling Examples
812
Note: The axis of rotation on the machine must align with the unwrapped geometry, or else you will not be able to machine the geometry.
813
Note: 4 axis machines use the Primary axis for rotary machining, whereas 5 axis machine tools always use the Secondary axis. Wherever the "rotary axis" is mentioned elsewhere in this manual, this will refer to the Primary or Secondary axis depending on your machine tool. These machine tool configurations can be generated within the Code Wizard (using the Rotary Milling template). You can verify your machine tool configuration by selecting the Machine Parameters (Verify menu) command.
814
Please see your Machine Tool documentation for details of your tool's start orientation. Note When milling in an 'axial' orientation in Rotary Mode positioning between hole locations will take advantage of rotary axis positioning. All other cycles will make use of Cartesian (xy) tool paths. See Axial Milling.
815
The following commands are available for Rotary Milling: Angular (Move menu)
See Also Moving Around the Rotary Axis Resetting the Rotary Datum Rotating Machining Instructions Configuring the Rotary Machining Output Rules Used to Determine the Angular Position of the Tool Axial Milling
816
For example, on an A axis rotary machine, the tool can move along the X axis but any Y motion is converted into an angular move around the A axis. Note that you can specify an angular co-ordinate directly in the Co-ordinate Input dialog by stating the correct axis letter and angle. You could do this, for example, by entering A90. If you had to, you could also do this by entering a distance in the Y axis equal to one quarter of the circumference (pi times D over 4). The real use for this is when the distance to travel was originally described as a linear distance around the cylinder. The Angular (Move menu) command lets you specify an angular move around the rotary axis of the machine tool, while optionally stating a new XYZ position. As can be seen from the diagram below, the current CPL and tool remain aligned with respect to each other as the tool moves to the new angular position. The co-ordinate information is always related to the current CPL, but the Angular move is always around the Rotary axis.
817
To avoid this situation, use the Reset Rotary Datum (M-Functions menu) command to reset the rotary angle into the range 0-360 degrees. Note that this has no effect on the tool position or orientation: only the rotary angle will change. There must be an equivalent function available on the machine tool to perform this operation.
818
Note that the selected instructions to be transformed must be all rotary or all planar the instructions may not be mixed.
Note that the linking moves will be different between Rotary and Planar rotations for axial work.
819
820
821
822
Axial Milling
You can only use the Axial mode on C or some 4/5 axis machines. If your machine tool's primary or secondary axis is C, the initial start-up is in the Axial plane. If not, by indexing the machine using the Index (Move menu) command, you can tilt the axis through 90 degrees to allow machining on the end of the component (AB and BA machines). Select the Rotary Mode (M-Functions) command to activate the rotary axis mode. The example below shows the different toolpaths Edgecam generates when performing a drilling operation on the end of the rotary axis:
In Rotary mode, you still enter co-ordinates in the same manner as for Planar mode (Cartesian), but the resultant CNC output will be angular (polar). Note that rotary tool paths like this are only used by hole cycles. All other cycles will generate xy tool paths.
823
824
825
Indexing to CPLs
Use Move menu Index to change your working CPL in Manufacture mode.
Here are details on using the command (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the Index dialog):
826
Slotting
To slot non-profile geometry, use the Slot (Mill Cycles menu) command. This has two modes of operation specified by the Strategy parameter: 2D and 3D. You can also use the Profile cycle with a zero offset to slot profiles. In operation, the tool rapid moves to a position vertically above the start of the slot. It then rapids down until it reaches the Retract height from the slot. The tool then feeds down to Depth and starts to move along the slot. After selecting the Slot cycle, you are prompted to select a Strategy for the cycle. Choose between: 2D - Drives the tool along planar entities such as lines, arcs and continuous entities. 3D - Drives the tool along curves and 3D continuous entities. Once you have selected the Strategy, the parameters for the cycle are displayed.
To combine several commands when slotting, use Slotting (Operations menu) Programming in Milling for details of using operations. See Also Slotting in 2D Slotting in 3D Choosing Parameters for Slotting
. See Operational
827
Slotting in 2D
Select the Slot (Mill Cycles menu) command and set the Strategy parameter to 2D. You can now select the remaining parameters for the cycle. See Choosing Parameters for Slotting.
828
Slotting in 3D
Select the Slot (Mill Cycles menu) command and set the Strategy parameter to 3D. These parameters are unique to 3D slotting: Link Control - If you are slotting more than one entity, you can choose the method of producing link moves: Shortest - Produces a 3D linear feed move to the start of the next slot. Retract - The tool rapids vertically to the Clearance height, rapids in the workplane to the start of the next slot and feeds down to Depth. Tolerance - If a Continuous entity contains an arc that does not lie in either the XY, XZ or YZ planes, the resultant toolpath will break the arc into a series of small linear moves which lie within this tolerance. You can now select the remaining parameters for the cycle. See Choosing Parameters for Slotting.
829
830
Operations Overview
Operations provide a quick means of applying a cycle, complete with supporting instructions. Many of the cycles' options and modifiers are automatically set for you, using default values that will be typically useful in a variety of situations. Operations feature a high level of automation. They typically include a move-to-toolchange, tool specification or selection from the ToolStore, approach moves, compensation (where applicable), and the machining cycle. You can make global options settings for operations using Operations menu Editing Operations appear as instructions in the Sequence Window. You can edit the operation settings in the normal way (for example double-click on the operation to re-open its dialog). Alternatively you can click the '+' symbol to expand the operation. You can then edit any of the instructions within it, as normal (double-click to reopen the cycle's dialog for example). Note however that once you do this the operation ceases to exist; it is 'exploded' into its individual instructions. Preferences.
831
832
1. Activate the Batch Mode command. 2. Create the operations. 3. De-activate the Batch Mode command. 4. Generate the toolpaths for the operations using the Regenerate command.
While Batch Mode is active, no toolpaths or screen tool simulations are displayed. Note that if you attempt to generate NC code, no code is produced for any batched operations other than a comment.
833
834
835
836
Index Operation
The Index (Operations menu) command allows you to perform an incremental or absolute datum shift to a specified angle or a selected datum. See Also Sequence of Instructions in the Index Operation Using the Index Operation
837
838
button .
2. Complete the dialog box for the operation. Click OK. Edgecam now indexes the tool.
839
Hole Operation
The Hole (Operations menu) command allows you to combine several related drilling commands in one instruction.
See Also Sequence of Instructions in the Hole Operation Using the Hole Operation Hole Operation Termination Hole Operation Preparation Strategy
Hole Cycle
840
841
button.
2. Digitise one or more positions depending on the selection method you chose. Perform a Finish to stop selecting positions for the operation. 3. Complete the dialog box for the operation. Click on OK. Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the hole operation, including any moves to position the tool.
Note on using the Hole operation with solid parts When using the Hole operation on a solid part with a tool selected from the ToolStore, if the solid is updated with a different hole diameter, the tool will not be updated. A warning message is displayed giving the name of the tool and specifying that the ToolStore tool diameter and hole diameter do not match.
842
Through The hole is to break through another face of the part. The tool passes through the part by an amount specified (in the Preferences) by the Safe Distance.
843
Countersink Specifies a tapered preparation hole. Countersink has an included angle of 45 degrees. You can only define the countersink using either Depth or Diameter. Here is a hole feature prepared with a countersink:
Counterbore Specifies a fixed diameter preparation hole. Here is a hole feature prepared with a counterbore:
844
Profiling Operation
The Profiling (Operations menu) command allows you to use several commands together in one operation. This operation supports Wireframe, Feature, Surface and Solid as input. Please note that this operation was introduced in Edgecam Version 9.0, so: Features created prior to Edgecam Version 9.0 are treated as wireframe. For full associativity, re-create the features in the latest Edgecam version, before applying the operation. Part files created in Edgecam prior to Version 9.0 may contain examples of the older superseded operation. You might want to delete these operations and re-apply the new operation.
See Also Operations Overview Sequence of Instructions in the Profiling Operation Using the Profiling Operation Profiling Cycle
845
846
2. Digitise either the Wireframe profile(s), Features, Surfaces or Solid you wish to Profile. For wireframe you will need to position the Start/Side Arrow on the side to be machined (otherwise this is automatic). (When a Feature or Solid is selected the Depth values are Associative. Wireframe and Surface use an Absolute Clearance and Level with an incremental Depth.) 3. Perform a Finish. 4. Select a containment boundary if required 5. Perform a Finish. 6. Complete the dialog box for the operation. Click on OK. Note that in the dialog you cannot set both an Offset value and an XY Offset value; you can only set one or the other. Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the profiling operation, including any moves to position the tool. For surface geometry the operation allows blank level and depth fields. When no values are specified level and depth are taken from the model.
Profile Material on the Left This option is used to take advantage of the feature material side and to maintain associativity between the feature and the Profile operation. When manually identifying features, the direction of the profile is automatically selected such that the material is on the left. Checking the Profile Material on the Left option on the General tab of the Preferences (Operations menu) dialog will allow the machining operation to cut the correct side of the feature without any further intervention from the user. This method can be used on wireframe geometry by chaining the profile in the correct direction so as to maintain the material on the left.
847
Chamfer Operation
The Chamfer (Operations menu) command generates a single profile pass by selecting the top profile of a chamfered edge. Please note that this operation was introduced in Edgecam Version 9.0, so: Features created prior to Edgecam Version 9.0 are treated as wireframe. For full associativity, re-create the features in the latest Edgecam version, before applying the operation. Part files created in Edgecam prior to Version 9.0 may contain examples of the older superseded operation. You might want to delete these operations and re-apply the new operation.
See Also Operations Overview Sequence of Instructions in the Chamfer Operation Using the Chamfer Operation Chamfer Operation Notes
848
849
850
The Chamfer Operation generates a single pass by selecting the top profile of a chamfered edge. The tool definition is used to automatically calculate the depth and offset. The tool is offset into the profile by the distance specified.
Note on drawing As most drawings do not draw the break edge, the Break Distance modifier can be used when chamfering profiles that have been drawn without a chamfer. This alters the depth and offset in the profile cycle to machine the desired corner break edge.
851
Please note that this operation was introduced in Edgecam 9.0, so: Features created prior to Edgecam Version 9.0 are treated as wireframe. For full associativity, re-create the features in the latest Edgecam version, before applying the operation. Part files created in Edgecam prior to Version 9.0 may contain examples of the older superseded operation. You might want to delete these operations and re-apply the new operation. See Also Operations Overview Sequence of Instructions in the Face Mill Operation Using the Face Mill Operation Face Milling Cycle
852
853
2. Digitise boundary entities for the cycle and perform a finish. You can digitise features or wireframe profiles (chained entities or a continuous). 3. Complete the dialog box for the operation. Click OK. The dialog provides help in the form of explanatory images and AVIs. Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the Face Milling cycle, including any moves to position the tool.
854
Slotting Operation
Slotting (Operations menu) instruction. See Also Sequence of Instructions in the Slotting Operation Using the Slotting Operation allows you to combine several manufacturing commands into one
Slot Cycle
855
856
button.
2. Digitise the slot. Perform a Finish to stop selecting entities to slot. 3. Digitise a new start and end point for the active profile (if necessary). 4. Hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the left mouse button to toggle between selecting a new start point and a new end point. 5. Perform a Finish. 6. Complete the dialog box for the operation. Click on OK. Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the slot operation, including any moves to position the tool.
857
858
859
1. Click on the Thread Mill Operation 2. Digitise circle to define thread. 3. Perform a Finish.
button.
4. Complete the dialog box for the operation. Click on OK. Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the Thread Mill operation, including any moves to position the tool.
860
See Also Operations Overview Sequence of Instructions in the Parallel Lace Operation Using the Parallel Lace Operation
861
862
1. In the Operations menu or toolbar click Parallel Lace Operation 2. Digitise the surface or solid face you wish to machine. 3. Perform a Finish. 4. Select a containment boundary if required. 5. Perform a Finish. 6. Complete the dialog box for the operation. Click OK. Leave Level and Depth blank for the values to be taken from the model.
Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the operation, including any moves to position the tool.
863
Roughing Operation
The Roughing (Operations menu) command allows you to use several commands together in one operation.
This operation supports Wireframe, Feature, Surface and Solid as input. Please note that this operation was introduced in Edgecam Version 9.0, so: Features created prior to Edgecam Version 9.0 are treated as wireframe. For full associativity, re-create the features in the latest Edgecam version, before applying the operation. Part files created in Edgecam prior to Version 9.0 may contain examples of the older superseded operation. You might want to delete these operations and re-apply the new operation.
See Also Operations Overview Sequence of Instructions in the Roughing Operation Using the Roughing Operation Roughing Cycle
864
865
866
See Also Sequence of Instructions in the Rest Finishing Operation Using the Rest Finishing Operation
867
868
button.
2. Digitise the surfaces to be machined, then perform a Finish. 3. Digitise the boundary entities (if any are required), then perform a Finish. 4. Complete the dialog box for the operation, then click OK.* Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the rest finishing operation, including any moves to position the tool.
* The operation allows blank level and depth fields. When no values are specified level and depth are taken
from the model.
869
See Also Operations Overview Sequence of Instructions in the Flat Land Finishing Operation Using the Flat Land Finishing Operation Flat Land Finishing Cycle
870
871
button.
2. Digitise the wireframe (profile), features, surfaces or solid to be machined, then perform a Finish. (When a Feature or Solid is selected the Depth values are Associative. Wireframe and Surface use an Absolute Clearance and Level with an incremental Depth.) 3. Digitise the boundary entities (if any are required), then perform a Finish. 4. Complete the dialog box for the operation, then click OK. Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the finishing operation, including any moves to position the tool. For surface geometry the operation allows blank level and depth fields. When no values are specified level and depth are taken from the model.
872
873
874
1. Click on the Project Boundary Collapse Operation 2. Digitise the surfaces to be machined, then perform a Finish.
button.
3. Digitise one or more profiles to collapse, then perform a Finish. 4. Digitise the containment boundary entities (if any are required), then perform a Finish. 5. Complete the dialog box for the operation, then click OK.* Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the project boundary collapse operation, including any moves to position the tool.
* The operation allows blank level and depth fields. When no values are specified level and depth are taken
from the model.
875
876
877
button.
2. Digitise the surfaces to be machined, then perform a Finish. 3. Digitise the first entity to flow along. The cycle will start at the closest end of the entity to the digitise. 4. Digitise the second entity to flow along. 5. Digitise the containment boundary entities (if any are required), then perform a Finish. 6. Complete the dialog box for the operation, then click OK.* Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the project flow curves operation, including any moves to position the tool.
* The operation allows blank level and depth fields. When no values are specified level and depth are taken
from the model.
878
879
880
button.
2. Digitise the surfaces to be machined, then perform a Finish. 3. Digitise an entity to act as the outer arc. 4. Digitise an entity to act as the inner arc. 5. Digitise the containment boundary entities (if any are required), then perform a Finish. 6. Complete the dialog box for the operation, then click OK.* Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the project circular pattern operation, including any moves to position the tool.
* The operation allows blank level and depth fields. When no values are specified level and depth are taken
from the model.
881
882
883
Rough Turn Finish Groove Move Relative Thread Standard Four Axis Cycles
Finish Turn Move Rapid Move Relative 2 Hole cycles (Fixed tool)
In addition, any Two Axis cycle may be synchronised with another, provided that they are being performed on separate turrets. Driven Tools on a Turning Centre Edgecam supports milling and drilling of 2D geometry on a turned part in three modes: Axial Milling Radial Milling Y Axis Milling (Planar)
Swept Profiles 2D turned profiles may be swept to represent the turned component in three dimensions.
884
Solids Preferences
Use Options menu Preferences Solids tab to make preferences settings relating to solids.
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
885
886
The turned envelope can be rough turned in preparation for any milling operations that will complete the process. The turned envelope represents the minimum boundary for turning, without removing stock required by the milling operations for forming geometric features. Rough turning is often faster than milling operations at stock removal, and tool costs are generally lower.
887
888
Defining Billets
A billet represents the raw stock (casting, forging or previously machined component) to be machined into the part. Turn cycles that use stock include Rough Turn, Rough Groove and Rough Side Groove. The billet tells the cycle where cuts need to be made to remove material. As with other types of stock, you can create billets with the Stock/Fixture command: 1. Click Geometry menu Stock/Fixture.
2. In the Stock dialog, make sure that Shape is set to Turn Billet. 3. When you come to digitise, you will be prompted for a 2D Profile to define the billet. You can now digitise the billet profile when specifying cycle geometry. (Note that you need to digitise the end point of the profile.) However you do not necessarily need pre-defined billets. At the 'Digitise billet or cycle start position' prompt, you could digitise: An existing toolpath. The cycle then only removes the material left by the previous machining. See Using Dynamic Billeting for more information. A turn feature. This would typically be derived from a separate solid model, representing the billet. Note that for this digitise, you need to hold down the Ctrl key while clicking on the feature.
889
The toolpath created by the right hand tool can be selected as a dynamic billet when using the left hand tool.
890
891
892
893
You are prompted to digitise the drive/cut direction. Digitise near where the two arrows cross to specify the new directions. The new drive direction is in the direction closest to the digitise:
894
895
Or if ths is not available (non-adaptive code generators) use various other M-Function commands, such as M-Functions menu CSS. Note that for adaptive code generators you can also use the Spindle tab in a Toolchange dialog. Use the Spindle Control command if you want to change the settings for the existing tool. For more information click the Help button in the command's dialog.
896
Straight Turn
Rough Turn
Finish Turn
Rough Groove
Finish Groove
Operations can be selected from the Operations menu to combine several machining commands:
Straight Turn/Face
Turn
Groove
Thread
Parting Off
897
898
This problem can be solved by driving the tool past the centreline by an amount equal to the corner radius of the insert (see below).
899
There are two methods of achieving this: By specifying the X co-ordinate in a Straight Turn cycle. By graphically re-positioning the start and end points of a Rough Turn cycle.
To remove a spur by specifying the X co-ordinate To remove a spur by repositioning the start and end points
900
901
Here are details on the settings in the cycle dialog (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
902
Here are details on the settings in the cycle dialog (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
903
Here are details on the settings in the cycle dialog (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
904
905
906
907
Backturning
A Rough Turn cycle can leave areas of the profile uncut because of the geometry of the profile and the geometry of the complete tool (not just the insert).
The solution to this problem lies in using a left-handed tool. These shadowed areas can be backturned using a left handed tool in a Rough Turn cycle. Select the toolpath produced by the first Rough Turn cycle to define the billet geometry for the left-handed Rough Turn.
button or grooving tools could also be used to clear difficult areas in only one cycle, although you must consider the strength of the tool against the toughness of the material. For example, a button tool would be ideal for cutting plastic but not a sensible choice for cutting hard steel.
908
We recommend you use the Finish Turn (Turn Cycles menu) support... Otherwise we recommend you use the later Finish Turning cycle You can also use: Relative (Move menu) Constrained (Move menu) Relative 2 (Move menu)
909
910
911
912
913
(We recommend you use the earlier Finish Turn Cycle if you need canned cycle support.) Here are details on the using the cycle and the cycle dialog's settings (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
914
915
916
917
Thread Cycle
Use Turn Cycles menu Thread to turn internal or external threads.
Here are details on the settings in the cycle dialog (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
918
Grooving
To cut a groove with fixed tooling you can: 'Form' the groove using the tool shape, using Move menu commands. 'Generate' the groove, where the groove does not match the tool shape. To generate the groove you first rough the groove. You can use the Rough Groove cycle to cut using the end of the tool (plunging the tool along its axis) or the Rough Side Groove cycle to cut with the side of the tool (move the tool sideways). (You could also use the Rough Turn cycle) You then finish the groove using use the Finish Groove or Finish Side Groove cycle (or perhaps the Finish Turn cycle). You can also make grooves using driven tooling in Rotary mode. For more details, see Milling in Rotary Mode.
919
Forming Grooves
This type of grooving is where the tool shape and orientation generate the profile. Use the Move menu commands Feed or Relative for feeding in, and Rapid, Feed or Relative for retracting the tool. Approach the work and use a Relative-type move to position for the cycle. For more details, see Moving Relative toand Constrained by Entities. Perform the cycle. Insert a Dwell (M-Functions menu) for one or two revolutions of the spindle because the part must finish its cut at depth to ensure all cutting has finished. Making the cut in one revolution leaves material uncut as the tool moves to depth, as shown in this end-on view:
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
Here are details on the using the cycle and the cycle dialog's settings (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
928
929
930
Here are details on the using the cycle and the cycle dialog's settings (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
931
932
933
When changing from a Plunge to a Side move, the tool is driven at 25% of the Side Feedrate for twice the Side Force Correction distance (or at least 0.1mm/0.01in) to allow the tool to deflect.
934
This will then be modified by default (see No Stepover Adjustment below). Cut Increment Specify the distance between cuts in the units used for the part. Stepover Specify the distance between cuts as a percentage of the effective length of the cutting edge of the tool. No Stepover Adjustment Once the cut increment has been defined, by default Edgecam ensures that a small cut is not made on the last pass by averaging the cut distance between all the passes. To stop Edgecam from averaging the cuts, check the No Stepover Adjustment box. The distance between cuts can also be modified by this parameter: Degression (Roughing) Specify the amount by which to reduce each consecutive cut increment. The cut increment eventually equals the Degression value, and cannot be reduced any further. This would be used on long shaft parts where the rigidity of the component reduces as the stock is removed.
935
When specifying the Turret parameters during a toolchange, you can use an extra option Load Point. This allows you to set the Front or Rear load point to use for the new tool.
Note: When changing tools, if you alter a loading point you may alter the separation distance between tools by specifying the XZ Gauge.
936
937
Straight Turn/Face
Turn
Parting Off
Groove
Thread
Hole
See Also Specifying Preferences for Turning Operations Standard Sequence for Turning Operations Using Batch Mode for Operations Index Operation
938
939
Tool Type
Groove Tool Thread Tool Turn/Bore Tool
Modifiers
Width Included Angle Symbol/Included Angle, Edge Length/Inscribed Circle, and Side/End Angle
940
Batch Mode ON
While Batch Mode is active, no toolpaths or screen tool simulations are displayed. Note that if you attempt to generate NC code, no code is produced for any batched operations other than a comment. If you want to generate all the operations that you created in Batch Mode, ensure that Batch Mode is switched off and select the Regenerate (Instructions menu) command.
The batched operations are now generated, and appear normally in the instruction list. If you generate NC code, Edgecam now generates appropriate code for the operations.
941
Index Operation
The Index (Operations menu) command allows you to perform an incremental or absolute datum shift to a specified angle or a selected datum. See also Sequence of Instructions in the Index Operation Using the Index Operation
942
943
944
The Straight Turn/Face (Operations menu) command can be used to perform multiple commands within a single instruction.
Sequence of Instructions in the Straight Turn/Face Operation Using the Straight Turn/Face Operation Straight Turn/Face Operation Parameters
945
946
1. Click on the Straight Turn/Face Operation 2. Digitise a start point for the cycle. 3. Digitise the destination point for the cycle.
button.
4. Complete the dialog box for the operation and click OK. Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the straight turn/face operation, including any moves to position the tool.
947
Bore
Cut Direction This sets the default cut direction for all turning roughing operations. The directions are shown here:
948
Turn Operation
The Turn (Operations menu) command can be used to perform multiple commands within a single instruction.
Sequence of Instructions in the Turn Operation Using the Turn Operation Turn Operation General Parameters Turn Operation Finishing Parameters
949
950
button.
2. Digitise the profile to be turned and then perform a Finish. 3. Digitise the new start point for the active profile (if necessary). Press the Ctrl key while holding down the left mouse button to toggle between selecting a new start point and a new end point for the profile. 4. Perform a Finish. 5. Digitise the cycle start point. 6. Digitise a toolpath or a continuous entity to act as a billet for the cycle (if necessary). 7. Perform a Finish to complete the billet selection. 8. Complete the dialog box for the operation and click OK. 9. Perform a Finish. Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the turn operation, including any moves to position the tool.
951
Bore
Cut Direction This sets the default cut direction for all turning roughing operations. The directions are shown here:
Prevent Undercuts Click this box to override the tool cutter angles, to prevent the tool from entering any undercuts in the diameter or face of the component. You may prefer to do this if you want to remove the region(s) later, for example if the current tool geometry is not suitable. See also Selecting Override Angles.
952
953
Groove Operation
The Groove (Operations menu) command can be used to perform multiple commands within a single instruction.
Sequence of Instructions in the Groove Operation Using the Groove Operation Groove Operation Tool Type
954
955
button.
3. Perform a Finish to complete digitising the profile. 4. Digitise the new start point for the active profile (if necessary). Hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the left mouse button to toggle between selecting a new start point and a new end point for the profile. 5. Perform a Finish to complete digitising the new start point. 6. Digitise the cycle start point. 7. Complete the dialog box for the operation. 8. Click on OK. Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the groove operation, including any moves to position the tool.
956
External
Internal
Face
957
Thread Operation
The Thread (Operations menu) instruction. command can be used to perform multiple commands within a single
Using the thread operation on a turn feature When clicking on a feature to select it for the threading operation, the feature entity will be threaded if it contains a single line as the profile (e.g. a manual feature was created by picking an aligned cylinder or cone). We recommend that manual turn features be used for turn threading associativity. Manual turn features will have a consistent direction based on material side. If necessary, the direction of the cycle can be reversed in the Edit command by using the Reverse Material check box (this will be remembered on a solid reload).
Sequence of Instructions in the Thread Operation Using the Thread Operation Thread Operation Tool Type
958
959
button.
2. Digitise the line to be threaded. The operation will start at the end of the line closest to your digitise. 3. Complete the dialog box for the operation. 4. Click OK. Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the thread operation, including any moves to position the tool.
960
External
Internal
961
Parting Off (Operations menu) can be used to perform multiple commands within a single instruction.
Sequence of Instructions in the Parting Off Operation Using the Parting Off Operation Parting Off Operation Parameters
962
963
1. Click on the Parting Off Operation 2. Digitise a line for the part off location. 3. Complete the dialog box for the operation. 4. Click OK.
button.
Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the parting off operation, including any moves to position the tool.
964
Rear Face The set point of the tool is configured so that the rear face of the component can be parted off.
Front Face The set point of the tool is configured to part off on the front face of the component. Clearance Diameter Specifies the distance from the spindle axis of the starting point for the parting off cut.
965
Overshoot Specifies the distance the tool must travel past the spindle centreline, to ensure to component parts off cleanly from the stock.
Break Corner Length Specifies the length of each side of a 45 degree cut to produce a break corner. The following sequence shows how:
1. The Parting Off tool moves down past the outermost part of the digitised profile by an amount equal to the Break Corner Length.
2. The tool moves up and across to the start of the break corner, remaining at the Safe Distance from the part.
966
967
968
969
button.
2. Complete the dialog box for the operation. 3. Click OK. Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the hole operation, including any moves to position the tool. Note on using the Hole operation with solid parts When using the Hole operation on a solid part with a tool selected from the ToolStore and the solid is updated with a different hole diameter, the tool will not be updated. A warning message is displayed giving the name of the tool and specifying that the ToolStore tool diameter and hole diameter do not match.
970
Blind The hole does not break through another face of the part.
Through The hole is to break through another face of the part. The tool passes through the part by an amount specified (in the Preferences) by the Safe Distance.
971
Countersink Specifies a tapered preparation hole. Countersink has an included angle of 45 degrees. You can only define the countersink using either Depth or Diameter. Here is a hole feature prepared with a countersink:
Counterbore Specifies a fixed diameter preparation hole. Here is a hole feature prepared with a counterbore:
972
973
In Balanced cycles, the Upper and Lower turrets work opposite each other about the Z axis. These cycles have an additional parameter called Z Lead. Using a value here instructs the currently active turret to cut in front of the other turret by the Z Lead distance. In Mirror cycles, the turret movements are mirrored about a plane on the Z axis (and the toolpaths are shown lying on the opposite side of the Z axis). These cycles allow you to perform two different operations at the same time, for example by using a left hand and a right hand tool to simultaneously rough turn and backturn a part.
The Four Axis cycles operate in the same way as the Two Axis cycles Straight Turn and Rough Turn, except that two turrets are used for the same cycle at the same time. The leading turret is the currently selected (active) turret.
Note: When using tools that have the Reverse parameter selected (in Turret parameters for a toolchange), the toolpath is literally copied and reversed for the non-active turret. You can also combine turning and milling operations, for example by drilling on the centreline at the same time as roughing part of the profile. Synchronising tools is essential here to avoid collisions between tools (for more details, see Synchronising Turrets). Using two tools at the same time steadies the part and produces a more accurate finish to the work, as well as increasing the rate of material removal and therefore shortening the overall machining time.
Please note that toolpath simulation in Four Axis cycles is only correct when Constant is OFF. See Also Selecting Turrets Performing Different Operations with Each Turret Synchronising Turrets
974
Selecting Turrets
You may want to make sure that changes of tool, machining cycle and other commands are applied to a particular turret. Use the Turret (Tooling menu) command to specify the turret that all subsequent commands apply to. Note how the CPL marker at the bottom-left of the GLview shows you which spindle the selected turret is working with (and also the non-selected turret). Because the Dynamic Billeting feature adjusts the boundary as a result of the active turrets cutting action, this can affect the resulting toolpaths. For details, see Using Dynamic Billeting. Note that the Co-ordinate display panel shows the active turret details in upper case and the inactive turret information in lower case.
975
976
977
Synchronising Turrets
Use M-Functions menu Synchronise Turrets to open the dialog below.
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
978
In addition, you can display a Time Line window showing the synchronisations. This is useful for validating and optimising the machining sequence.
To display the Time Line window Select Time Line from the Status Bars (View menu) command, OR Click the Time Line button on the Display toolbar.
979
When performing radial machining (around the cylinder), the tool is restricted to moving parallel to and around the spindle centreline. The tool is always oriented radially to the spindle centreline. Radial - rotary mode Radial - planar mode When performing axial machining (on the end of the cylinder), the tool's Z axis is parallel to the spindle centreline. Axial - rotary mode Axial - planar mode This example shows a part with geometry created on an unwrapped envelope. The geometry has then been machined in Planar mode (using the M-Function menu command) with a driven tool mounted radially in the turret: This example shows the same Machining Sequence but with the mode changed to Rotary:
980
981
To switch from Rotary to Planar mode, click the Planar mode (M-Functions menu) command. This also inserts an appropriate instruction into the sequence.
To switch from Planar to Rotary mode, click the Rotary mode (M-Functions menu) command. This also inserts an appropriate instruction into the sequence.
These commands: also appear in the Rotary menu. are only available in Manufacture Mode are only available with a C/Y axis code generator specified ('Machine Tools' setting in the Machine Parameters dialog).
982
The following command is available for Rotary Milling: Angular (Move menu)
See Also Moving Around the Rotary Axis Radial Milling Axial Milling Milling in Planar Mode (Y Axis) Resetting the Rotary Datum Rotating Machining Instructions Configuring the Rotary Machining Output Rules Used to Determine the Angular Position of the Tool
983
For example, on an C axis rotary machine, the tool can move along the Z axis but any Y motion is converted into an angular move around the C axis. Note that you can specify an angular co-ordinate directly in the Co-ordinate Input dialog by stating the angle. You could do this, for example, by entering C90. If you had to, you could also do this by entering a distance in the Y axis equal to one quarter of the circumference (pi times D over 4). The real use for this is when the distance to travel was originally described as a linear distance around the cylinder. The Angular (Move menu) command lets you specify an angular move around the spindle of the machine tool, while optionally stating a new XYZ position. As can be seen from this diagram, the current CPL and tool remain aligned with respect to each other as the tool moves to a new angular position. The co-ordinate information is always related to the current CPL, but the Angular move is always around the spindle.
984
Radial Milling
This involves features that lie around the diameter of a turned part, such as drilled holes, slots and pockets. In Radial mode, the tools axis always points towards the turned parts centreline. To select this mode, pick a tool and set its Turret, Orientation to Radial and set its Tool Mode to Driven. By selecting Driven, the tool will be rotated at the given Speed and the main spindle becomes the C Axis. Select the Rotary Mode (M-Functions) command to switch on the C axis.
985
Axial Milling
By setting the turret orientation to Axial, you can perform a number of milling operations looking along the axis of the machine tool spindle. To select this mode, pick a tool and set its Turret, Orientation to Axial and set its Tool Mode to Driven. By selecting Driven, the tool is rotated at the given Speed and the main spindle becomes the C Axis. Select the Rotary Mode (M-Functions) command to switch on the C axis mode (or alternatively, if a Y axis is available on the machine tool, you can select Planar mode). The example below shows the difference in toolpath generation between these modes when performing a drilling operation on the end of the turned part:
In Rotary mode, co-ordinates are still input in the same manner as for Planar mode (Cartesian), but the resultant CNC output will be angular (polar).
986
To mill the Y axis example shown below, involves milling planar features that lie around the diameter of a turned part, such as flanges, drilled holes, slots and pockets. Note that in Radial mode, the tools axis always points towards the turned parts centreline.
987
To avoid this situation, use the Reset Rotary Datum (M-Functions menu) command to reset the rotary angle into the range 0-360 degrees. Note that this will have no effect on the tool position or orientation: only the rotary angle address value will change. There must be an equivalent function available on the machine tool to perform this operation.
988
Note that the selected instructions to be transformed must be all rotary or all planar the instructions may not be mixed.
Note that the linking moves will be different between Rotary and Planar rotations for axial work. Rotary rotations
Planar rotations
989
990
991
992
993
Note that you must have at least one user-defined port to set a Track CPL port, since standard ports cannot be re-orientated.
994
Edgecam for B-axis lathes Edgecam for B-axis lathes offers the following main features: Support for b-axis positioning on the upper turret Planar milling XYZ only with B-axis tilted B-axis can be programmed on both main and sub-spindle
Operations are not supported using the new sub-spindle and B-axis code generators. The exception to this is the Parting Off operation which is supported. If an unsupported operation is selected a message ("Incompatible code generator - use cycles") is displayed.
Prerequisites for B-axis turning In order to perform B-axis machining in Edgecam you require the appropriate turning licence and a code generator configured to suit your machine tool. See Also Preparing the Model for Manufacture Machining the Part (B-axis Turning)
995
4. If you are working with solids, perform a Feature Find (Solids menu) as required on the Turn CPL. 5. Define your stock using the Stock/Fixture (Geometry menu) command. See Creating Stock or Fixtures.
6. Create the appropriate CPLs on the B-axis faces you wish to machine. Set the work plane to Mill (XY). The origin for the CPL can be set as required; in the example below the origin position has been set to the original turn datum. See Creating New CPLs.
6.
996
7. If you are working with solids, perform a Feature Find (Solids menu) command as required on these Baxis faces. 8. Draw spindle geometry (this can be a simple 2D line drawing of the chuck profile) or insert the solid model of the chuck or collet. 9. Create the spindle fixture using the Stock/Fixture (Geometry menu) command. Choose the Turn Billet option (for 2D profiles) or digitise (for solid models). See Creating Stock or Fixtures. 10. Position the spindle geometry so that the component protrudes from the spindle by the desired amount using the Transform, Translate (Edit menu) command.
10.
997
11. Go to Manufacture mode and specify the initial setup parameters. See Defining a Machining Sequence.
998
2. Before you can machine the b-axis face you must first orientate the B and C-axes so that the tool is normal to the face to be machined. You can do this by using the Lathe Index (Move menu) command and indexing to the predefined CPL named angle (see Preparing the Model for Manufacture, step 6). See Lathe Index Command. Please note that there are several commands that can be used to position the B-axis. See Positioning to a B-axis Face. 3. After indexing to the B-axis face, milling commands can then be performed as required.
3.
999
Face milling on an angled face 4. Checking the Maintain Index option on the tool change command dialog saves you having to re-index back to the CPL following a tool change. See Maintaining the Index Position. This is useful when performing multiple machining cycles on the same face (see below):
Drilling on an angled face If you attempt to perform machining on a face that is not normal to the tool an error will be issued entity does not lie in plane of CPL.
1000
When selecting a turning tool or fixed milling tool the active CPL automatically reverts back to the last used spindle turn CPL
1001
Planar/Rotary Mode
Rotary mode is available when driven tools are positioned in the following orientations: Axial (B0) Reverse Axial (B180) Radial (B90)
Note If a CPL is selected that is offset from the centreline planar mode is forced. This means that the C-axis is fixed and you can drive only the X,Y and Z axes. Also see What is Rotary Milling?
1002
If you attempt to perform machining on a face that is not normal to the tool an error will be issued entity does not lie in plane of CPL. There are several methods available for positioning the b-axis: Specifying an Angle in the Tool Change Command Using the Move Angular Command Performing a Lathe Index Command
1003
Driven Tools loaded Axial or Radial When a tool is loaded axial or radial the NC coordinates generated are relative to the selected spindle turn datum i.e. G54 (Main Spindle) & G55 (Sub Spindle).
Driven Tools loaded at B90 When a driven tool is loaded at B0 or B90 the NC coordinates generated are from the selected spindle datum position but with the Z axis in line with the tool. In these cases a datum change should be output to the NC i.e. G68.1 See also B-axis Angular Convention Loading Tools at an Angle
1004
Angular to open the dialog below (you can also access this help using the Help button in the dialo
1005
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
1006
Using the Maintain Index option on the tool change command dialog forces an index move back to the previous index position. This saves you having to perform a separate command to index back to the CPL after each toolchange. The Maintain Index check box only appears on the tool change dialog after an index command has been previously performed. Upon selecting a turning tool or any static cutter the datum is automatically reset to the turn datum. If Maintain Index is specified following a rotary rotate the C-axis is repositioned back to the C orientation of the original CPL.
1007
(you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
1008
Edgecam for sub-spindle lathes Edgecam for sub-spindle lathes offers the following main features: Support for one fixed sub-spindle Support for one upper turret and one lower turret Side by side Sequence Window for twin spindle / twin turret Time line for program verification Simulation of main and sub-spindle movements Synchronisation and turret priority Automated sub-spindle lathe setup Spindle docking Bar feed
Operations are not supported using the new sub-spindle and b-axis code generators. The exception to this is the Parting Off operation which is supported. If an unsupported operation is selected a message ("Incompatible code generator - use cycles") is displayed. Prerequisites In order to perform sub-spindle machining in Edgecam you require the appropriate licence and a code generator configured to suit your machine tool. A sample code generator based on the Mori Seiki MT machine is included.
1009
See also Preparing the Model for Manufacture Machining the Part in Sub-spindle Turning
1010
1011
1012
Note how the Sequence Window displays instructions on different spindles and turrets. 2. Use the Sequence Window to switch to the Lower turret - right-click on the Lower turret title bar and in the shortcut menu click Select. The asterisk moves to the lower turret and the upper turret instructions are greyed out. 3. Switch to the Sub-spindle using M-Functions menu) The sub-spindle CPL is displayed (see below): Select Spindle (see details).
4. Create some machining on the Lower Turret and Sub-spindle. Moves are now performed relative to the sub-spindle CPL.
4.
1013
5. Check the instructions Time Line and Sequence Window. 6. Select the Main spindle and position a Finish turn tool to a safe start point.
6. Use the Synchronise Turrets to tell the lower turret to wait until the upper turret has finished machining. At the same time the lower turret will take control of the spindle. See Synchronisation and Turret Priority. The synchronisation commands are lined up in the Sequence Window to make it easier to read. Following synchronisation both turrets start again simultaneously until reaching the next synchronisation point. 7. Create some Finish machining. 8. Perform a spindle docking command (see diagram). Before docking ensure both turrets are at the safe Tool Change position. The main spindle has to be selected before docking can occur (click here to see Sequence Window) The docking command prompts for a z clearance position (relative to main spindle CPL) the grip position is defined during lathe setup. Also see Spindle Docking. 9. Perform a Parting Off operation. When the part off is complete the sub-spindle is returned to its home position. The display of the sub-spindle at the grip position is turned off. The parting tool can then be sent back to its toolchange position. See Moving the Sub-spindle. 10.
9.
1014
10. A bar feed can be performed to set up the main spindle stock for the next program run through. To do this, load a bar stop tool and select the Bar Feed (Move menu) cycle. See Bar Feed Cycle. The instruction list shows a complete sub-spindle machining sequence. The time line can be used as a validation tool to ensure synchronisation positions are correctly placed. Edgecam simulation with the Constant option unchecked also gives a good indication that the synchronisation positions are correctly placed. Click View menu Simulate Batch. Bar feed is programmed typically at the beginning or end of the machining sequence. To simulate bar feed you need to run the simulation in batch mode. If bar feed is at the end of the sequence check Initial Stock , this means the main spindle stock defined in Edgecam will be displayed as soon as you start Simulator. Specify the number of times you want the simulation to run by specifying the Batch Size. See Sub-Spindle Simulation. Please note that in sub-spindle turning, two instances of stock can be machined independently. The Features Window is used to assign the stock to the main spindle or the sub-spindle respectively. See Assigning Stock and Fixtures for Sub-Spindle Simulation.
1015
When a fixed turning tool is selected the CPL automatically reverts back to the main spindle or sub-spindle CPL.
1016
Bar Pulling
Use Move menu Move Bar Pull to open the dialog below.
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
1017
Sub-Spindle Docking
Use Move menu Spindle Docking to open the dialog below.
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
1018
(You can also access this help using the cycle dialog's Help button.)
1019
Prior to selecting the command perform a tool change to select a bar stop device; this must be a fixed tool. The main spindle needs be selected as the coordinates for the cycle are relative to the main spindle part datum. 1. Choose one of three different strategies to control the bar stop movements, depending on the type of bar stop device being used. Z First Move the z-axis first X First Move the x-axis first Direct Move z and x-axis together 2. Specify the Feedrate at which bar stop is traversed in units per minute or units per revolution. 3. Specify the Speed at which the spindle rotates in revolutions per minute. 4. Specify a Dwell Time in seconds. This will be applied to each dwell point in the process. After specifying the dialog parameters you are prompted for an approach, start and end position. These can be digitised or specified using coordinate input. The bar feed cycle generates standard tool movements in Edgecam but makes no attempt to control the display of the stock feeding out. The bar feed is typically performed at the start or end of the machining sequence (see below for an example of a typical bar feed process). 1. Advance the bar stop device to X and Z approach position at rapid rate. 2. Advance the bar stop device to X and Z start position at feed rate. 3. Open main spindle C. The bar will now be applying pressure against the bar stop.
4. Dwell (time it takes for the chuck to open). 5. Feed out to Z end. 6. Close chuck. 7. Dwell (time it takes for chuck to close). You must ensure that chuck is closed before moving off.
1020
Synchronising Turrets
To synchronise turrets follow the procedure in Synchronising Turrets. Where the procedure contains information specific to a code generator type (adaptive or non-adaptive), it is the adaptive information which is applicable (sub-spindle code generators are based on adaptive templates).
1021
At the start of the machining sequence an Update Fixtures (M-Functions menu) command is needed to state which fixtures are in use. There are two methods of starting the Edgecam Simulator for sub-spindle simulation. See Sub-spindle Simulation.
1022
Sub-spindle Simulation
There are two methods of starting the Edgecam Simulator for sub-spindle simulation: Standard Simulation Mode In standard simulation mode the simulation is played through one complete sequence. If stock has not been defined on the sub-spindle the sub-spindle machining will be shown cutting only air. If you want to see cutting on sub-spindle stock you need to define sub-spindle stock in Edgecam.
Batch Mode Simulation - Simulate Batch (View menu) command In batch mode the machining sequence is played a specified number of times. If no stock has been defined on the sub-spindle the sub-spindle machining will be shown cutting only air on the first run through (as it would be on the machine). Near the end of the first run through the in- progress stock is then transferred to the subspindle. The second run through shows cutting of the in-progress stock on the sub-spindle. If you want to see cutting on sub-spindle on the first run through define sub-spindle stock in Edgecam. Bar feed is programmed typically at the beginning or end of the machining sequence. To simulate bar feed you need to run the simulation in batch mode. If bar feed is at the end of the sequence check Initial Stock, this means the main spindle stock defined in Edgecam will be displayed as soon as you start Edgecam Simulator. If you have defined the bar feed at the beginning of the sequence do not check Initial Stock. Initial stock will not be displayed when initially starting Simulator but will be shown feeding out of the chuck when the bar feed cycle is simulated.
1023
This example shows a polygonal profile containing all these transformations. Tapered Profile (Geometry menu) Applies a start and end taper to a 2D profile consisting of lines and arcs. You nominate matching conditions for upper and lower profiles and blending conditions with adjacent entities (see example). Linked Profile (Geometry menu) Used to link (manually or automatically) two separate 2D profiles of different heights, using closest node, closest position, proportional, or node-to-node strategies (see example). Any Design Intent element is easily modified using the Entity Data (Edit menu) commands. Note that to edit a link on a Linked Profile, you must use the Entity Data, Link Profile (Edit menu) command. The Wire Section (Geometry menu) command lets you add section lines to help visualise the Design Intent. Manufacturing the part is simple; because most of the information is already contained in the Design Intent, only a few main commands are required: Select Wire (Wire Cycles menu) Specifies the wire diameter and upper & lower guide levels. Machine Design (Wire Cycles menu) Machines the selected Design Intent, allowing you to nominate the support tag size, cutting strategy and lead parameters. 2D Destruct (Wire Cycles menu) - Erodes all material inside an area defined by closed 2D geometry, while ensuring that no solid piece is freed to drop from the component. 2D Profile (Mill Cycles menu) Profiles around selected 2D geometry. Cut Support Tag (Wire Cycles menu) Machines any support tags remaining from a previous wire machining cycle. CNC code is produced by Code Generator files with the extension *.WCP. The Code Generator files also provide access to a variety of system variables and commands.
1024
1025
1026
Linked Profile (Geometry menu) Tapered Profile (Geometry menu) Transformed Profile (Geometry menu) Wire Section (Geometry menu) You select one of these commands to generate the manufacturing information (Design Intent) within Design mode. Wire Erosion is the only manufacturing discipline in Edgecam that works in this way - all other modules create all manufacturing information and toolpaths in Manufacture mode.
1027
Tapered Profiles
The simplest method of Wire Erosion is to drive the wire around a single profile. The wire can be held vertically or at a specified angle. You can do this using the Tapered Profile (Geometry menu) command.
You might use a Tapered Profile where a circular profile is tapered down to a smaller profile to form a plug shape. The Tapered Profile command generates Design Intent data from a selected profile. Taper parameters determine the wire orientation. Lines and arcs attached to the profile element display the effect of the commands parameters. For code generation purposes, Edgecam defines the selected profile in XY co-ordinates and the generated profile in UV co-ordinates. Once you are happy with the Design Intent, you may create the toolpath by using the Manufacture mode command Machine Design (Wire Cycles menu). See Also Creating 2D Profiles Creating Tapered Profiles Using Parameters for Tapered Profile Using Arc Parameters for Tapered Profile
1028
Creating 2D Profiles
The simplest type of Wire Erosion is where a wire is held vertically and cuts around a profile:
Select the command Tapered Profile (Geometry menu), set the Start and End taper angle modifiers to zero and enter a block thickness. You then select a single profile to cut.
1029
See Also Example of a Constant Taper Profile Example of a Profile with a Changing Taper Example of a Cylindrical Corner Type Example of a Conical Corner Type Example of an Elliptical Corner Type
Creating 2D Profiles Using Parameters for Tapered Profile Using Arc Parameters for Tapered Profile
1030
Views Specifies the views in which the Design Intent profile and fencing are displayed. Thickness Defines the thickness of the component (from the bottom profile to the top profile). Start Taper, End Taper Defines the angle of taper at the start and end of each profile element. Zero degrees is vertical (if both the Start and End taper are zero, the top profile would be the same size as the bottom profile).
Arc... Specifies the corner parameters for the profile. See Using Arc Parameters for Tapered Profile. Fence Controls the number of extra display lines shown between the two profiles. This must be a positive number. This example has been created with a Fence parameter setting of 4: Colour Specifies the colour in which the Design Intent profile and fencing are displayed. A hollow box indicates that you want to use the native colour of the original profile. Style Specifies the line style in which the Design Intent profile and fencing are displayed. A hollow box indicates that you want to use the native line style of the original profile.
1031
1032
Transforming Profiles
The shape of the part may be defined by a single profile, a block thickness and transformation parameters defining how to derive a second profile from the first. Links are automatically generated between similar segments of the profiles. You can do this using Transformed Profile (Geometry menu) .
You might use this to simply cut a 2D profile of a certain thickness. A more complex use might be to rotate a circle about its centre to form the second profile. In this example a hexagon has been scaled and rotated:
This command generates design intent data from a selected profile. The data controls the wire position using one profile with attached transformation data. Transformation parameters are associated to each profile element. A similar translated, rotated and scaled profile is used to give a visual representation of the block. For code generation purposes, Edgecam defines the selected profile in XY co-ordinates and the generated profile in UV co-ordinates. Once you are happy with the profile, you may create the toolpath by using the Manufacture mode command Machine Design (Wire Cycles menu).
See Also
Scaling and Rotating the Profile Using Parameters for Transformed Profile
1033
Use the command Transformed Profile (Geometry menu) with the following values: Modifier Thickness Rotation Scale Fence Setting 25 30 .5 4
This creates the following Design Intent (seen in Top and Isometric views):
1034
Use Transformed Profile (Geometry menu) with these values: Parameter Thickness X Increment Y Increment Scale Fence Setting 25 10 20 .75 4
This produces the following Design Intent (shown in, clockwise from top left, Top, Isometric, Right and Front views):
1035
Views Specifies the views in which the Design Intent profile and fencing are displayed. Thickness Defines the plate thickness of the material. X Increment Specify the displacement in X from the original profile. Y Increment Specify the displacement in Y from the original profile Rotation Specify the rotation in degrees from the original profile. Scale Specify the enlargement factor for the second profile. Fence Controls the number of extra display lines shown between the two profiles. This must be a positive number. This example has been created with a Fence parameter setting of 4. Colour Specifies the colour in which the Design Intent profile and fencing are displayed. A hollow box indicates that you want to use the native colour of the original profile. Style Specifies the line style in which the Design Intent profile and fencing are displayed. A hollow box indicates that you want to use the native line style of the original profile.
1036
You might want to use a Linked Profile on a part with different upper and lower profiles, for example a lower rectangular profile and an upper circular profile. The command generates design intent data for two selected profiles. This data controls the wire position and orientation using these profiles.
Note that you may not use a window to select the profiles. Links define locations where the wire passes through both profiles: you digitise a node on the first profile and then link it to a node on the second profile. You can create these links either automatically or manually. The link is represented by a line from the first to the second location. The line is attached to both the first and the second profile element. For code generation purposes, Edgecam defines the first selected profile in XY co-ordinates and the last selected profile in UV co-ordinates. Once you are satisfied with the profile, you may create the toolpath by using the Manufacture mode command Machine Design (Wire Cycles menu). See Also Using Parameters for Linked Profile Using Automatic Links Linking Profiles Manually
1037
Views Specifies the views in which the Design Intent profile and fencing are displayed. Fence Controls the number of extra display lines shown between the two profiles. This must be a positive number. This example has been created with a Fence parameter setting of 4:
Automatic Links This controls how the profiles are to be linked. See Using Automatic Links. Colour Specifies the colour in which the Design Intent profile and fencing are displayed. A hollow box indicates that you want to use the native colour of the original profile. Style Specifies the line style in which the Design Intent profile and fencing are displayed. A hollow box indicates that you want to use the native line style of the original profile.
1038
Closest Location All nodes link to the closest location in X and Y dimensions on the other profile:
Proportional Each node links to a location spaced around the second profile by a proportionally equal distance to their spacings around the first profile:
Once the automatic links have been generated, the cycle allows you to modify links, delete links or add new links. Node To Node Each node links to an analogous location on the second profile:
1039
1040
3. If necessary, digitise a new start point and direction for the profile chain and perform a finish. 4. Digitise the second profile for Wire Links using the Chain button. Then perform a finish.
5. If necessary, digitise a new start point and direction for the profile chain and perform a finish. A link line is now shown between the two profiles. This link can be moved dynamically around the profiles using the mouse.
5.
1041
6. Digitise the first link node. This fixes one end of the link onto the digitised point on the first profile.
7. Digitise the second link node. This fixes the other end of the link onto the second profile. You are now prompted to Relocate an existing link or create new links. If you do not want to continue, perform a finish.
See Also Relocating Links in Linked Profile Creating New Links in Linked Profile Deleting Links in Linked Profile
1042
1043
5. Digitise to fix the new position of the link. You are now prompted to Relocate an existing link or create new links. If you do not want to continue, perform a finish.
5.
1044
1045
2. Digitise the first link node. This fixes one end of the link onto the digitised point on the first profile.
3. Digitise the second link node. This fixes the other end of the link onto the second profile. You are now prompted to Relocate an existing link or create new links.
3.
1046
1047
1048
The Wire Section (Geometry menu) command allows you to create such a cross-section line, composed of normal Edgecam line and arc entities.
To produce a cross-section 1. Select the Wire Section command. The parameters for the command are displayed. 2. Choose the parameter settings for the command. Level Specify the height at which Edgecam is to create the cross-section. Tolerance Defines the tolerance to which Edgecam creates the cross-section. 3. Click on OK. 4. Digitise the appropriate Design Intent. Note that you may not use a window to select the profiles. 5. Perform a finish. Edgecam now generates the new cross-section.
1049
Editing Commands
Apply to All Individual Match
Notes
Affects entire profile. Cannot alter links. Affects part of the profile. Cannot alter links. Matches parameters of selected profile to that of target profile. Cannot alter links May be used to alter Linked Profiles, including relocating existing nodes or creating new nodes.
Link Profile
See Also Editing Transformed Profiles Editing Tapered Profiles Editing Linked Profiles
1050
1051
Note that the Taper Match parameter is now available. This is only available when you edit a Tapered Profile, and allows you to specify a taper for the selected section of profile. This taper is also applied to adjacent profile sections. Which adjacent sections are affected depends on whether you used the Apply to All or Individual commands, and which ends of the section you digitise. 4. Change any other parameters as necessary. 5. Click on the OK button. Edgecam now re-creates the Wire Profile using the new parameters.
1052
3. Change any parameters as necessary. To alter nodes or create new nodes, you must check the Location box. 4. Click on the OK button. If you checked the Location box you can now alter the nodes of the profile. See Relocating Links in Linked Profile or Creating New Links in Linked Profile for details. Edgecam now re-creates the linked profile using the new parameters.
1053
1054
* Note: Guide height values are only applied to longhand output. Code Generators working at guide heights
should have taper mode disabled and 4-axis circular moves should be converted to linear moves.
1055
1. Select the Machine Design (Wire Cycles menu) 2. Select any appropriate parameters. 3. Click on the OK button. 4. Digitise the wire profile to machine. 5. Digitise the position for the start hole. Any simulation of the machining now occurs. See Also Using Parameters for Machine Design Specifying the Lead Parameters
command.
1056
Lead tab These parameters specify how the wire approaches and leaves the profile. See Specifying the Lead Parameters. Constant Cut Check this box to only cut the profile in a specified direction. This is usually only possible if the machine tool can cut the wire and be re-threaded at the cycle start point. Feedrate Controls the rate at which the machine tool moves the wire in the XY/UV planes. Offset Adds an amount to the offset of the wire from the digitised profile (a value of zero gives a path which is the wire radius from the digitised profile). You may want to allow for the radial thickness of the wire when machining the profile. Number of Passes Specifies the number of passes the wire makes along the specified profile. Support Tag Specifies the length of the support tag to be left at the end of the cut. This stop retains any material that may drop away. For information on how to remove this, see Cutting the Support Tag. If you select <Digitise>, after digitising the start of the profile, you are prompted to make a free or an entity digitise to define the end of the profile. A marker showing the end point appears and you can dynamically drag this in the same way as for the start point. Once you fix the position with a digitise, the distance to the end of the profile is calculated and used as the Support Tag size. Twizzle Radius Specify the radius of any twizzle moves you want on the corners of the profile. Tolerance Defines the tolerance to which Edgecam generates the toolpath. Overlap Specifies the distance by which the wire cuts past the start point of the cycle. This is overridden by any value entered for the Support Tag parameter. Compensation Select between: Pathtrace Edgecams powerful tool offset calculation facility Controller The machine tool controllers own compensation facility. Radius Compensation Used with Compensation (above) to define how the wire offset is to be applied (as viewed in the direction of travel): None No compensation is to be used. Left The compensation is to be applied to the left of the toolpath. Right The compensation is to be applied to the right of the toolpath. Colour Specifies the colour used for the profile. The Native option makes the generated geometry the same colour as the selected entities.
1057
These parameters control how lead in and lead out moves are to be applied when machining the Design Intent. Note that the maximum value allowed for Angle In or Angle Out is 180 degrees. Any higher value entered for these parameters will be taken to be 180 degrees. How these parameters are applied is illustrated in this example of a lead in move (the parameters are therefore Angle In, Radius In and Length In):
1058
Note that these cycles only work: On normal Edgecam geometry, not Design Intent profiles. With Code Generator files that contain the 2D Destruct and 2D Profile macros.
These cycles do not automatically prompt you to specify start holes. See Generating Start Hole Positions for details.
1059
Using 2D Destruct
The 2D Destruct (Wire Cycles menu) command begins with a feed move from the current wire position to the start point for the cycle. It then performs a concentric area clearance cycle from the centre of the area to the boundary of a digitised XY closed profile. You can digitise multiple profiles using this cycle. Any linking moves (where the wire is cut) are indicated by a dashed line style. The parameters for the cycle are: Feedrate Controls the rate at which the machine tool moves the wire in the XY/UV planes. Offset Adds an amount to the offset of the wire from the boundary profile left by the cycle (a value of zero gives a path which is the wire radius from the boundary profile). You may want to allow for the radial thickness of the wire when machining the profile. Stepover Specify the percentage of the wire diameter as the stepover value. From this Edgecam calculates the distance to move out by on each consecutive destruct pass.
Note that this can produce unwanted results. If there are sharp internal corners, only values of 50 (percent) or less are safe. For round holes, you can use values up to 100. Feature Name Specify the name given to the entities selected for the cycle. Tolerance Specify the interpolation tolerance of any curves you digitise to define the boundary profile.
1060
Using 2D Profile
The 2D Profile (Wire Cycles menu) command begins with a feed move from the current wire position to the start point for the cycle. It then performs a single pass along the left or right of a digitised XY profile. You can digitise multiple profiles using this cycle. Any linking moves (where the wire is cut) are indicated by a dashed line style. The parameters for the cycle are: Feedrate Controls the rate at which the machine tool moves the wire in the XY/UV planes. Offset Adds an amount to the offset of the wire from the boundary profile left by the cycle (a value of zero gives a path which is the wire radius from the boundary profile). You may want to allow for the radial thickness of the wire when machining the profile. Twizzle Radius Specify the radius of any twizzle moves you want on the corners of the profile. Tolerance Specify the interpolation tolerance of any curves you digitise to define the profile. Compensation Select Control or Pathtrace to determine whether the geometry or the wire centre path is output. Feature Name Specify the name given to the entities selected for the cycle. Lead tab Allows you to specify the Lead parameters. See Specifying the Lead Parameters for details.
1061
1062
1063
Note that only the toolpaths are altered by these commands - there is no alteration of the original design geometry.
1064
1065
Maximum Inclination The maximum angle of tilt that the wire leaned through at any point on the toolpath. Wire Length The total length of the wire between the two guides. The Upper and Lower parameters define the heights of each guide in the Select Wire (Wire Cycles menu) command. If these have not been set, the reported Wire Length will be zero (as in the above example). Cut Length The maximum length of wire engaged in cutting as the wire moved along the toolpath.
1066
1067
Insert This allows you to insert one or more instructions above the item you have selected in the list. An arrow indicates the insertion point. Uncheck the Insert option after you have inserted all required instructions.
Search Opens a dialog for searching for text occurring in the Sequence Window; in the names of tools and cycles for example. For more information see Searching for Text in the Sequence Window. Group For information see Grouping Instructions. Rename Opens the name of the item for editing. Reset Names Sets names you have changed back to the original; either the selected items or all renamed items. 4-Axis Commands Synchronise
Use this to retrospectively synchronise, by inserting Synchronise instructions above existing instructions in the sequence - see Synchronising Turrets. 4-Axis Commands Spindle Docking
Use this to insert Spindle Docking instructions above existing instructions in the sequence - see Sub-Spindle Docking. 4-Axis Commands Spindle Movement
Use this to insert Move Sub Spindle instructions above existing instructions in the sequence - see Moving the Sub-spindle. 4-Axis Commands Spindle Bar Pull
Use this to insert Bar Pull instructions above existing instructions in the sequence - see Bar Pulling. Priority
1068
Sets the spindle priority. This might be needed after using Synchronise, for example. Side by Side This places each sequence in its own tab. The tab label acts as the sequence name (in that you can right-click on it to display the shortcut menu for the sequence). This is in addition to the normal use of the tab label to switch to the tab. Also, for twin turret machines, the Upper and Lower turrets are displayed as two columns of instructions placed next to each other. Single Scroll Bar This scrolls both the panes (in Side by Side view, one pane for each turret) using the same scroll bar.
1069
1070
1071
1072
Merging Sequences
Only available in the milling and turning environment. Not supported by rotary milling.
1073
Rationalising Sequences
Use Instructions menu Rationalise to open the dialog detailed below (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog).
1074
The Instructions menu commands are: Edit Change a commands parameters and any related co-ordinate input. If you have deleted any entities, you must respecify the entities required by the machining cycle. You can select more than one command at the same time. Aborting or Escaping at this stage deletes the cycle. Edit Screensnap Change a commands parameters and any related co-ordinate input by digitising the appropriate toolpath. Insert On/off toggle. When on, it allows a new instruction(s) to be inserted. Move Move a commands position within the list. You may have to create commands out of sequence, but Move allows you to correct the order of events. You can select more than one command at the same time. An example of this is when drilling a start hole for roughing. By drilling the hole after the Roughing cycle has been created you know exactly where to position the hole. You can then move the instructions for the hole to before the cycle. Copy Duplicate a command at another location in the instruction list. Delete Remove a command from the instruction list. You can select more than one command at the same time. Regenerate Regenerates the machining sequence from the selected instruction onwards. Regenerate Screensnap Regenerates the machining sequence from the digitised toolpath onwards. Synchronise (Only used for Four Axis Turning) Inserts a turret synchronisation command into the instruction list. View Displays the machining sequence from the selected instruction onwards, including parameter input and screen digitises. View Screensnap Displays the machining sequence from the digitised toolpath onwards, including parameter input and screen digitises. Simulate - Displays a tool simulation from the selected instruction onwards. Simulate Screensnap Displays a tool simulation from the digitised toolpath onwards. Operation All subsequent instructions are grouped under an Operation name, until you select the Operation command again. Rationalise (Milling environment only) Enables you to re-order the instructions in a single sequence to rationalise the NC file by one or more criteria. Choose between sorting by Tool, CPL or Index. Also see Rationalise. Merge Sequences - (Milling and turning environment) Allows you to merge two or more sequences into one by
1075
appending the instructions in the second and subsequent sequences to those in the current sequence. Feature Check Checks machining instructions for valid features. When you select the command you will be prompted to either pick a feature or finish without any selection to check the entire sequence. When one or more features are selected the feedback window will list all the cycles and operations that use the feature(s) as their entity data. When you finish without any selection the entire sequence will be checked for cycles or operations that contain invalid entity data and the results displayed in the feedback window. See Also Choosing the Editing Options Selecting from the Instruction List Editing Instructions in the Sequence Window
1076
Screen Snap Check this box to select the command by digitising the appropriate toolpath, rather than by selecting the command from the instruction list. Operations Check this box to list only those operations defined in the current machining sequence, rather than all commands in the instruction list. Operations can be defined with the Operation (Instructions menu) command. Global Check this box to alter the Feeds, Speeds and Depth... parameters for all selected commands. Redraw Check this box to redraw the screen after you have edited the instruction list. Disable Automatic Regeneration Check this box to only regenerate the selected instructions. Edgecam defaults to regenerating all subsequent instructions, which you might consider unnecessary and timeconsuming if you were simply changing the colour of the toolpath.
Caution To avoid invalid results you should regenerate the toolpath before saving or generating CNC code. Click OK when you want to proceed. Note that you can also edit instructions using the shortcut menu in the Sequence Window.
1077
2. Click OK to continue.
1078
Select one or more of the options. You can re-specify the co-ordinate information for each of these aspects of the cycle after you click OK for the cycle parameter input dialog box.
Check this box to respecify the co-ordinates required by Edgecam. Once you click on the OK button you are prompted to enter this information in the usual manner for the particular command.
1079
1080
1081
1082
Splitting a Toolpath
The command Toolpath Split (Edit menu) lets you break a toolpath at a selected point to produce two separate toolpaths. This lets you insert new commands between the two toolpaths. Screen Snap Check this box to select a toolpath from the screen rather than a command from the instruction list. The toolpath will then be broken at the point nearest to the digitised point on the screen.
1083
Transform Rotate (Milling and Wire only) Rotates or copies a series of operations one or more times about a selected point. This is used where the same feature appears several times about a central point.
1084
Transform Translate Moves or copies a series of operations one or more times. This is used where the same feature appears more than once in a component.
In Wire Erosion, you may only translate the toolpath in the X and Y directions.
1085
1086
Simplified block graphics are created for you by default and their dimensions can be parametrically adjusted to suit your machine tool configuration. Optionally, you can substitute the parametric graphics with your own fully detailed graphics by modeling the machine tool in a solid modeler such as Edgecam Part Modeler. Elements of the machine tool such as heads and turrets are represented as graphics. The 'Machine tree' provides an easy-to-use method of controlling the display and kinematics of each machine tool component. The graphics are positioned in an axis configuration built into the Machine Tree (such as upper ATC on the B Axis, B Axis on the Y Axis and so on, or Table on the C Axis, C Axis on the A Axis and so on). There are also graphics for fixtures, such as tool mounting blocks, and chucks, that you can store in a library for use in the machine tool simulation. The Machine Simulation setup is contained in the code generator; as created in Code Wizard. For correct simulation you need to specify details such as the axis configuration and the Home positions; see the Code Wizard help for full details. Edgecam Simulator only checks for collisions between Chucks, Holders (excluding index turret mounting blocks) & Tools. Please note that Edgecam Simulator is not strictly time-based, so twin turret turning simulations may lose synchronisation. You can counter this; see Simulator help for details. See also Adding Machine Simulation to Existing Turning Code Generators.
1087
1088
1089
3.
1090
1091
1092
1093
(you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
1094
- example.nc - example-set.nc
When a single .nc file is generated, there is no -1 included in the name. This clarifies that the file is for a single turret machine. You can specify an extension other than .nc. When a multiple turret turning sequence is generated, the CNC filename is generated to the following format:
The Edgecam Editor and Communications modules interpret and use long filenames generated from Edgecam (or any application) when running on a Windows NT installation. Note, however, that long filenames are truncated when viewed from Windows 3.1 and Novell networks. For example, the file 1234567890abc.nc will be truncated to 123456~.nc. The name assigned to the setup file is configurable in the Code Generator source file, for example, instead of including -SETUP in the filename, it may be specified as -HEADER. Any CNC file generated using an existing Code Generator that specifies a setup file name should be ignored and .set appended to the filename in its place.
1095
CAM Types Note that for AutoTAS tool assemblies to be compatible with Edgecam, each must have a recognisable CAMTYPE. In AutoTAS, every assembly has a defined ASSEMBLY TYPE, which in turn links to a CAMTYPE suitable for the CADCAM system in use. CAMTYPE definitions are stored in the AutoTAS file, ATYPE.INI and you should ensure that the following types are defined for each category. Category 1 Category 2 Category 3 Category 4
1096
1097
Mill Comment Position Geometric Diameter Corner Radius Flute Length Z Gauge No. of Teeth
Ballnose Comment Position Geometric Diameter Corner Radius Flute Length Z Gauge No. of Teeth
Taper Comment Position Geometric Diameter 1 Corner Radius Z Gauge No. of Teeth and two of the following three parameters: Diameter 2, Length or Angle
1098
1099
Note that where an included tip angle is loaded from the AutoTAS database no symbol ID will be entered in the toolchange dialog and the insert will be created using the angle value.
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
Whenever you want to see what tools were selected, so you can use them in your machining: Show the Features window and select the feature. Show the Properties window and note the tools in the 'ToolList'.
1105
CoroGuide Link
This link enables you to import tool data from the CoroGuide database into the Edgecam tooling database via the ToolStore or ToolKitAssistant application. The data imported is primarily tool geometry and it may be necessary to manually add mounting or tool kit information to the imported data. In all cases the tool definition must be checked against your specific requirements to ensure that the intended tool design has been achieved. Data is exported from CoroGuide as .xml files which can be loaded singly or in groups to the EdgecamToolStore database. As the Coroguide Link imports tooling data from an external source, it is your responsibility to ensure the data is correct for its purposes. CoroGuide is a registered trademark of Sandvik Coromant.
See Also CoroGuide Link Settings Launching CoroGuide Importing CoroGuide Data
1106
1107
Launching CoroGuide
When the Launch button in the ToolStore or ToolKit Assistant dialog is selected the CoroGuide software is launched so that tools may be defined from its database.
Note that the CoroGuide location must first have been specified. The tools may be saved and exported in .xml format for Edgecam ToolStore using CoroGuide "Export to" facilities. Note that when creating an XML file the assembly name in CoroGuide will be contained as a tool description and will be used as the tool ID within Edgecam ToolStore. The .xml file is regarded as a temporary file and can be deleted once the tool has been created.
1108
It is possible to select multiple files but if the data is incomplete or ambiguous it will be necessary to answer questions as the import progresses. When the .xml file is read the import link creates a new tool with the name (Description) contained within the file. In addition to the geometric parameters, the .xml file contains the names of tool components. These will be listed in the Notes tab of the Tool in the following form. Sandvik CoroGuide Tool (Subject field) Body R254-050Q22-12H Insert 393.CG20 03 52 During the import process the data in the .xml file will be checked for completeness and integrity and an error message displayed if it is not compatible with the ToolStore requirements. These checks will be made before writing data to the tool record. General Tool Data Description - from .xml file Supplier - Sandvik Family - CoroGuide Category - Mill and Drill or Turning or Grooving/Parting or Thread A CoroGuide material record will be created if required. No speed and feed information is available and it will be necessary to edit the insert record so that technology data links are set up between the insert and materials defined within the ToolStore. Tool Type Mapping CoroGuide contains tools of type milling, drilling, and turning. Subdivision of these into the more specific types required by the ToolStore is undertaken on the basis of parametric data describing the tool. CoroGuide drilling tools are all imported as Edgecam type Drill Included tip angle - Insert drills are all flat bottom - Solid drills are 140 degrees unless specified
CoroGuide milling tools are imported as Edgecam type Endmill, with the following exceptions If an included angle is present, type is always Taper Tool If there is a corner radius <diameter/2, then type is Bullnose If the tool description contains .4, then type is Ballnose. If there is a corner radius equal to diameter/2, then type is Ballnose
1109
If there is a Reach parameter, the type is T-Slot. Thread milling tools are not imported. CoroGuide turning tools are imported as External turning tools, with the following exceptions Tools with a Pitch or TPI value are threading tools Tools with a holder diameter are internal tools Tools with a reach parameter are grooving/parting tools The link will make the best deductions possible regarding the orientation of turning tools. Inserts If the .xml file contains insert data then an insert record will be created in the ToolStore and the tool being defined will be linked to it. Once an insert record has been created, tools using that same insert will connect to it. New records will only be created if a record of the specified name does not already exist. CoroGuide tools with an insert record will be treated as insert based tools in the ToolStore, all others are treated as solid carbide tools. Where the CoroGuide file contains both number of inserts and effective number of inserts the former will be recorded on the Notes tab as tool assembly information and the latter will be used as number of teeth/flutes for feed rate calculations. If the number of inserts is missing the effective number will be used for both purposes. Tool Units (Inch/Metric) are detected from the .xml file. Capto holders cannot be parameterized and no shank data will be imported. The use of Capto holders will be noted in the tool notes tab. In some cases when working with insert based tools there is no clear Flute Length parameter. The link will make the best deduction possible from the available data. If required data cannot be found you will be prompted to complete the tool definition. As the Coroguide Link imports tooling data from an external source, it is your responsibility to ensure the data is correct for its purpose.
1110
Obsolete Functionality
For reference purposes, here is the help on the Superseded Feature Finder dialog (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
1111
Obsolete Functionality
1112
1113
Obsolete Functionality
1114
Obsolete Functionality
Note a newly defined tool kit will not contain any tools. 2. Select the appropriate tool. 3. Click on OK.
1115
Obsolete Functionality
1116
Obsolete Functionality
You can enter data into these tables based either on data from tool manufacturers handbooks or from your own experience. Remember which units you are working in millimetres or inches. You cannot mix values within a single record, but you can have two records however, one for inches and one for millimetres. These records can have the same name (as long as they are using different units). Rough , Medium or Fine values can be selected for a cycle. The values for Surface Speed are in either metres per minute or feet per minute. The values for Feed 1 and Feed 2 are in chip per tooth (millimetres or inches per tooth). The values for Depth are in millimetres or inches. To create a new record in the Material Technology database Before proceeding, you should be familiar with the Tool Library. 1. Start the Tool Library program. The Tool Library dialog box appears. 2. Select Material from the Technology menu. The Material search dialog box appears. 3. Enter search parameters for the new table. 4. Click on OK. The Tool Library searches for and displays a list of any matching records. 5. Select the Insert operation control. The Insert Record dialog box appears. 6. Enter the parameters of the new record. Click on OK to save the record.
1117
Obsolete Functionality
1118
Obsolete Functionality
1119
1120
Obsolete Functionality
1121
1122
Obsolete Functionality
(These new operation dialogs have no Help button - the help is built into the dialogs themselves, as illustrations and 'tip' text.) This command is not present in the User Interface as standard, so you will need to add the command button to a toolbar or menu yourself. The command is in the Superseded Commands category. For reference purposes, here is the help on the Superseded Feature Finder dialog (you can also access this help by clicking the Help button in the dialog):
1123
Obsolete Functionality
Chamfer Operation
The Chamfer Operation command generates a single profile pass by selecting the top profile of a chamfered edge. This operation is superseded. The new version (of the same name) is available in the Operations menu. To use the old version you need to follow the procedure in Accessing Superseded Operations. The old version has no icon. Note that this operation will not work correctly with features found in Edgecam Version 9.0 or later, unless 'Options (menu) Preferences Solids (tab) Superseded Feature Find' is checked. See Also Sequence of Instructions in the Chamfer Operation Using the Chamfer Operation Chamfer Operation Notes
1124
Obsolete Functionality
1125
Obsolete Functionality
1126
Obsolete Functionality
The Chamfer Operation generates a single profile pass by selecting the top profile of a chamfered edge. The tool definition is used to automatically calculate the depth and offset. The tool is offset into the profile by the distance specified.
Note on drawing As most drawings do not draw the break edge, the Break Distance modifier can be used when chamfering profiles that have been drawn without a chamfer. This alters the depth and offset in the profile cycle to machine the desired corner break edge.
1127
Obsolete Functionality
1128
Obsolete Functionality
1129
Obsolete Functionality
1130
Obsolete Functionality
2D Profile Operation
The 2D Profile Operation command allows you to use several commands together in one operation. This operation is superseded by the Profiling operation; the command for this is in the Operations menu. To use the old version you need to follow the procedure in Accessing Superseded Operations. Please note that a new Profile operation was introduced in Edgecam version 7.75. The previous Profile operation is still available to pre-version 7.75 parts and will be used if the operation is edited or regenerated. To use the new method on an existing part, delete the old operation and re-apply the new operation. Note that this operation will not work correctly with features found in Edgecam Version 9.0 or later, unless 'Options (menu) Preferences Solids (tab) Superseded Feature Find' is checked. See Also Sequence of Instructions in the 2D Profile Operation Using the 2D Profile Operation
2D Profile Cycle
1131
Obsolete Functionality
1132
Obsolete Functionality
Profile Material on the Left This option is used to take advantage of the feature material side and to maintain associativity between the feature and the Profile operation. When manually identifying features in Edgecam Solid Machinist, the direction of the profile is automatically selected such that the material is on the left. Checking the Profile Material on the Left option on the General tab of the Preferences (Operations menu) dialog will allow the machining operation to cut the correct side of the feature without any further intervention from the user. This method can be used on wireframe geometry by chaining the profile in the correct direction so as to maintain the material on the left.
1133
Obsolete Functionality
3D Roughing Operation
The 3D Roughing Operation command allows you to combine a series of commands in one instruction. This operation is superseded by the Roughing operation; the command for this is in the Operations menu. To use the old version you need to follow the procedure in Accessing Superseded Operations. Note that this operation will not work correctly with features found in Edgecam Version 9.0 or later, unless 'Options (menu) Preferences Solids (tab) Superseded Feature Find' is checked. See Also Sequence of Instructions in the 3D Roughing Operation Using the 3D Roughing Operation
Roughing Cycle
1134
Obsolete Functionality
1135
Obsolete Functionality
* The operation allows blank level and depth fields. When no values are specified level and depth are taken
from the model.
1136
Obsolete Functionality
Pocket Operation
The Pocket command allows you to combine a series of commands in one instruction. This operation is superseded. To use it you need to add its command to a toolbar or menu from the Superseded Commands category. The operation has no icon. Note that this operation will not work correctly with features found in Edgecam Version 9.0 or later. See Also Sequence of Instructions in the Pocket Operation Using the Pocket Operation
2D Profile Cycle
1137
Obsolete Functionality
1138
Obsolete Functionality
1. Add the Pocket Operation command (in the Superseded Commands category) to a menu or toolbar. 2. Select the newly added command. 3. Digitise the pocket profiles. Perform a Finish to stop selecting entities making up the profile(s). 4. Digitise a new start point for the profile chain (if necessary). Perform a Finish. 5. Complete the dialog box for the operation. Click on OK. Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the pocket operation, including any moves to position the tool.
1139
Obsolete Functionality
See Also Sequence of Instructions in the Facemilling Operation Using the Facemilling Operation
1140
Obsolete Functionality
1141
Obsolete Functionality
1142
Obsolete Functionality
A new pencil mill cycle was introduced in Edgecam version 7.50. Please note that the Pencil Mill operation uses the "old" (i.e. pre-version 7.50) cycle. See Also Sequence of Instructions in the Pencil Mill Operation Using the Pencil Mill Operation
1143
Obsolete Functionality
button.
2. Digitise the surfaces to be machined, then perform a Finish. 3. Digitise the containment boundary entities (if required), then perform a Finish. 4. Complete the dialog box for the operation, then click OK. Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the pencil mill operation, including any moves to position the tool.
1144
Obsolete Functionality
1145
Obsolete Functionality
Surfaces Operation
Use Surfaces (Operations menu) to combine a series of commands in one instruction.
See Also Sequence of Instructions in the Surface Operation Using the Surface Operation
1146
Obsolete Functionality
button.
2. Digitise the surfaces to be machined, then perform a Finish. 3. Digitise the boundary entities (if any are required), then perform a Finish. 4. Digitise a point or a line to act as the start position for the operation, then perform a Finish. 5. Complete the dialog box for the operation, then click OK.* Edgecam now generates the toolpaths for the surface operation, including any moves to position the tool. * The operation allows blank level and depth fields. When no values are specified level and depth are taken from the model. Note that the Surface operation will still give an error for level and depth if Z Level Roughing is used (Lace, Areaclear or Boss) since these cycles require level and depth input.
1147
Obsolete Functionality
Finishing [Standard Sequence] Parallel Lace/Profiling/ Constant Cusp Finishing (licence permitting)
1148
Obsolete Functionality
1149
Obsolete Functionality
This example shows two sequences, one containing roughing cycles and one containing finishing cycles. Click on a sequence on the left and click on the Add >> button to move it to the list on the right of the dialog. Once you click on the OK button, all sequences listed on the right will be processed in Edgecam Verify in list order, from top to bottom.
1150
Obsolete Functionality
1151
Obsolete Functionality
Note that superseded holes cannot be machined by the Hole cycle (only the Superseded Hole cycle).
1152
Obsolete Functionality
Editing Features
You can modify feature information by using the Entity Data (Edit menu) command or by right-clicking on the feature in the Features Window and selecting the Edit command from the shortcut menu. You can also use the Properties Window (for certain properties only; Depth for example is not editable). Edgecam allows you to override attribute values such as depth, level, colour, name etc. However, if you reload the model the modifiers level, depth and diameter will be reset to the values of the reloaded solid. Any other properties are retained. When altering the level of a feature, the Preserve Depth option allows you to maintain the absolute depth. Otherwise the feature depth (which is relative to the level) will move with the level by default.
Setting comment attributes for use in Strategy Manager In Strategy Manager, you may need to determine if a hole feature needs to be finish reamed or bored or if the feature is a special feature requiring its own unique machining process. The Comment field on the edit dialog for hole and pocket/boss features allows you to set a comment attribute (of up to 255 characters). This text string allows you to label the feature and can then be checked in Strategy Manager to ensure that the appropriate machining process is applied.
1153
Obsolete Functionality
Although compatible in terms of the cycles they support, we recommend you use the latest Turn features, as found using the Feature Finder command. These are more intuitive to use and support more properties. An example of of superseded Turn feature is 'External Turn' (replaced by the 'Front Turn' and 'Back Turn' featues) - see an illustration of the full set... Edit Superseded Turn Features using the Turn Profile Feature dialog (or the Properties Window).
1154
Obsolete Functionality
Loaded in Edgecam as Multiple Faces Multiple Edges Single Trimmed Surface Single Curve
ACIS geometrical types are converted to Edgecam entities when they are referred to by the topological entities as listed above. The following table lists the ACIS geometrical types and their corresponding Edgecam equivalent entities:
ACIS Geometry
Surface SPHERE CONE TORUS Other types Curve STRAIGHT ELLIPSE radius ratio = 1.0 radius ratio 1.0 INTCURVE
Line
1155
Obsolete Functionality
Licencing Scheme
SAT and ACIS files are loaded as entities (lines, arcs, surfaces) or solid models, according to your Edgecam licences: Licence Solids Interface (retired at V9.0) to load as entities Use File Open Solid Machinist for ACIS
use install folder\cam\support\loadsat.pci where install folder is 'C:\Program Files\Edgecam' for example
not possible
Use File
Open
1156
Obsolete Functionality
1157
Obsolete Functionality
1158
Obsolete Functionality
Automatic Used on surface models where the holes and/or sides have not been defined (unnecessary for manufacture) and the model will find the top and bottom extends of the model. Only use this option when model has not been completely defined. Male Used on surface models where the analysis model meets with the bottom plane on the outer edge. Female Used where the outer walls are not to be selected for manufacture and therefore are not included in the analysis model. Specify Plane Use this option if you want to restrict the analysis to areas either above or below a set level, using the Analyse Below Plane and Z Level parameters.
1159
Obsolete Functionality
Analysis Viewer
The Analysis Viewer provides functions for visualising models within Edgecam. After creating an analysis model (or loading a .ppf file containing saved analysis data) you can use the Analysis Viewer to visualise the different surfaces prior to toolpath generation. Select the analysis model and use the Analysis Toolbar buttons (you will need to use a special configuration to see these) and the View Properties dialog to modify the analysis properties. Each button offers a popup-menu with several alternative options while the dialog provides access to all modifiers in one place.
From left to right the buttons provide the following options: Select the Analysis Model by name or number (if no name available). Specify the Analysis Type. Choose between Uncuttable, Steep Walls, Flat Lands and Z Level. Specify the Analysis Surface. Choose between Part, Cuttable and Uncuttable. Control the Analysis Display. Choose between Points, Curves or Surfaces. Toggle the XZ Clip Plane. Toggle the YZ Clip Plane. The clip planes can be moved using the arrow keys. XZ Clip uses Shift+ Up Arrow/Shift+ Down Arrow and YZ Clip uses Shift+Left/Shift + Right Arrow. Click on to display the Analysis View Properties dialog:
A graduated colour display gives greater visualisation of the part. Red indicates the worst and blue the best condition. A colour bar on the left side of the window explains what the colour depth indicates for different analysis types: Uncuttable Depth of uncuttable material as measured in the Z axis. Flat Lands The normal angle of the surface in relation to the XY plane. Steep Wall The steepness in degrees compared to the XY angle and the XY plane. Z Level The height of the surfaces along the Z axis. It is possible to view the part from all angles using the Rotate, Zoom or Pan commands.
1160
1161
Obsolete Functionality
1162
Obsolete Functionality
1163
Obsolete Functionality
1164
Obsolete Functionality
Tool Moves with Pecking For a pecking drilling cycle, the tool: 1. Rapids move in the workplane until over the first drill hole. 2. Rapids down to the clearance plane. 3. Feeds down to the first peck depth. 4. Rapids out to the retract plane. 5. Rapids down to a Safe Distance (specified on the Step tab) away from the material. 6. Feeds down to the second peck depth, and so on until the depth plane has been reached. 7. Rapid moves in the workplane to the next drilling point, and so on until all holes in the cycle have been drilled. At the end of the cycle, the tool rapids to the clearance plane.
1165
Obsolete Functionality
1166
Obsolete Functionality
1167
Obsolete Functionality
1168
Obsolete Functionality
The Entry parameters are: Tool Diameter Check this box to apply the Entry Feed rate until the full diameter of the tool is in the material. This is mutually exclusive with Entry Depth. Note that this parameter cannot be used if your current tool has a flat tip. Entry Depth Specify the value (or Digitise) the incremental depth to which the system is to apply the Entry Feed rate. Below this depth, the Plunge Feed rate is to be used. Entry Feed Specify the feedrate to be used down to either: the Entry Depth, or when the tool has drilled into the material to its maximum diameter. This depends on which parameter you used to define the Entry Depth.
1169
Obsolete Functionality
1170
Obsolete Functionality
1171
Obsolete Functionality
1172
Obsolete Functionality
1173
Obsolete Functionality
Please note that the direction of drilling is dependent on the tool position at the start of the toolpath. Note on merging optimised hole cycles When sequences are rationalised or otherwise re-ordered, a number of cycles are frequently grouped together for machining by a single tool. In the case of hole cycles this gives rise to a canned cycle (G81 etc) in the NC file for each Edgecam cycle instruction. Using the Merge Hole Cycle option of the Rationalise command enables you to group such instructions into a single cycle so that multiple, identical holes may be drilled with one G81 canned cycle instead of many individual canned cycles each drilling one hole. If cycles have different optimisation the combined cycle is set to <none> and is not optimised. The order of drilling will be as if cycles had never been optimised and thus the toolpath may change.